OWNER'S MANUAL. MINI HARDTOP 2 DOOR / 4 DOOR.

OWNER'S MANUAL.

MINI HARDTOP 2 DOOR / 4 DOOR.

LINK:

CONTENT & A-Z

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

WELCOME TO MINI.

OWNER'S MANUAL.

Thank you for choosing a MINI.

The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control you will have

on the road. We therefore strongly suggest:

Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new MINI. Also use the

Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It contains important information

on vehicle operation that will help you make full use of the technical features

available in your MINI. The manual also contains information designed to

enhance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to

maintaining the value of your MINI.

Any updates made after the editorial deadline can be found in the appendix of

the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.

Get started now. We wish you driving fun and inspiration with your MINI.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Navigation, Entertainment and Communication can be called up via the

Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.

NOTES

Information.............................................................................................................................. 6

QUICK REFERENCE

Entering..................................................................................................................................16

Set-up and use.......................................................................................................................20

On the road............................................................................................................................ 24

AT A GLANCE

Cockpit.................................................................................................................................... 32

Central Information Display (CID)..................................................................................36

Voice activation system.................................................................................................... 44

General settings................................................................................................................... 48

Owner's Manual media.......................................................................................................60

CONTROLS

Opening and closing........................................................................................................... 62

Seats, mirrors and steering wheel..................................................................................82

Transporting children safely............................................................................................ 92

Driving.................................................................................................................................... 98

Displays................................................................................................................................ 123

Lights.................................................................................................................................... 145

Safety.....................................................................................................................................151

Driving stability control systems.................................................................................175

Driving comfort................................................................................................................. 179

Climate control...................................................................................................................200

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Interior equipment............................................................................................................209

Storage compartments.....................................................................................................220

Cargo area............................................................................................................................224

DRIVING TIPS

Things to remember when driving.............................................................................. 230

Reducing fuel consumption...........................................................................................235

MOBILITY

Refueling..............................................................................................................................242

Fuel........................................................................................................................................244

Wheels and tires................................................................................................................246

Engine compartment........................................................................................................268

Engine oil.............................................................................................................................271

Coolant..................................................................................................................................275

Maintenance....................................................................................................................... 277

Replacing components.................................................................................................... 279

Breakdown assistance..................................................................................................... 285

Care........................................................................................................................................293

REFERENCE

Technical data.................................................................................................................... 298

Appendix..............................................................................................................................302

Everything from A to Z....................................................................................................304

Aktiengesellschaft

Munich, Germany

Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written consent of BMW AG, Munich.

US English ID5 II/21, 03 21 490

Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Information

Using this Owner's Manual

Orientation

The fastest way to find information on a

particular topic is by using the index.

An initial overview of the vehicle is pro-

vided in the first chapter.

Updates made after the editorial

deadline

Due to updates after the editorial deadline,

differences may exist between the printed

Owner's Manual and the Integrated Owner's

Manual in the vehicle.

Notes on updates can be found in the ap-

pendix of the printed Owner's Manual for

the vehicle.

Owner's Manual for Navigation,

Entertainment, Communication

The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Enter-

tainment, and Communication can be ob-

tained as a printed book from the service

center.

The topics are also discussed in the

Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.

Additional sources of informa-

tion

Service center

A service center will be glad to answer

questions at any time.

Internet

Vehicle information and general informa-

tion on MINI, e.g., on technology, are availa-

ble on the Internet: www.miniusa.com.

Integrated Owner's Manual in the

vehicle

The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically

describes features and functions found in

the vehicle. The Integrated Owner's Manual

can be displayed on the Control Display. Ad-

ditional information, refer to page 60.

MINI Motorer’s Guide app

The app specifically describes features and

functions found in the vehicle. The app can

be displayed on smartphones and tablets.

MINI Motorer’s Guide Web

Driver’s Guide Web shows the most suita-

ble information for the selected vehicle. If

possible, only equipment and functions that

are actually installed in the vehicle will be

explained. Driver’s Guide Web can be dis-

played in any current browser.

Symbols and displays

Symbols in the Owner's Manual

Icon Meaning

Precautions that must be followed

in order to avoid the possibility of

injury to yourself and to others as

well as serious damage to the

vehicle.

Measures that can be taken to help

protect the environment.

Seite 6

NOTES Information

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Icon Meaning

"..." Control Display texts used to select

individual functions.

›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the

voice activation system.

››...‹‹ Responses generated by the voice

activation system.

Action steps

Action steps to be carried out are presented

as a numbered list. The steps must be car-

ried out in the defined order.

1. First action step.

2. Second action step.

Enumerations

Enumerations without mandatory order or

alternative possibilities are presented as a

list with bullet points.

– First possibility.

– Second possibility.

Icons on vehicle components

This symbol on a vehicle component

indicates that further information on the

component is available in the Owner's

Manual.

Vehicle features and options

This Owner's Manual describes all models

and all standard, country-specific and op-

tional equipment that is offered in the

model series. Therefore, this Owner's

Manual also describes and illustrates fea-

tures and functions that are not available in

a vehicle, for example because of the se-

lected optional features or the country-spe-

cific version.

This also applies to safety-related functions

and systems.

When using these functions and systems,

the applicable laws and regulations must be

observed.

For any options and equipment not descri-

bed in this Owner's Manual, refer to the

Supplementary Owner's Manuals.

Your dealer’s service center is happy to an-

swer any questions that you may have

about the features and options applicable to

your vehicle.

Status of the Owner's Manual

Basic information

The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a

policy of constant development that is con-

ceived to ensure that our vehicles continue

to embody the highest quality and safety

standards. In rare cases, therefore, the fea-

tures described in this Owner's Manual may

differ from those in your vehicle.

Updates made after the editorial

deadline

Due to updates after the editorial deadline,

differences may exist between the printed

Owner's Manual and the Integrated Owner's

Manual in the vehicle.

Notes on updates can be found in the ap-

pendix of the printed Owner's Manual for

the vehicle.

For Your Own Safety

Manufacturer

The manufacturer of this MINI is Bayeri-

sche Motoren Werke Aktiengesellschaft,

BMW AG.

Seite 7

Information NOTES

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Intended use

Heed the following when using the vehicle:

– Owner's Manual.

– Information on the vehicle. Do not re-

move stickers.

– Technical vehicle data.

– The traffic, speed, and safety laws where

the vehicle is driven.

– Vehicle documents and statutory docu-

ments.

Warranty

Your vehicle is technically configured for

the operating conditions and registration

requirements applying in the country of

first delivery, also known as homologation.

If your vehicle is to be operated in a differ-

ent country it might be necessary to adapt

your vehicle to potentially differing operat-

ing conditions and registration require-

ments. If your vehicle does not comply with

the homologation requirements in a certain

country you may not be able to lodge war-

ranty claims for your vehicle there. Further

information on warranty is available from a

service center.

Maintenance and repairs

Advanced technology, for instance the use

of modern materials and high-performance

electronics, requires suitable maintenance

and repair work.

The manufacturer of your vehicle recom-

mends that you entrust corresponding pro-

cedures to a MINI dealer’s service center. If

you choose to use another service facility,

the manufacturer of your vehicle recom-

mends use of a facility that performs work,

e.g., maintenance and repair, according to

MINI specifications with properly trained

personnel, referred to in the Owner's

Manual as "another qualified service center

or repair shop".

If work is performed improperly, for in-

stance maintenance and repair, there is a

risk of subsequent damage and related

safety risks.

Improperly performed work on the vehicle

paint can lead to a failure or malfunction of

components, e.g., the radar sensors, and

thereby result in a safety risk.

Parts and accessories

The manufacturer of your vehicle recom-

mends the use of parts and accessory prod-

ucts approved by the manufacturer of the

MINI.

Approved parts and accessories, and advice

on their use and installation are available

from a MINI dealer's service center.

MINI parts and accessories were tested by

the manufacturer of the MINI for their

safety and suitability in MINI vehicles.

The manufacturer of your vehicle warrants

genuine MINI parts and accessories.

The manufacturer of your vehicle does not

evaluate whether each individual product

from another manufacturer can be used

with MINI vehicles without presenting a

safety hazard, even if a country-specific of-

ficial approval was issued. The manufac-

turer of your vehicle does not evaluate

whether these products are suitable for

MINI vehicles under all usage conditions.

California Proposition 65 Warning

For vehicles sold in California, the law re-

quires vehicle manufacturers to provide the

following warning:

Warning

Engine exhaust and a wide variety of Au-

tomobile components and parts, including

components found in the interior furnish-

ings in a vehicle, contain or emit chemi-

cals known to the State of California to

Seite 8

NOTES Information

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

cause cancer and birth defects and repro-

ductive harm. In addition, certain fluids

contained in vehicles and certain products

of component wear contain or emit chemi-

cals known to the State of California to

cause cancer and birth defects or other re-

productive harm. Battery posts, terminals

and related accessories contain lead and

lead compounds. Batteries also contain

other chemicals known to the State of Cali-

fornia to cause cancer. Wash your hands

after handling. Used engine oil contains

chemicals that have caused cancer in labo-

ratory animals. Always protect your skin

by washing thoroughly with soap and wa-

ter. For more information go to

www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-ve-

hicle.

Warning

Operating, servicing and maintaining a

passenger vehicle or off-highway motor

vehicle can expose you to chemicals in-

cluding engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,

phthalates, and lead, which are known to

the State of California to cause cancer and

birth defects or other reproductive harm.

To minimize exposure, avoid breathing ex-

haust, do not idle the engine except as

necessary, service your vehicle in a well-

ventilated area and wear gloves or wash

your hands frequently when servicing

your vehicle. For more information go to

www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-ve-

hicle.

Service and warranty

We recommend that you read this publica-

tion thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by

the following warranties:

– New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

– Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.

– Federal Emissions System Defect War-

ranty.

– Federal Emissions Performance War-

ranty.

– California Emission Control System Lim-

ited Warranty.

Detailed information about these warranties

is listed in the Service and Warranty Infor-

mation Booklet for US models or in the War-

ranty and Service Guide Booklet for Cana-

dian models.

Your vehicle has been specifically adapted

and designed to meet the particular operat-

ing conditions and homologation require-

ments in your country and continental re-

gion in order to deliver the full driving

pleasure while the vehicle is operated under

those conditions. If you wish to operate

your vehicle in another country or region,

you may be required to adapt your vehicle

to meet different prevailing operating con-

ditions and homologation requirements.

You should also be aware of any applicable

warranty limitations or exclusions for such

country or region. In such case, please con-

tact Customer Relations for further informa-

tion.

Maintenance

Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain

the road safety, operational reliability and

the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Specifications for maintenance measures:

– MINI Maintenance system.

– Service and Warranty Information Book-

let for US models.

– Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for

Canadian models.

If the vehicle is not maintained or is im-

properly maintained, this could result in se-

rious damage to the vehicle. Such damage is

not covered by the MINI New Vehicle Lim-

ited Warranty.

Seite 9

Information NOTES

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Refer to section on engine oil change re-

garding recommended service intervals for

oil changes.

Data memory

General information

Electronic control devices are installed in

the vehicle. Electronic control units process

data they receive from vehicle sensors, self-

generate or exchange with each other. Some

control units are necessary for the vehicle

to function safely or provide assistance dur-

ing driving, for instance driver assistance

systems. Furthermore, control units facili-

tate comfort or infotainment functions.

Information about stored or exchanged data

can be requested from the manufacturer of

the vehicle, in a separate booklet, for exam-

ple.

Personal reference

Each vehicle is marked with a unique vehi-

cle identification number. Depending on the

country, the vehicle owner can be identified

with the vehicle identification number, li-

cense plate and corresponding authorities.

In addition, there are other options to track

data collected in the vehicle to the driver or

vehicle owner, for instance via utilized

services.

Operating data in the vehicle

Control units process data to operate the ve-

hicle.

For example, this includes:

– Status messages for the vehicle and its

individual components, e.g., wheel rota-

tional speed, wheel speed, deceleration,

lateral acceleration, engaged safety belt

indicator.

– Ambient conditions, e.g., temperature,

rain sensor signals.

The processed data is only processed in the

vehicle itself and generally volatile. The

data is not stored beyond the operating pe-

riod.

Electronic components, e.g. control units

and ignition keys, contain components for

storing technical information. Information

about the vehicle condition, component us-

age, maintenance recommendations, events

or faults can be stored temporarily or per-

manently.

This information generally records the state

of a component, a module, a system, or the

environment, for instance:

– Operating states of system components,

for instance, fill levels, tire inflation

pressure, battery status.

– Malfunctions and faults in important

system components, for instance lights

and brakes.

– Responses by the vehicle to special sit-

uations such as airbag deployment or

engagement of the driving stability con-

trol systems.

– Information on vehicle-damaging

events.

The data is required to perform the control

unit functions. Furthermore, it also serves

to recognize and correct malfunctions, and

helps the vehicle manufacturer to optimize

vehicle functions.

The majority of this data is stored tempora-

rily and is only processed within the vehicle

itself. In some circumstances the vehicle

may store some data for an additional but

limited period of time.

When servicing, for instance during repairs,

service processes, warranty cases, and qual-

ity assurance measures, this technical infor-

mation can be read out from the vehicle to-

Seite 10

NOTES Information

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

gether with the vehicle identification

number.

A dealer’s service center or another quali-

fied service center or repair shop can read

out the information. The socket for OBD On-

board Diagnosis required by law in the ve-

hicle is used to read out the data.

The data is collected, processed, and used

by the relevant organizations in the service

network. The data documents technical con-

ditions of the vehicle, which can be used to

determine vehicle maintenance status, and

facilitate quality improvement.

Fault and event memories in the vehicle can

be reset when a dealer’s service center or

another qualified service center or repair

shop performs repair or servicing work.

Data entry and data transfer into

the vehicle

General information

Depending on the vehicle equipment, com-

fort and individual settings can be stored in

the vehicle and modified or reset at any

time.

For example, this includes:

– Settings for the seat and steering wheel

positions.

– Chassis and climate control settings.

If necessary, data can be transferred to the

entertainment and communication system

of the vehicle, for instance via smartphone.

This includes the following depending on

the respective equipment:

– Multimedia data such as music, films or

photos for playback in an integrated

multimedia system.

– Address book data for use in conjunc-

tion with an integrated hands-free sys-

tem or an integrated navigation system.

– Entered navigation destinations.

– Data on the use of Internet services.

This data can be stored locally in the vehicle

or is found on a device that has been con-

nected to the vehicle, e.g., a smartphone,

USB stick or MP3 player. If this data is

stored in the vehicle, it can be deleted at

any time.

This data is only transmitted to third parties

upon personal request as part of the use of

online services. The transmission depends

on the selected settings for the use of the

services.

Incorporation of mobile devices

Depending on the vehicle equipment, mo-

bile devices connected to the vehicle, for in-

stance smartphones, can be controlled via

the vehicle control elements.

The sound and picture from the mobile de-

vice can be played back and displayed

through the multimedia system. Certain in-

formation is transferred to the mobile de-

vice at the same time. Depending on the

type of incorporation, this includes, for in-

stance position data and other general vehi-

cle information. This optimizes the way in

which selected apps, for instance navigation

or music playback, work.

There is no further interaction between the

mobile device and the vehicle, such as ac-

tive access to vehicle data.

How the data will be processed further is

determined by the provider of the particular

app being used. The extent of the possible

settings depends on the respective app and

the operating system of the mobile device.

Services

General information

If the vehicle has a wireless network con-

nection, this enables data to be exchanged

between the vehicle and other systems. The

wireless network connection is realized via

Seite 11

Information NOTES

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

an in-vehicle transmitter and receiver unit

or via personal mobile devices brought into

the vehicle, for instance smartphones. This

wireless network connection enables 'online

functions' to be used. These include online

services and apps supplied by the vehicle

manufacturer or by other providers.

Services from the vehicle

manufacturer

Where online services from the vehicle

manufacturer are concerned, the corre-

sponding functions are described in the ap-

propriate place, for instance the Owner's

Manual or manufacturer's website. The rele-

vant legal information pertaining to data

protection may also be found on the manu-

facturer’s website. Personal data may be

used to perform online services. Data is ex-

changed over a secure connection, for in-

stance with the IT systems of the vehicle

manufacturer intended for this purpose.

Any collection, processing, and use of per-

sonal data above and beyond that needed to

provide the services must always be based

on a legal permission, contractual arrange-

ment or consent. It is also possible to acti-

vate or deactivate the data connection as a

whole. That is, with the exception of func-

tions and services required by law such as

Assist systems.

Services from other providers

When using online services from other pro-

viders, these services are the responsibility

of the relevant provider and subject to their

data privacy conditions and terms of use.

The vehicle manufacturer has no influence

on the content exchanged during this proc-

ess. Information on the way in which per-

sonal data is collected and used in relation

to services from third parties, the scope of

such data, and its purpose, can be obtained

from the relevant service provider.

Event Data Recorder EDR

This vehicle is equipped with an event data

recorder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR

is to record, in certain crash or near crash-

like situations, such as an air bag deploy-

ment or hitting a road obstacle, data that

will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s

systems performed. The EDR is designed to

record data related to vehicle dynamics and

safety systems for a short period of time,

typically 30 seconds or less.

The EDR in this vehicle is designed to re-

cord such data as:

– How various systems in your vehicle

were operating.

– Whether or not the driver and passen-

ger safety belts were fastened.

– How far, if at all, the driver was depress-

ing the accelerator and/or brake pedal.

– How fast the vehicle was traveling.

This data can help provide a better under-

standing of the circumstances in which

crashes and injuries occur.

EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if

a nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data

is recorded by the EDR under normal driv-

ing conditions and no personal data, for in-

stance name, gender, age, and crash loca-

tion, are recorded.

However, other parties, such as law enforce-

ment, could combine the EDR data with the

type of personally identifying data routinely

acquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special

equipment is required, and access to the ve-

hicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to

the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,

such as law enforcement, that have the spe-

cial equipment, can read the information if

they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

Seite 12

NOTES Information

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Vehicle identification number

General information

Depending on the national-market version,

the vehicle identification number is located

in different positions in the vehicle. This

chapter describes all possible positions for

the series.

Engine compartment

The engraved vehicle identification number

can be found in the engine compartment, on

the right-hand side of the vehicle.

Right nameplate

For 3-door models:

The vehicle identification number can be

found on the nameplate, on the right-hand

side of the vehicle.

For 5-door models:

The vehicle identification number can be

found on the nameplate, on the right-hand

side of the vehicle.

Left nameplate

For 3-door models:

The vehicle identification number can be

found on the nameplate, on the left-hand

side of the vehicle.

For 5-door models:

The vehicle identification number can be

found on the nameplate, on the left-hand

side of the vehicle.

Seite 13

Information NOTES

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Windshield

The vehicle identification number can also

be found behind the windshield.

Reporting safety defects

For US customers

The following only applies to vehicles

owned and operated in the US.

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect

which could cause a crash or could cause in-

jury or death, you should immediately in-

form the National Highway Traffic Safety

Administration NHTSA, in addition to noti-

fying MINI of North America, LLC, P.O. Box

1227, Westwood, New Jersey 07675-1227,

Telephone 1-800-831-1117.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it

may open an investigation, and if it finds

that a safety defect exists in a group of ve-

hicles, it may order a recall and remedy

campaign.

However, NHTSA cannot become involved

in individual problems between you, your

dealer, or MINI of North America, LLC.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle

Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236

(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://

www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administra-

tor, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,

Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain

other information about motor vehicle

safety from http://www.safercar.gov

For Canadian customers

Canadian customers who wish to report a

safety-related defect to Transport Canada,

Defect Investigations and Recalls, may call

the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You

can also obtain other information about mo-

tor vehicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/

roadsafety.

Seite 14

NOTES Information

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Seite 15

Information NOTES

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Entering

Opening and closing

Buttons on the vehicle key

1 Unlocking

2 Locking

3 Unlocking the tailgate

4 Panic mode

Unlocking the vehicle

Press the button on the vehicle key.

Depending on the settings, either only the

driver's door or all vehicle access points are

unlocked.

If only the driver's door is unlocked, press

the button on the vehicle key again to un-

lock the other vehicle access points.

Press and hold the button on the ve-

hicle key after unlocking.

The windows and the glass sunroof are

opened, as long as the button on the vehicle

key is pressed.

Locking the vehicle

Press the button on the vehicle key.

All vehicle access points are locked.

Buttons for the central locking

system

Overview

Buttons for the central locking system.

Locking

Pressing the button locks the vehi-

cle if the front doors are closed.

Unlocking

Pressing the button unlocks the ve-

hicle.

Panic mode

You can trigger the alarm system if you find

yourself in a dangerous situation.

Press the button on the vehicle key

and hold for at least 3 seconds.

To switch off the alarm: press any button.

Comfort Access

Concept

The vehicle can be accessed without operat-

ing the vehicle key.

Carrying the vehicle key with you, e.g., in

your pants pocket, is sufficient.

Seite 16

QUICK REFERENCE Entering

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

The vehicle automatically detects the vehi-

cle key when it is in close proximity or in

the car's interior.

Unlocking the vehicle

On the driver's or front passenger's door

handle, press the button.

Locking the vehicle

On the driver's or front passenger's door

handle, press the button.

Tailgate

Unlocking

– Unlock the vehicle and then press the

button on the outside of the tailgate.

– Press and hold the button on the

vehicle key for approx. 1 second.

Depending on the setting, the doors may

also be unlocked.

Closing

Closing the tailgate manually.

Displays and control elements

In the vicinity of the steering

wheel

1 Low beams, fog lights

2 High beams, headlight flasher, turn sig-

nal

3 Instrument cluster

4 Wiper system

Indicator/warning lights

The indicator/warning lights can light up in

a variety of combinations and colors.

Several of the lights are checked for proper

functioning and light up temporarily when

the engine is started or the ignition is

switched on.

Driver's door

For 3-door models:

Seite 17

Entering QUICK REFERENCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

1 Power windows

2 Exterior mirrors

For 5-door models:

1 Safety switch

2 Power windows

3 Exterior mirrors

All around the selector lever

1 Selector lever

2 Controller with buttons

3 Parking brake, manual or electric

Central Information Display (CID)

Concept

The Central Information Display (CID) com-

bines the functions of a multitude of

switches. These functions can be operated

via the Controller.

Buttons on the Controller

Button Function

Press once: calls up the main

menu.

Press twice: displays all menu

items of the main menu.

Goes to the Communication

menu.

Goes to the Media/Radio menu.

Goes to destination input menu

for navigation.

Goes to navigation map.

Press once: opens the previous

display.

Press and hold: open the menus

used last.

Goes to the Options menu.

Voice control

Activating the voice control system

Press the button on the steering

wheel.

Wait for the signal.

Say the command.

This icon indicates that the voice con-

trol system is active.

Seite 18

QUICK REFERENCE Entering

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

If no other commands are available, operate

the function via the Central Information

Display (CID).

Terminating the voice control system

Press the button on the steering

wheel or ›Cancel‹.

Seite 19

Entering QUICK REFERENCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Set-up and use

Seats, mirrors and steering

wheel

Manually adjustable seats

1 Forward/backward

2 Thigh support

3 Height

4 Backrest tilt

Adjusting the head restraint

Height

– To raise: push the head restraint up.

– To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and

push the head restraint down.

Adjusting the exterior mirrors

1 Adjusting

2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Mon-

itor

3 Folding in and out

Adjusting the steering wheel

In four directions

1. Fold the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel to the prefer-

red height and angle to suit your seat

position.

3. Fold the lever back up.

Seite 20

QUICK REFERENCE Set-up and use

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Entering the rear

1. Pull lever up to the stop.

2. Fold backrest forward.

3. Push the seat forward.

Original position

1. Push the seat back into the original po-

sition.

2. Fold back the backrest to lock the seat.

Infotainment

Radio

Buttons and functions

Depending on the country and equipment

version, the radio has the following buttons.

Button Function

Press: switches sound output on/

off.

Turn: adjusts the volume.

Change the entertainment

source.

Press once: changes the station/

track.

Press and hold: fast forward/

rewind the track.

Button Function

Programmable memory buttons.

Changing the waveband/satellite

radio.

Navigation destination input

Entering a destination via address

State/province

1. "Navigation"

2. "Enter address"

3. "State/Province?"

4. Select the country from the list.

Entering the address

The address can be entered in any order.

Example: entering the address via the town/

city

1. "City/Postal code?"

2. Enter the town/city.

The list is narrowed down further with

each entry.

3. Select the icon.

4. Select a town/city from the list.

5. If necessary, enter the street.

6. Select the street as you would the town/

city.

7. If necessary, enter a house number.

8. Select the icon.

9. Select a house number or range of house

numbers from the list.

Starting destination guidance

"Start guidance"

Destination guidance is started to the town/

city center if no street is entered.

Seite 21

Set-up and use QUICK REFERENCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Pairing the mobile phone

After the mobile phone is paired once with

the vehicle, the mobile phone can be oper-

ated using the Central Information Display

(CID), the steering wheel buttons and spo-

ken instructions.

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Mobile devices"

4. "Connect new device"

The vehicle's Bluetooth name is dis-

played on the Control Display.

5. Select the functions for which the mo-

bile phone is to be used.

6. To perform additional steps on the mo-

bile phone, refer to the operating in-

structions for the mobile phone: for in-

stance search for or connect the

Bluetooth device or a new device.

The Bluetooth name of the vehicle ap-

pears on the mobile phone display. Se-

lect the Bluetooth name of the vehicle.

7. Depending on the mobile device, a con-

trol number is displayed or the control

number must be entered.

– Compare the control number dis-

played on the Control Display with

the control number on the display of

the device. Confirm the control num-

ber on the device and on the Control

Display.

– Enter and confirm the same control

number on the device and via the

Central Information Display (CID).

The device is connected and displayed

in the device list.

The mobile phone is connected and will ap-

pear at the top of the list of mobile phones.

Using the telephone

Accepting a call

Incoming call can be accepted via the Cen-

tral Information Display (CID) or the button

on the steering wheel.

Via the Central Information Display (CID)

"Accept"

Via the button on the steering wheel

Press the button.

Via the instrument cluster

Use the OK button on the steering wheel to

select: "Accept"

Dialing a number

1. "Communication"

2. "Dial number"

3. Select the numbers individually.

4. Select the icon.

Establish the connection via the additional

telephone:

1. Press the button.

2. "Call via"

Apple CarPlay preparation

Concept

CarPlay allows certain functions of a com-

patible Apple iPhone to be used via Siri

voice operation and the Central Information

Display (CID).

Functional requirements

– Compatible iPhone: iPhone 5 or later

with iOS 7.1 or later.

– Corresponding mobile contract.

Seite 22

QUICK REFERENCE Set-up and use

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

– Bluetooth, WLAN, and Siri voice opera-

tion are activated on the iPhone.

– If necessary, the setting for mobile data

must be activated on the iPhone.

– WLAN and Bluetooth are enabled in the

vehicle.

Switching on Bluetooth and CarPlay

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Mobile devices"

4. "Settings"

5. Select the following settings:

– "Bluetooth®"

– "Apple CarPlay"

Pairing the iPhone with CarPlay

Pair iPhone via Bluetooth with the vehicle.

Select CarPlay as the function:

"Apple CarPlay"

The iPhone is connected to the vehicle and

displayed in the device list.

Seite 23

Set-up and use QUICK REFERENCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

On the road

Driving

Starting and stopping the engine

Ignition on/off

– On: press the Start/Stop

button.

Most of the indicator/

warning lights light up for

a varied length of time.

– Off: press the Start/Stop button again.

All indicator lights go out.

– Radio-ready state: when the ignition is

switched off, press the ON/OFF button

on the radio or when the engine is run-

ning, press the Start/Stop button.

Some electrical consumers remain ready

for operation.

Start/stop engine

Steptronic transmission: starting

1. Depress the brake pedal.

2. Engage selector lever position P or N.

3. Press the Start/Stop button.

Manual transmission: starting

1. Depress the brake pedal.

2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift to

neutral.

3. Press the Start/Stop button.

Steptronic transmission: switching off

1. When the vehicle is stationary, apply

the parking brake.

2. Engage selector lever position P.

3. Press the Start/Stop button.

Manual transmission: switching off

1. With the vehicle at a standstill, press

the Start/Stop button.

2. Shift into first gear or reverse.

3. Set the parking brake.

Auto Start/Stop function

Steptronic transmission: switches the en-

gine off automatically while stationary to

save fuel. The engine starts automatically

when the brake pedal is released.

Manual transmission: switches the engine

off automatically while stationary to save

fuel. As soon as the clutch pedal is de-

pressed, the engine starts automatically.

Parking brake

Engage manual parking brake

The lever automatically engages after being

pulled up.

Releasing

Raise lever slightly, press the button and

guide the lever down.

Seite 24

QUICK REFERENCE On the road

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Set the electrical parking brake

Pull the switch when the vehicle is

stationary.

The LED and indicator light light up.

Releasing

Manual transmission: press the switch

while the brake pedal is pressed.

Steptronic transmission: press the switch

while the brake is pressed or selector lever

position P is set.

The LED and indicator light go out.

The parking brake is released.

Manual transmission

Shifting

When shifting into 5th or 6th gear, push

the gearshift lever to the right in order to

prevent inadvertent shifting into the 3rd or

4th gear.

Reverse gear

Select only when the vehicle is stationary.

To overcome the resistance push the gear-

shift lever dynamically to the left and en-

gage reverse gear with a forward shifting

movement.

Steptronic transmission

Selector lever positions

Parking position P.

R is reverse.

Neutral N.

Gear position D.

Engage selector lever position P or R only

when the vehicle is stationary.

To prevent the vehicle from creeping after

you select a gear position or reverse, main-

tain pressure on the brake pedal until you

are ready to start.

Selector lever lock

A lock prevents an inadvertent change from

selector lever position P to another selector

lever position and, depending on the trans-

mission version, inadvertent switching to

selector lever position P or R.

To release the lock: with the brake pedal de-

pressed, press the button on the side of the

selector lever.

Steptronic transmission, Sport and

manual mode

Sport program:

Press the selector lever to the left from se-

lector lever position D.

Manual mode:

– To shift down: press the selector lever

forward.

– To shift up: pull the selector lever rear-

wards.

Seite 25

On the road QUICK REFERENCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Turn signal, high beams, headlight

flasher, roadside parking lights

Turn signal

– On: press the lever past the resistance

point.

– Off: lightly tap the lever to the resist-

ance point.

– Off: press the lever past the resistance

point in the opposite direction.

– Triple turn signal activation: lightly tap

the lever up or down.

– Brief signaling: press the lever to the re-

sistance point and hold it there for as

long as you want the turn signal to flash.

High beams, headlight flasher

Press the lever forward or pull it backward.

– High beams on, arrow 1.

The high beams light up when the low

beams are switched on.

– High beams off/headlight flasher, ar-

row 2.

Canada: roadside parking light

To illuminate the vehicle on one side.

– On: with the radio-ready state switched

off, press the lever either up or down

past the resistance point for approx.

2 seconds.

– Off: briefly press the lever to the resist-

ance point in the opposite direction.

Lights and lighting

Light functions

Icon Function

Bad weather light.

Automatic headlight control.

Cornering light.

Lights off.

Daytime running lights.

Parking lights.

Low beams.

Instrument lighting.

Seite 26

QUICK REFERENCE On the road

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Wiper system

Switching the wipers on/off and brief

wipe

Switching on

Press the lever up until the desired position

is reached.

– Resting position of the wipers: posi-

tion 0.

– Rain sensor: position 1.

– Normal wiper speed: position 2.

– Fast wiper speed: position 3.

Switching off and brief wipe

Press the lever down.

– Switching off: press the lever down until

it reaches its standard position.

– Brief wipe: press the lever down from

the standard position.

Rain sensor

Activating/deactivating

To activate: press the lever up once from its

standard position, arrow 1.

To deactivate: press the lever back into the

standard position.

Set interval or sensitivity of the rain

sensor

Turn the thumbwheel on the wiper lever.

Cleaning the windshield

Pull the lever.

Seite 27

On the road QUICK REFERENCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Canada: wiper system

Switching the wipers on/off and brief

wipe

Switching on

Tap up the lever or press it past the resist-

ance point.

– Normal wiper speed: tap up once.

– Fast wiper speed: tap up twice or tap

once beyond the resistance point.

Switching off and brief wipe

Press the lever down.

– To switch off fast wipe: press down

twice.

– To switch off normal wipe: press down

once.

– Brief wipe: press down once.

Rain sensor

Activating/deactivating

Press the button on the wiper lever.

Set interval or sensitivity of the rain

sensor

Turn the thumbwheel on the wiper lever.

Cleaning the windshield

Pull the lever.

Seite 28

QUICK REFERENCE On the road

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Climate control

Air conditioner

Button Function

Temperature.

Air conditioning.

Air recirculation mode.

Controls the air flow,

manual.

Controls the air distribution

manually.

Windshield defroster.

Automatic climate control

Button Function

Temperature.

Air conditioning.

Maximum cooling.

AUTO program.

Button Function

Air recirculation mode.

Controls the air flow,

manual.

Air distribution, manual.

Defrosts and defogs the

windows.

Windshield defroster.

Rear window defroster.

Refueling stop

Refueling

Fuel cap

1. Grasp the fuel filler flap at the rear edge

and open it.

2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.

3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket at-

tached to the fuel filler flap.

Seite 29

On the road QUICK REFERENCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Gasoline

For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline

should be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur

content.

Refuel only with unleaded gasoline without

metallic additives.

Information on the recommended fuel grade

can be found in the Owner's Manual.

Wheels and tires

Tire inflation pressure specifications

For 5-door models:

The tire inflation pressure values can be

found on the sign on the door pillar.

For 3-door models:

The tire inflation pressure values can be

found on the sign on the door pillar.

Checking the tire inflation pressure

Regularly check the tire inflation pressure

and correct it as needed:

– At least twice a month.

– Before embarking on an extended trip.

After correcting the tire inflation

pressure

Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.

Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor.

Electronic oil measurement

Requirements

A current measured value is available after

approx. 30 minutes of driving. During a

shorter trip, the status of the last, suffi-

ciently long trip is displayed.

Displaying the engine oil level

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Engine oil level"

The engine oil level is displayed.

Adding engine oil

General information

Switch off the ignition and safely park the

vehicle before engine oil is added.

Adding engine oil

Only add engine oil when the message is

displayed in the instrument cluster.

Seite 30

QUICK REFERENCE On the road

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Observe the quantity to be added in the

message.

Take care not to add too much engine oil.

Observe recommended engine oil types.

Providing assistance

Hazard warning flashers

The button is located above the Control Dis-

play.

Breakdown assistance

MINI Roadside Assistance

This service can be reached around the

clock in many countries.

1. "MINI Connected"

2. "MINI Assist"

3. "MINI Roadside Assistance"

The contact to the MINI Roadside Assis-

tance is established.

A telephone number is displayed, if

needed. Select to dial the telephone

number on a connected mobile phone.

Seite 31

On the road QUICK REFERENCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Cockpit

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with

the series. It also describes features and

functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-

tions or country versions. This also applies

to safety-related functions and systems.

When using these functions and systems,

the applicable laws and regulations must be

observed.

In the vicinity of the steering wheel

1 Power windows 77

2 Exterior mirror operation 89

3 Buttons of the central locking sys-

tem 68

4 Lights

Bad weather light 148

Light switch 145

Lights off

Daytime running lights 147

Parking lights 145

Low beams 145

Seite 32

AT A GLANCE Cockpit

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Automatic headlight con-

trol 146

Cornering light 147

High-beam Assistant 147

Instrument lighting 149

5 Steering wheel buttons, left

Camera-based cruise control

on/off 179

Cruise control on/off 186

Speed Limiter 171

Pausing, continuing cruise

control

Cruise control: increase speed

Cruise control: reduce speed

Camera-based cruise control:

reduce distance

Camera-based cruise control:

increase distance

6 Steering column stalk, left

Turn signal 106

High beams, head-

light flasher 106

High-beam Assistant 147

Roadside parking lights 146

Trip computer 136

7 Instrument cluster 123

8 Steering column stalk, right

Wipers 107

Wiper on Canadian mod-

els 111

Rain sensor 108

Rain sensor on Canadian mod-

els 111

Cleaning windows 109

Rear window wiper in Cana-

dian models 109

Rear window wiper 109

Clean the rear window 109

9 Steering wheel buttons, right

Voice control 44

Telephone

Confirm the selection 136

Move selection up 136

Move selection down 136

Seite 33

Cockpit AT A GLANCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Increase volume

Reduce volume

10 Horn, entire surface

11 Heated steering wheel 91

12 Adjusting the steering wheel 91

13 Unlocking the hood 269

14 Depending on the equipment: using tail-

gate 70

In the vicinity of the center console

1 Hazard warning system 285

Intelligent Safety 162

2 Control Display 36

3 Radio/Multimedia

4 Glove compartment 220

5 Climate control 200

6 PDC Park Distance Con-

trol 189

Rearview camera 192

Parking assistant 195

Auto Start/Stop func-

tion 101

Start/stop the engine and

switch the ignition on/

off 98

Seite 34

AT A GLANCE Cockpit

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

DSC Dynamic Stability Control

175

MINI Driving Modes

switch 177

7 Steptronic transmission selector

lever 116

Manual transmission gearshift

lever 115

8 Controller with buttons 39

9 Parking brake, manual 104

Parking brake, electric 104

In the vicinity of the roofliner

1 Emergency Call, SOS 286

2 Indicator light, front-seat pas-

senger airbag 154

3 Reading lights 149

4 Ambient light 149

5 Panoramic glass sunroof 79

6 Interior lights 149

Seite 35

Cockpit AT A GLANCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Central Information Display (CID)

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with

the series. It also describes features and

functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-

tions or country versions. This also applies

to safety-related functions and systems.

When using these functions and systems,

the applicable laws and regulations must be

observed.

Concept

The Central Information Display (CID) com-

bines the functions of a multitude of

switches. These functions can be operated

via the Controller.

Safety information

Warning

Operating the integrated information sys-

tems and communication devices while

driving can distract from traffic. It is pos-

sible to lose control of the vehicle. There is

a risk of accident. Only use the systems or

devices when the traffic situation allows.

As warranted, stop and use the systems

and devices while the vehicle is stationary.

Input and display

Main menu

General information

The main menu is divided into two areas.

The left area contains menu items that can

be used to call up all functions from the on-

board monitor. The menu items in the right

area show dynamic contents that enable

quick access to certain functions.

Media/Radio

All functions for the entertainment system,

for instance radio stations or pairing with

external devices.

Communication

Telephone and message function, e-mail and

calendar and also pairing and managing mo-

bile devices, for instance smartphones.

Navigation

Access to the navigation system, destina-

tion input and traffic bulletins. Configurable

map views and other functions, such as

Points of Interest.

Seite 36

AT A GLANCE Central Information Display (CID)

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

My MINI

Information on the vehicle status and avail-

able settings for vehicle and on-board moni-

tor. Access to the Integrated Owner's

Manual.

MINI Connected

Access to apps and vehicle functions. Addi-

tional apps and vehicle functions can be

purchased from the MINI Connected Store.

Messages

Access to all incoming messages in the ve-

hicle, for instance Check Control messages.

Letters and numbers

Depending on the menu, you can switch be-

tween entering upper and lower case let-

ters, numbers and characters:

Icon Function

Change between capital and

lower-case letters.

Insert blank space.

Use voice control.

Confirm entry.

Without navigation system

Select the icon.

Entry comparison

When entering names and addresses, the

choice is narrowed down with every letter

entered and letters may be added automati-

cally.

Entries are continuously compared with

data stored in the vehicle.

– Only those letters are offered during en-

try for which data is available.

– Destination search: place names can be

entered in all languages that are availa-

ble on the Control Display.

Activating/deactivating the

functions

Several menu items are preceded by a

checkbox. The checkbox indicates whether

the function is activated or deactivated. Se-

lecting the menu item activates or deacti-

vates the function.

Function is activated.

Function is deactivated.

Status information

General information

The status field can be found in the upper

area of the Control Display. Status informa-

tion is displayed in the form of symbols.

Radio

Icon Meaning

HD Radio station is being re-

ceived.

Satellite radio is switched on.

Telephone

Icon Meaning

Incoming or outgoing call.

Missed call.

Signal strength of cellular network.

Symbol flashes: network search.

Cellular network is not available.

Roaming is active.

SMS text message received.

Message received.

Seite 37

Central Information Display (CID) AT A GLANCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Icon Meaning

Reminder.

Sending not possible.

Entertainment

Icon Meaning

Bluetooth audio.

USB audio interface.

Mobile phone audio interface.

Apple CarPlay.

Other symbols

Icon Meaning

Check Control message.

The sound output has been

switched off.

Encrypted connection not active.

Request for the current vehicle po-

sition.

Checking the current vehicle posi-

tion.

Split screen

General information

Additional information can be displayed on

the right side of the split screen, for in-

stance information from the trip computer.

In the divided screen view, the so-called

split screen, this information remains visi-

ble even when switching to another menu.

Switching the split screen on/off

1. Press the button.

2. "Split screen"

Selecting the display

The display can be selected in menus which

support the split screen function.

1. Tilt the Controller to the right until the

split screen is selected.

2. Press the Controller.

3. Select the desired setting.

Specifying the number of displays

It is possible to specify the number of dis-

plays.

1. Tilt the Controller to the right until the

split screen is selected.

2. Press the Controller.

3. "Personalize menu"

4. Select the desired setting.

5. Tilt the Controller to the left.

Control elements

Overview

1 Control Display with touchscreen

2 Controller with buttons

Control Display

General information

To clean the Control Display, follow the care

instructions, refer to page 296.

Seite 38

AT A GLANCE Central Information Display (CID)

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

In the case of very high temperatures on

the Control Display, for instance due to in-

tense solar radiation, the brightness may be

reduced down to complete deactivation.

Once the temperature is reduced, for in-

stance through shade or air conditioning,

the normal functions are restored.

Safety information

NOTICE

Objects in the area in the front of the Con-

trol Display can shift and damage the Con-

trol Display. There is a risk of damage to

property, among other potential damage.

Do not place objects in the area in front of

the Control Display.

Switching on/off automatically

The Control Display is switched on automat-

ically when the vehicle is unlocked or as

soon as the Control Display is needed for

operation.

In certain situations, the Control Display is

switched off automatically, for instance if

no operation is performed on the vehicle for

several minutes.

Switching on/off manually

The Control Display can also be switched off

manually.

1. Press the button.

2. "Turn off control display"

Press the Controller or any button on the

Controller to switch it back on again.

Controller

General information

The buttons can be used to open the menus

directly. The Controller can be used to se-

lect menu items and enter the settings.

Operation

– Turn to switch between menu items, for

example.

– Press to select a menu item, for example.

– With navigation system: tilt in four di-

rections to switch between displays, for

example.

Seite 39

Central Information Display (CID) AT A GLANCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

– Without navigation system: tilt in two

directions to switch between displays,

for example.

Buttons on the Controller

Button Function

Press once: calls up the main

menu.

Press twice: displays all menu

items of the main menu.

With navigation system: opens

the Communication menu.

With navigation system: opens

the Media/Radio menu.

Without navigation system: open

the Audio menu.

Without navigation system:

opens the Telephone menu.

With navigation system: opens

destination input menu for navi-

gation.

With navigation system: opens

navigation map.

Press once: opens the previous

display.

Press and hold: open the menus

used last.

Goes to the Options menu.

Operating via the Controller

Opening the main menu

Press the button.

The main menu is displayed.

All Central Information Display (CID) func-

tions can be called up via the main menu.

Adjusting the main menu

1. Press the button twice.

All menu items of the main menu are

displayed.

2. Select a menu item.

3. To move the menu item to the desired

position, tilt the Controller to the right

or left.

Selecting menu items

Highlighted menu items can be selected.

1. Turn the Controller until the desired

menu item is highlighted.

2. Press the Controller.

Adjusting menu contents

The display of menus "Media/Radio",

"Communication" and "MINI Connected" can

be adjusted, for instance to remove the en-

tries of functions that are not used from the

menu.

Seite 40

AT A GLANCE Central Information Display (CID)

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. Select the menu.

2. "Personalize menu"

3. Select desired menu contents to be dis-

played.

Dynamic contents

You can display dynamic contents within

the menu items. The contents of the menu

items update automatically, e.g., the active

destination guidance in the navigation.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Contents of main menu"

Changing between displays

After a menu item is selected, for instance

"System settings", a new display appears.

– Tilt the Controller to the left.

The current display closes and the previ-

ous display is shown.

– Press the button.

The previous display re-opens.

– Tilt the Controller to the right.

The new display opens.

An arrow indicates that additional displays

can be opened.

Opening recently used menus

The recently used menus can be displayed.

Press and hold this button.

The recently used menus are dis-

played.

Going to the Options menu

Press the button.

The "Options" menu is displayed.

The menu consists of various areas, for in-

stance:

– "Split screen": screen settings.

– "Media/Radio": control options for the

selected main menu.

– "Save station": if applicable, further con-

trol options for the selected menu.

Entering letters and numbers

Input

1. Turn the Controller: select letters or

numbers.

2. : confirm entry.

Deleting

Icon Function

Press the Controller: delete

letters or number.

Hold the Controller down: de-

lete all letters or numbers.

Using alphabetical lists

For alphabetical lists with more than 30 en-

tries, the letters for which there is an entry

are displayed at the left edge.

1. Turn the Controller to the left or right

quickly.

All letters for which there are entries

are displayed on the left edge.

2. Select the first letter of the desired en-

try.

The first entry of the selected letter is

displayed.

Seite 41

Central Information Display (CID) AT A GLANCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Operation via touchscreen

General information

The Control Display is equipped with a

touchscreen.

Touch the screen with your fingers. Do not

use any objects.

Opening the main menu

Tap on the icon.

The main menu is displayed.

All Central Information Display (CID) func-

tions can be called up via the main menu.

Adjusting the main menu

1. Tap on the icon.

2. Drag the menu item to the desired posi-

tion on the right or left.

Selecting menu items

Tap the desired menu item.

Dynamic contents

You can display dynamic contents within

the menu items. The contents of the menu

items update automatically, e.g., the active

destination guidance in the navigation.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Contents of main menu"

Changing between displays

After a menu item is selected, a new display

opens.

An arrow indicates that additional displays

can be opened.

– Swipe to the left.

– Tap arrow.

The new display opens.

Entering letters and numbers

Input

1. Tap the icon on the touchscreen.

A keyboard is displayed on the Control

Display.

2. Enter desired letters and numbers.

Deleting

Icon Function

Tapping the icon: deletes the letter

or number.

Tapping and holding the icon all

letters: deletes all letters or num-

bers.

Operating navigation map

The navigation map can be moved using the

touchscreen.

Function Operation

Enlarge/shrink

map.

Drag in or out with the

fingers.

Seite 42

AT A GLANCE Central Information Display (CID)

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Programmable memory but-

tons

General information

The Central Information Display (CID) func-

tions can be stored on the programmable

memory buttons and called up directly, for

instance radio stations, navigation destina-

tions, phone numbers and menu entries.

Settings are stored for the driver profile

currently used.

Storing a function

1. Select the function via the Central Infor-

mation Display (CID).

2. Press and hold the desired but-

ton, until a signal sounds.

Executing a function

Press the button.

The function will work immediately.

This means, for instance that the number is

dialed when a phone number is selected.

Displaying the key assignment

Touch buttons with finger. Do not wear

gloves or use objects.

The assignment of the buttons is displayed

in the upper area of the Control Display.

Deleting the button assignments

1. Press buttons 1 and 6 simultaneously

for approx. 5 seconds.

2. "OK"

Seite 43

Central Information Display (CID) AT A GLANCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Voice activation system

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with

the series. It also describes features and

functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-

tions or country versions. This also applies

to safety-related functions and systems.

When using these functions and systems,

the applicable laws and regulations must be

observed.

Concept

Most functions displayed on the Control

Display can be operated by voice commands

via the voice activation system. The system

supports you with announcements during

input.

General information

– Functions that can only be used when

the vehicle is stationary can only be op-

erated via the voice activation system to

a limited extent.

– The system uses a special microphone

on the driver's side.

– ›...‹ in the Owner's Manual denotes ver-

bal instructions to use with the voice ac-

tivation system.

Functional requirements

– A language must be set via the Control

Display that is supported by the voice

activation system. To set the language,

refer to page 48.

– Always say commands in the language

of the voice activation system.

Using the voice activation sys-

tem

Activating the voice control system

Press the button on the steering

wheel.

Wait for the signal.

Say the command.

This icon indicates that the voice con-

trol system is active.

No other commands may be available. In

this case, operate the function via the Cen-

tral Information Display (CID).

Terminating the voice control

system

Press the button on the steering

wheel or ›Cancel‹.

Possible commands

General information

Most menu items on the Control Display can

be spoken as commands.

Commands from other menus can also be

spoken.

You can also select list entries such as

phone list entries via voice activation. Read

Seite 44

AT A GLANCE Voice activation system

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

these list entries out loud exactly as they

are shown in the respective list.

Displaying possible commands

The following is displayed in the top area of

the Control Display:

– Some possible commands for the current

menu.

– Some possible commands from other

menus.

– Status of the voice recognition.

– Encrypted connection is not availa-

ble.

Help on the voice activation system

– ›General information on voice control‹:

have information on the operating prin-

ciple of the voice activation system read

out loud.

– ›Help‹: have help for the current menu

read out loud.

Example: going to the sound

settings

The commands of the menu items are spo-

ken just as they are selected via the Con-

troller.

1. Switch on the Entertainment sound out-

put, if needed.

2. Press the button on the steering

wheel.

3. ›Media and radio‹

4. ›Tone‹

Settings

Setting the voice control

You can set the system to use standard dia-

log or a short version.

The short version of the voice control plays

back short messages in abbreviated form.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Language"

4. "Speech mode:"

5. Select the desired setting.

Activating voice recognition via

the server

The voice recognition feature via the server

provides a dictation function and a natural

method of destination input while improv-

ing the quality of voice recognition. To use

the functions, data is transmitted to a serv-

ice provider via an encrypted connection

and stored locally there.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Language"

4. "Server speech recognition"

Adjusting the volume

Turn the volume button during the spoken

instructions until the desired volume is set.

– The volume remains constant even if the

volume of other audio sources is

changed.

– The volume is stored for the profile cur-

rently used.

Seite 45

Voice activation system AT A GLANCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Information on Emergency

Requests

Do not use the voice activation system to

initiate an Emergency Request. In stressful

situations, the voice and vocal pitch can

change. This can unnecessarily delay the es-

tablishment of a telephone connection.

Instead, use the SOS button, refer to

page 286, close to the interior mirror.

System limits

– Certain noises can be detected and may

lead to problems. Keep the doors, win-

dows, and glass sunroof closed.

– Noises from the front passenger or the

rear seat bench can impair the system.

Avoid making other noise in the vehicle

while speaking.

– Major language dialects can cause prob-

lems with the voice recognition feature.

Speak loud and clear.

Using the voice activation sys-

tem of the smartphone

A smartphone connected to the vehicle can

be used via voice control.

Activate voice command response on the

smartphone for this purpose.

1. Press and hold the button on the

steering wheel for approx. 3 seconds.

Voice command response is activated on

the smartphone.

2. Release the button.

If activation is successful, a confirma-

tion appears on the Control Display.

If it was not possible to activate voice com-

mand response, the list of Bluetooth devices

appears on the Control Display.

Voice assistants from third-

party providers

Concept

Some third-party providers provide digital

voice assistants. Supported voice assistants

can be used in the vehicle.

General information

Some of the functions are limited in the ve-

hicle to prevent any impairment of safety

while driving.

Functional requirements

– If applicable, corresponding Connected

Service subsequently purchased via

MINI Connected Store.

– Vehicle added in the MINI app.

– Third-party provider account and MINI

account connected in the MINI app.

– Smartphone connected to the vehicle via

Bluetooth audio.

Activation in the MINI app

Third-party assistants are set up in the

MINI app.

Follow the instructions in the app.

Activation in the vehicle

1. Press the button on the steering

wheel.

2. Wait for the signal.

3. Say the specific activation word of the

third-party provider and the desired

command.

Seite 46

AT A GLANCE Voice activation system

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Information about the active function is

displayed on the Control Display.

Malfunction

In case of a malfunction, switch off the en-

gine and start the engine again.

Seite 47

Voice activation system AT A GLANCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

General settings

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with

the series. It also describes features and

functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-

tions or country versions. This also applies

to safety-related functions and systems.

When using these functions and systems,

the applicable laws and regulations must be

observed.

Language

Setting the language

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. If necessary, "Language"

4. "Language:"

5. Select the desired setting.

The setting is stored for the driver profile

currently used.

Time

Setting the time zone

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Date and time"

4. "Time zone:"

5. Select the desired setting.

The setting is stored for the driver profile

currently used.

Setting the time

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Date and time"

4. "Time:"

5. Turn the Controller until the desired

hours are displayed.

6. Press the Controller.

7. Turn the Controller until the desired mi-

nutes are displayed.

8. Press the Controller.

Setting the time format

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Date and time"

4. "Time format:"

5. Select the desired setting.

The setting is stored for the driver profile

currently used.

Date

Setting the date

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Date and time"

Seite 48

AT A GLANCE General settings

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

4. "Date:"

5. Turn the Controller until the desired day

is displayed.

6. Press the Controller.

7. Make the settings for the month and

year.

Setting the date format

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Date and time"

4. "Date format:"

5. Select the desired setting.

The setting is stored for the driver profile

currently used.

Setting the units of measure-

ment

You can set the units of measurement for

some values, for example, consumption, dis-

tances and temperature.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Units"

4. Select the desired menu item.

5. Select the desired setting.

The setting is stored for the driver profile

currently used.

Activating/deactivating the

display of the current vehicle

position

Concept

If vehicle tracking has been activated, the

current vehicle position can be displayed in

the MINI Connected app.

Activating/deactivating

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Data privacy"

4. "Vehicle tracking"

5. Select the desired setting.

Activating/deactivating pop-

ups

For some functions, pop-ups are displayed

automatically on the Control Display. Some

of these pop-ups can be activated or deacti-

vated.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Pop-ups"

4. Select the desired setting.

The setting is stored for the driver profile

currently used.

Control Display

Brightness

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

Seite 49

General settings AT A GLANCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Displays"

4. "Control display"

5. "Brightness at night"

6. Turn the Controller until the desired

brightness is set.

7. Press the Controller.

The setting is stored for the driver profile

currently used.

Depending on the light conditions, the

brightness settings may not be clearly visi-

ble.

Screensaver

If no entries are made via the Central Infor-

mation Display (CID), a screensaver can be

displayed after an adjustable time.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Displays"

4. "Control display"

5. "Screensaver"

6. Select the desired setting.

The setting is stored for the driver profile

currently used.

Instrument cluster with en-

hanced features: color world

Concept

The display of the display content can be

configured individually, for instance in a

harmonic color style.

General information

The setting of the color world effects the

following display content:

– On-board monitor.

– Instrument cluster.

– Head-up Display.

Depending on the equipment, the color

world can be applied as basic display for the

LED ring on the central instrument.

LED ring on the central instrument cluster,

refer to page 140.

Setting the color world

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Displays"

4. "Color scheme"

5. Select the desired setting.

Messages

Concept

The menu centrally displays all messages ar-

riving in the vehicle in list form.

General information

The following messages can be displayed:

– Traffic messages.

– Communication messages, for example

e-mails, SMS text messages or remind-

ers.

– Check Control messages.

– Messages on service notifications.

– Messages from the vehicle manufac-

turer.

Messages are additionally displayed in the

status field.

Seite 50

AT A GLANCE General settings

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Retrieving messages

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "Notifications"

2. Select the desired notification.

The menu in which the notification is dis-

played will open.

Deleting messages

All messages, except Check Control mes-

sages or messages from the vehicle manu-

facturer, can be deleted from the list.

Check Control messages or messages from

the vehicle manufacturer are displayed as

long as they are relevant.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "Notifications"

2. Select the desired message.

3. Press the button.

4. "Delete this notification" or "Delete all

notifications"

Settings

The following settings can be adjusted:

– Select the applications, from which mes-

sages will be permitted.

– Sort the messages according to date or

priority.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Notifications"

4. Select the desired setting.

Data protection

Data transfer

Concept

The vehicle offers various functions which

require data to be transferred to MINI or a

service provider. The data transfer can be

deactivated for some functions.

General information

With data transfer deactivated, the respec-

tive function cannot be used.

Only make these settings while stationary.

Activating/deactivating

Follow the instructions on the Control Dis-

play.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Data privacy"

4. Select the desired setting.

Deleting personal data in the

vehicle

Concept

Depending on the usage, the vehicle stores

personal data, such as stored radio stations.

This personal data can be permanently de-

leted via the Central Information Display

(CID).

General information

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the

following data is deleted:

– Driver profile settings.

– Stored radio stations.

– Stored programmable memory buttons.

Seite 51

General settings AT A GLANCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

– Travel and trip computer information.

– Music collection.

– Navigation, for instance stored destina-

tions.

– Phone book.

– Office data, for instance voice memos.

– Login accounts.

Altogether, the deletion of the data can take

up to 15 minutes.

Functional requirement

Data can only be deleted while stationary.

Deleting data

Note and follow the instructions on the Con-

trol Display.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Data privacy"

4. "Delete personal data"

5. "Delete personal data"

6. "OK"

7. Exit and lock the vehicle.

The deletion process takes 15 minutes to

complete.

If not all data was deleted, repeat the dele-

tion.

Canceling deletion

Start the engine to cancel deletion of the

data.

Connections

Concept

Various connection types are available for

using mobile devices in the vehicle. The

connection type to select depends on the

mobile device and the desired function.

General information

The following overview shows possible

functions and the suitable connection types

for them. The scope of functions depends on

the mobile device.

Function Connec-

tion type

Making calls via the hands-

free system.

Using phone functions via

the Central Information Dis-

play (CID).

Using the smartphone Of-

fice functions.

Bluetooth.

Playing music from the

smartphone or the audio

player.

Bluetooth

or USB.

Using compatible apps via

the Central Information Dis-

play (CID).

Bluetooth

or USB.

USB storage device:

Exporting and importing

driver profiles.

Update the software.

Playing music.

USB.

Playing videos from the

smartphone or the USB de-

vice.

USB.

Using Apple CarPlay apps

via the Central Information

Display (CID) and voice op-

eration.

Bluetooth

and

WLAN.

The following connection types require one-

time pairing with the vehicle:

– Bluetooth.

– Apple CarPlay.

Seite 52

AT A GLANCE General settings

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Paired devices are automatically recognized

later on and connected to the vehicle.

Safety information

Warning

Operating the integrated information sys-

tems and communication devices while

driving can distract from traffic. It is pos-

sible to lose control of the vehicle. There is

a risk of accident. Only use the systems or

devices when the traffic situation allows.

As warranted, stop and use the systems

and devices while the vehicle is stationary.

Compatible devices

General information

Malfunctions may occur with devices not

listed or deviating software versions.

Displaying the vehicle identification

number and software part number

When looking for compatible devices, you

may have to state the vehicle identification

number and the software part number.

These numbers can be displayed in the ve-

hicle.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Mobile devices"

4. "Settings"

5. "Bluetooth® info"

6. "System information"

A software update, refer to page 58, can

be performed.

Bluetooth connection

Functional requirements

– Compatible device, refer to page 53,

with Bluetooth interface.

– The vehicle key is in the vehicle.

– The device is ready for operation.

– Bluetooth is activated on the device and

in the vehicle, refer to page 53.

– Bluetooth presettings, such as visibility,

may be required on the device; refer to

the owner's manual of the device.

Switching on Bluetooth

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Mobile devices"

4. "Settings"

5. "Bluetooth®"

Activating/deactivating telephone

functions

To use all supported functions of a mobile

phone, the following functions must be acti-

vated prior to pairing.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Mobile devices"

4. "Settings"

5. Select the desired setting:

– "Office"

Activate function to transmit short

messages, e-mails, calendars, tasks,

memos, and reminders to the vehi-

cle. Costs can be incurred by trans-

mitting all data to the vehicle.

– "Contact images"

Seite 53

General settings AT A GLANCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Activate function to show the con-

tact pictures.

Pairing the mobile device with the

vehicle

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Mobile devices"

4. "Connect new device"

5. Select the functions for which the de-

vice will be used:

– "Telephone"

– "Bluetooth® audio"

– "Apps"

– "Apple CarPlay"

The vehicle's Bluetooth name is dis-

played on the Control Display.

6. On the mobile device, search for Blue-

tooth devices in the vicinity.

The Bluetooth name of the vehicle ap-

pears on the mobile device display.

Select the Bluetooth name of the vehi-

cle.

7. Depending on the mobile device, a con-

trol number is displayed or the control

number must be entered.

– Compare the control number dis-

played on the Control Display with

the control number on the display of

the device.

Confirm the control number on the

device and on the Control Display.

– Enter and confirm the same control

number on the device and via the

Central Information Display (CID).

The device is connected and displayed

in the device list.

If connection was not successful: Fre-

quently Asked Questions, refer to page 54.

Frequently Asked Questions

All requirements are met and all required

steps were completed in the specified order.

Despite that, the mobile device does not

function as expected.

In this case, the following explanations can

help:

Why could the mobile phone not be paired

or connected?

– There are too many Bluetooth devices

connected to the mobile phone or vehi-

cle.

Delete Bluetooth connections with other

devices.

Delete all known Bluetooth connections

from the device list on the mobile phone

and start a new device search.

– The mobile phone is in power-save mode

or has only a limited remaining battery

life.

Charge the mobile phone.

Why does the mobile phone no longer re-

act?

– The applications on the mobile phone do

not function anymore.

Switch the mobile phone off and on

again.

– Possibly too high or too low ambient

temperatures for mobile phone opera-

tion.

Do not subject the mobile phone to ex-

treme ambient temperatures.

Why can phone functions not be used via

the Central Information Display (CID)?

– The mobile phone may not be properly

configured, for instance as Bluetooth au-

dio device.

Connect the mobile phone with the tele-

phone or additional phone function.

Why are no or not all telephone book en-

tries displayed or why are they incomplete?

Seite 54

AT A GLANCE General settings

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

– Transmission of the telephone book en-

tries is not yet complete.

– It is possible that only the telephone

book entries of the mobile phone or the

SIM card are transmitted.

– It may not be possible to display tele-

phone book entries with special charac-

ters.

– It may not be possible to transmit con-

tacts from social networks.

– The number of phone book entries to be

stored is too high.

– Data volume of the contact too large, for

instance due to stored information such

as memos.

Reduce the data volume of the contact.

– A mobile phone is only connected as an

audio source.

Reconfigure the mobile phone and con-

nect it with the telephone or additional

phone function.

How can the telephone connection quality

be improved?

– The strength of the Bluetooth signal on

the mobile phone can be adjusted, de-

pending on the mobile phone.

– Insert the mobile phone into the wire-

less charging tray.

– Adjust the volume of the microphone

and loudspeakers separately.

If all points in this list have been checked

and the required function is still not availa-

ble, contact the hotline, a dealer’s service

center or another qualified service center or

repair shop.

USB connection

General information

The following mobile devices can be con-

nected to the USB port:

– Mobile phones.

– Audio devices with USB port, for in-

stance MP3 players.

– USB storage devices.

Common file systems are supported.

FAT32 and exFAT are the recommended

formats.

A connected USB device will be supplied

with charge current via the USB port if the

device supports this. Follow the maximum

charge current of the USB port.

The following uses are possible on USB

ports with data transfer:

– Exporting and importing driver profiles,

refer to page 71.

– Playing music files via USB audio.

– Playing videos via USB video.

– Loading of software updates, refer to

page 58.

Follow the following when connecting:

– Do not use force when plugging the con-

nector into the USB port.

– Use a flexible adapter cable.

– Protect the USB device against mechani-

cal damage.

– Due to the large number of USB devices

available on the market, it cannot be

guaranteed that every device is operable

on the vehicle.

– Do not expose USB devices to extreme

environmental conditions, such as very

high temperatures; refer to the owner's

manual of the device.

– Due to the many different compression

techniques, proper playback of the me-

dia stored on the USB device cannot be

guaranteed in all cases.

– To ensure proper transmission of the

stored data, do not charge a USB device

via the onboard socket, when it is con-

nected to the USB port.

– Depending on how the USB device is be-

ing used, settings may be required on

Seite 55

General settings AT A GLANCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

the USB storage device, refer to the

owner's manual of the device.

Not compatible USB devices:

– USB hard drives.

– USB hubs.

– USB memory card readers with multiple

slots.

– HFS-formatted USB devices.

– Devices such as fans or lamps.

Functional requirement

Compatible device, refer to page 53, with

USB port.

Connecting the device

Connect the USB device using a suitable

adapter cable to a USB port, refer to

page 216.

The USB device is connected to the vehicle

and displayed in the device list.

Apple CarPlay preparation

Concept

CarPlay allows certain functions of a com-

patible Apple iPhone to be used via Siri

voice operation and the Central Information

Display (CID).

Functional requirements

– Compatible iPhone, refer to page 53.

iPhone 5 or later with iOS 7.1 or later.

– Corresponding mobile contract.

– Bluetooth, WLAN, and Siri voice opera-

tion are activated on the iPhone.

– Booking the MINI Connected service:

Apple CarPlay preparation.

– If necessary, the setting for mobile data

must be activated on the iPhone.

Switching on Bluetooth and CarPlay

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Mobile devices"

4. "Settings"

5. Select the following settings:

– "Bluetooth®"

– "Apple CarPlay"

Pairing the iPhone with CarPlay

Pairing an iPhone with the vehicle, refer to

page 54, via Bluetooth

Select CarPlay as the function:

"Apple CarPlay"

The iPhone is connected to the vehicle and

displayed in the device list, refer to

page 57.

Operation

For more information, refer to the

Integrated Owner's Manual or the Owner's

Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Com-

munication.

Frequently Asked Questions

All requirements are met and all required

steps were completed in the specified order.

Despite that, the mobile device does not

function as expected.

In this case, the following explanations can

help:

The iPhone has already been paired with

Apple CarPlay. When a new connection is

established, CarPlay can no longer be se-

lected.

– Delete the iPhone concerned from the

device list.

Seite 56

AT A GLANCE General settings

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

– On the iPhone, delete the vehicle con-

cerned from the list of stored vehicles

under Bluetooth and under WLAN.

– Pair the iPhone as a new device.

If the steps listed have been carried out and

the required function is still not available:

contact the hotline, a dealer's service center

or another qualified service center or repair

shop.

Managing mobile devices

General information

– After one-time pairing, the devices are

automatically recognized and recon-

nected when the ignition is switched on.

– The data stored on the SIM card or in

the mobile phone is transferred to the

vehicle after recognition.

– For some devices, certain settings may

be necessary, for instance authorization,

see owner's manual of the device.

Displaying the device list

All devices paired and/or connected with

the vehicle are displayed in the device list.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Mobile devices"

A icon indicates, for which function a de-

vice is used.

Icon Function

"Telephone"

"Additional telephone"

"Bluetooth® audio"

"Apps"

"Apple CarPlay"

Configuring the device

Functions can be activated or deactivated

for paired and connected devices.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Mobile devices"

4. Select the desired device.

5. Select the desired setting.

If a function is assigned to a device, the

function will be deactivated where appro-

priate for a device that is already connected

and the device will be disconnected.

Disconnecting the device

The device's connection to the vehicle is

disconnected.

The device remains paired and can be con-

nected again, refer to page 57.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Mobile devices"

4. Select device.

5. "Disconnect device"

Connecting the device

A disconnected device can be reconnected.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Mobile devices"

4. Select device.

5. "Connect device"

The functions that were assigned to the de-

vice before disconnecting are assigned to

the device when it is reconnected. The func-

Seite 57

General settings AT A GLANCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

tions may be deactivated on a device al-

ready connected.

Deleting the device

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Mobile devices"

4. Select device.

5. "Delete device"

The device is disconnected and removed

from the device list.

Swapping the telephone and additional

telephone

If two mobile phones are connected to the

vehicle, the functions of the telephone and

additional telephone can be switched.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Mobile devices"

4. "Settings"

5. "Swap telephone/additional tel."

Software update

General information

The vehicle supports a large number of mo-

bile devices, for example mobile phones and

MP3 players. Software updates are available

for many of the supported devices. The ve-

hicle is kept up-to-date via regular vehicle

software updates.

Contact a dealer's service center or another

qualified service center or repair shop for

information on available software updates.

Displaying the version of the installed

software

The software version installed in the vehicle

is displayed.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Software update"

4. "Show current version"

If an update has been carried out before, se-

lect the desired version to display additional

information.

Updating software via USB

The software may only be updated when the

vehicle is stationary.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. Store the file for the software update in

the main folder of a USB device.

2. Connecting USB device to the USB port.

3. "My MINI"

4. "System settings"

5. "Software update"

6. "Update software"

7. "USB"

8. "Install software"

9. "OK"

10. Wait for the update to complete.

11. Confirm system restart.

Restoring the software version

You can restore the software to the version

prior to the last update or to its factory set-

tings.

The software may only be restored when

the vehicle is stationary.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

Seite 58

AT A GLANCE General settings

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Software update"

4. "Restore software"

– "Previous version"

The previous software version is re-

stored.

– "Default software settings"

The first software version is re-

stored.

6. "Remove software"

7. "OK"

8. Wait for restore.

9. Confirm system restart.

Seite 59

General settings AT A GLANCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Owner's Manual media

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with

the series. It also describes features and

functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-

tions or country versions. This also applies

to safety-related functions and systems.

When using these functions and systems,

the applicable laws and regulations must be

observed.

General information

You can use the following media formats to

call up the content in the Owner's Manual:

– Printed Owner's Manual, refer to

page 60.

– Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehi-

cle, refer to page 60.

Printed Owner's Manual

Concept

The printed Owner's Manual describes all

standard, country-specific, and optional fea-

tures offered with the series.

General information

The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Enter-

tainment, and Communication can be ob-

tained as a printed book from the service

center.

Supplementary Owner's Manuals

Also follow the Supplementary Owner's

Manuals, which are included in addition to

the onboard literature.

Integrated Owner's Manual in

the vehicle

Concept

The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically

describes features and functions found in

the vehicle. The Integrated Owner's Manual

can be displayed on the Control Display.

Selecting the Owner's Manual

1. Press the button.

2. "My MINI"

3. "Owner's Manual"

4. Select the desired method of accessing

the contents.

Scrolling through the Owner's

Manual

Turn the Controller, until the next or previ-

ous contents are displayed.

Context help

General information

The section of the Owner's Manual relating

to the function that is currently selected

can be displayed directly.

Seite 60

AT A GLANCE Owner's Manual media

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Opening via Central Information

Display (CID)

Change directly to the Options menu from

the function on the Control Display:

1. Press the button.

2. "Owner's Manual"

Opening when a Check Control

message is displayed

Directly from the Check Control message on

the Control Display:

"Owner's Manual"

Changing between a function and the

Owner's Manual

To switch from a function, for instance

radio, to the Owner's Manual on the Control

Display and to alternate between the two

displays:

1. Press the button.

2. "Owner's Manual"

3. Select the desired page in the Owner's

Manual.

4. Press the button again to return to

the last displayed function.

5. Press the button to return to the

page of the Owner's Manual displayed

last.

To alternate continuously between the last

displayed function and the last displayed

page of the Owner's Manual, repeat steps 4

& 5. Opens a new display every time.

Seite 61

Owner's Manual media AT A GLANCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Opening and closing

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with

the series. It also describes features and

functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-

tions or country versions. This also applies

to safety-related functions and systems.

When using these functions and systems,

the applicable laws and regulations must be

observed.

Vehicle key

General information

The vehicle is supplied with two vehicle

keys with integrated key.

Each vehicle key contains a replaceable bat-

tery, refer to page 65.

Depending on the equipment and country

version, various settings, refer to page 74,

can be configured for the button functions.

A personal driver profile, refer to page 71,

for each vehicle key is stored in the vehicle.

To provide information on maintenance rec-

ommendations, the service data is stored in

the vehicle key, refer to page 277.

To prevent possible locking in of the vehicle

key, take the vehicle key with you when ex-

iting the vehicle.

Safety Instructions

Warning

The vehicle key has a button cell battery.

Batteries or button cells can be swallowed

and lead to serious or fatal injuries within

two hours, for example, due to internal

burns or chemical burns. There is an in-

jury hazard or danger to life. Keep the ve-

hicle key and batteries out of reach for

children. Immediately seek medical help if

there is any suspicion that a battery or

button cell has been swallowed or is lo-

cated in any part of the body.

Warning

People or animals in the vehicle can lock

the doors from the inside and lock them-

selves in. In this case, the vehicle cannot

be opened from the outside. There is a risk

of injury. Take the vehicle key with you so

that the vehicle can be opened from the

outside.

Warning

Unattended children or animals in the ve-

hicle can cause the vehicle to move and

endanger themselves and traffic, for in-

stance due to the following actions:

– Pressing the Start/Stop button.

– Releasing the parking brake.

– Opening and closing the doors or

windows.

– Engaging selector lever position N.

– Using vehicle equipment.

Seite 62

CONTROLS Opening and closing

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do

not leave children or animals unattended

in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key with

you when exiting and lock the vehicle.

Overview

1 Unlocking

2 Locking

3 Unlocking the tailgate

4 Panic mode

Unlocking

Press the button on the vehicle key.

Depending on the settings, refer to

page 74, the following access points are

unlocked.

– Driver's door and fuel filler flap.

Press the button on the vehicle key

again to unlock the other vehicle access

points.

– All doors, tailgate, and fuel filler flap.

In addition, the following functions are exe-

cuted:

– Unlocking is confirmed by the turn sig-

nals and the horn. This function must be

activated in the settings, refer to

page 74.

– The settings stored in the driver profile,

refer to page 71, are applied.

– The interior lights, refer to page 149,

and the MINI logo projection are

switched on, provided that the interior

lights were not switched off manually.

– Depending on the settings, the welcome

light and pathway lighting, refer to

page 146, are switched on.

– The alarm system, refer to page 75, is

switched off.

The light functions may depend on the am-

bient brightness.

Convenient opening

Press and hold the button on the ve-

hicle key after unlocking.

The windows and the glass sunroof are

opened, as long as the button on the vehicle

key is pressed.

Locking

1. Close the driver's door.

2. Press the button on the vehicle

key.

The following functions are executed:

– All doors, the tailgate, and the fuel filler

flap are locked.

– Locking is confirmed by the turn signals

and the horn. This function must be ac-

tivated in the settings, refer to

page 74.

– The alarm system, refer to page 75, is

switched on.

If the engine or ignition is still switched on

when you lock the vehicle, the vehicle horn

honks twice. In this case, the engine or ig-

nition must be switched off by means of the

Start/Stop button.

Seite 63

Opening and closing CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

With Comfort Access: convenient

closing

Safety information

Warning

With convenient closing, body parts can

be jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make

sure that the area of movement of the

doors is clear during convenient closing.

Closing

Press and hold the button on the ve-

hicle key in the area close to the ve-

hicle.

The windows and the glass sunroof are

closed, as long as the button on the vehicle

key is pressed.

Switch on interior lights and

courtesy light

Press the button on the vehicle key

with the vehicle locked.

The MINI logo projection is also switched

on.

These functions are not available if the inte-

rior lights were switched off manually.

The light functions may depend on the am-

bient brightness.

After locking, wait 10 seconds before press-

ing the button again.

Tailgate

General information

To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehi-

cle, do not place the vehicle key in the cargo

area.

Depending on the vehicle equipment and

country version, it is possible to specify

whether the tailgate can be unlocked with

the vehicle key and how the vehicle doors

will respond to this. To perform settings, re-

fer to page 74.

Safety information

Warning

Body parts can be jammed when operating

the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make

sure that the area of movement of the tail-

gate is clear during opening and closing.

NOTICE

The tailgate swings back and up when it

opens. There is a risk of damage to prop-

erty, among other potential damage. Make

sure that the area of movement of the tail-

gate is clear during opening and closing.

NOTICE

Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the

windows and heat conductors while driv-

ing. There is a risk of damage to property,

among other potential damage. Cover the

edges and ensure that pointed objects do

not hit the windows.

Opening

Press and hold the button on the ve-

hicle key for approx. 1 second.

The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung

upward.

Panic mode

You can trigger the alarm system if you find

yourself in a dangerous situation.

Seite 64

CONTROLS Opening and closing

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

– Press the button on the vehicle

key and hold for at least 3 sec-

onds.

– Briefly press the button on the vehicle

key three times in succession.

To switch off the alarm: press any button.

Replacing the battery

NOTE

Improper batteries in the vehicle key can

damage the vehicle key. There is a danger

of damage to property. Always replace the

discharged battery with a battery with the

same voltage, the same size and the same

specification.

1. Remove the integrated key from the ve-

hicle key, refer to page 67.

2. Slide the integrated key into the open-

ing and raise the cover.

The battery compartment is accessible.

3. Slide the integrated key in the cover of

the battery compartment and raise the

cover.

4. Push battery in arrow direction using a

pointed object and lift it out.

5. Insert a type CR 2032 3V battery with

the positive side facing up.

6. Insert lid and cover.

7. Push the integrated key into the vehicle

key until it engages.

Have old batteries disposed of by a

dealer’s service center or another

qualified service center or specialist

workshop or take them to a collection point.

Additional vehicle keys

Additional vehicle keys are available from a

service center or another qualified service

center or repair shop.

Loss of vehicle keys

A lost vehicle key can be blocked and re-

placed by a dealer’s service center or an-

Seite 65

Opening and closing CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

other qualified service center or repair

shop.

Malfunction

General information

A Check Control message is displayed.

Vehicle key recognition by the vehicle may

malfunction under the following circum-

stances:

– The battery of the vehicle key is dis-

charged. For replacing the battery, refer

to page 65.

– Interference of the radio connection

from transmission towers or other

equipment with high transmitting

power.

– Shielding of the vehicle key due to metal

objects.

Do not transport the vehicle key to-

gether with metal objects.

– Interference of the radio connection

from mobile phones or other electronic

devices in direct proximity to the vehi-

cle key.

Do not carry the vehicle key in close

proximity to other electronic devices.

– Interference of radio transmission by a

charging process of mobile devices, for

instance charging of a mobile phone.

– The vehicle key is in direct proximity of

the wireless charging tray.

Place the vehicle key in a different loca-

tion.

In the case of interference, the vehicle can

be unlocked and locked from the outside

with the integrated key, refer to page 67.

Starting the engine via emergency

detection of the Vehicle key

It is not possible to start the engine if the

vehicle key has not been detected.

Proceed as follows in this case:

1. Hold the vehicle key against the mark

on the steering column as shown. Pay

attention to the display in the instru-

ment cluster.

2. If the vehicle key is detected:

Start the engine within 10 seconds.

If the vehicle key is not recognized, slightly

change the position of the vehicle key and

repeat the procedure.

Frequently Asked Questions

What precautions can be taken to be able to

open a vehicle with an accidentally locked

in vehicle key?

– The options provided by the Remote

Services of the MINI Connected app in-

clude the ability to lock and unlock a ve-

hicle.

This requires an active MINI Connected

contract and the MINI Connected app

must be installed on a smartphone.

– Unlocking the vehicle can be requested

via the MINI Connected Call Center.

An active MINI Connected contract is

required.

Seite 66

CONTROLS Opening and closing

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Integrated key

General information

The driver's door can be locked and un-

locked without the vehicle key using the

integrated key.

Safety information

Warning

Unlocking from the inside is only possible

with special knowledge.

Persons who spend a lengthy time in the

vehicle while being exposed to extreme

temperatures are at risk of injury or death.

Do not lock the vehicle from the outside

when there are people in it.

NOTICE

The door lock is permanently joined with

the door. The door handle can be moved.

When pulling the door handle with the

integrated key inserted, paint or the

integrated key can be damaged. There is a

risk of damage to property, among other

potential damage. Remove the integrated

key before pulling the external door han-

dle.

Removing

Press the button, arrow 1, and pull out the

integrated key, arrow 2.

Locking/unlocking via the door

lock

1. Remove lid on the door lock.

To do this, slide the integrated key into

the opening from below and remove the

lid.

2. Unlock or lock the door lock using the

integrated key.

The other doors must be unlocked or locked

from the inside.

Alarm system

The alarm system is not switched on if the

vehicle is locked with the integrated key.

The alarm system is triggered when the

door is opened, if the vehicle has been un-

locked via the door lock.

Seite 67

Opening and closing CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Buttons for the central locking

system

General information

In the event of a severe accident, the vehi-

cle is automatically unlocked. The hazard

warning system and interior lights come on.

Overview

Buttons for the central locking system.

Locking

Press the button with the front

doors closed.

– The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.

– The vehicle is not secured against theft

when locking.

Unlocking

Press the button.

Opening

– Press button to unlock the doors

together, and then pull the door handle

above the armrest.

– Front doors: pull the door handle on the

door to open the door. The other doors

remain locked.

– Back doors: pull twice on the door han-

dle on the door to be opened; the first

time unlocks the door, the second time

opens it. The other doors remain locked.

Comfort Access

Concept

The vehicle can be accessed without operat-

ing the vehicle key.

Carrying the vehicle key with you, e.g., in

your pants pocket, is sufficient.

The vehicle automatically detects the vehi-

cle key when it is in close proximity or in

the car's interior.

General information

Comfort Access supports the following

functions:

– Unlocking and locking the vehicle.

– Convenient closing.

– Open the tailgate.

Functional requirements

– To lock the vehicle, the vehicle key must

be outside of the vehicle near the doors.

– The next unlocking and locking cycle is

not possible until after approx. 2 sec-

onds.

Seite 68

CONTROLS Opening and closing

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Unlocking

On the driver's or front passenger's outer

door handle, press the button.

Depending on the settings, refer to

page 74, only the driver's door and the

fuel filler flap may be unlocked. Unlike

when unlocking using the vehicle key,

pressing the button on the outer door han-

dle again does not unlock the other vehicle

access points. Rather, the vehicle is locked

again.

If the vehicle was locked automatically after

driving off or with the button of the central

locking system from the inside, note the fol-

lowing: if a door on a locked vehicle is

opened from the inside with the door

opener, pressing the button on the outer

door handle will first lock the vehicle again.

To unlock, the button on the outer door han-

dle must be pressed again.

Locking

On the driver's or front passenger's outer

door handle, press the button.

Convenient closing

Safety information

Warning

With convenient closing, body parts can

be jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make

sure that the area of movement of the

doors is clear during convenient closing.

Closing

Press and hold down the button on the driv-

er's or front passenger's outer door handle.

In addition to locking, the windows and

glass sunroof will be closed.

To open the tailgate

General information

If the tailgate is opened via Comfort Access,

locked doors are not unlocked.

To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehi-

cle, do not place the vehicle key in the cargo

area.

Seite 69

Opening and closing CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Safety information

Warning

Body parts can be jammed when operating

the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make

sure that the area of movement of the tail-

gate is clear during opening and closing.

NOTICE

The tailgate swings back and up when it

opens. There is a risk of damage to prop-

erty, among other potential damage. Make

sure that the area of movement of the tail-

gate is clear during opening and closing.

NOTICE

Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the

windows and heat conductors while driv-

ing. There is a risk of damage to property,

among other potential damage. Cover the

edges and ensure that pointed objects do

not hit the windows.

Opening

Press button next on tailgate.

The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung

upward.

Malfunction

Vehicle key recognition by the vehicle may

malfunction under the following circum-

stances:

– The battery of the vehicle key is dis-

charged. For replacing the battery, refer

to page 65.

– Interference of the radio connection

from transmission towers or other

equipment with high transmitting

power.

– Shielding of the vehicle key due to metal

objects.

Do not transport the vehicle key to-

gether with metal objects.

– Interference of the radio connection

from mobile phones or other electronic

devices in direct proximity to the vehi-

cle key.

Do not carry the vehicle key in close

proximity to other electronic devices.

Wet or snowy conditions may disrupt the

locking request recognition function on the

door handles.

In the case of a malfunction, unlock and

lock the vehicle using the buttons of the ve-

hicle key or use the integrated key, refer to

page 67.

Tailgate

General information

To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehi-

cle, do not place the vehicle key in the cargo

area.

Depending on the vehicle equipment and

country version, it is possible to specify

whether the tailgate can be unlocked with

the vehicle key and how the vehicle doors

will respond to this. To perform settings, re-

fer to page 74.

Seite 70

CONTROLS Opening and closing

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Safety information

Warning

Body parts can be jammed when operating

the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make

sure that the area of movement of the tail-

gate is clear during opening and closing.

NOTICE

The tailgate swings back and up when it

opens. There is a risk of damage to prop-

erty, among other potential damage. Make

sure that the area of movement of the tail-

gate is clear during opening and closing.

NOTICE

Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the

windows and heat conductors while driv-

ing. There is a risk of damage to property,

among other potential damage. Cover the

edges and ensure that pointed objects do

not hit the windows.

Opening and closing

Opening from the outside

– Without Comfort Access: unlock vehicle.

With Comfort Access: unlock the vehi-

cle or have the vehicle key with you.

Press button next on tailgate.

– Press and hold the button on the

vehicle key for approx. 1 second.

Depending on the setting, the doors may

also be unlocked. Unlocking using the

vehicle key, refer to page 64.

The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung

upward.

Opening from the inside

With Steptronic transmission:

With the vehicle stationary, press

the button in the driver's floor area.

If the vehicle is locked, selector lever posi-

tion P must be engaged first.

With manual transmission:

With the vehicle stationary, press

the button in the driver's floor area twice in

quick succession.

Closing

Recessed grips on the interior trim of the

tailgate can be used to conveniently pull

down the tailgate.

Driver profiles

Concept

In the driver profiles, individual settings for

several drivers can be stored and called up

again when required.

Seite 71

Opening and closing CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

General information

There are three driver profiles with which

personal vehicle settings can be stored. Ev-

ery vehicle key has been assigned one of

these driver profiles.

If the vehicle is unlocked using the vehicle

key, the assigned personal driver profile will

be activated. All settings stored in the

driver profile are automatically applied.

If several drivers use their own vehicle

keys, the vehicle will apply the personal set-

tings as it is being unlocked. These settings

are also restored, if the vehicle has been

used in the meantime by a person with a

different vehicle key.

Changes to the settings are automatically

stored in the driver profile currently acti-

vated.

If another driver profile is selected via the

Central Information Display (CID), the set-

tings stored in it will be applied automati-

cally. The new driver profile is assigned to

the vehicle key that is currently in use.

There is an additional guest profile available

that is not assigned to any vehicle key: it

can be used to apply settings in the vehicle

without changing the personal driver pro-

files.

Functional requirements

For the system to be able to identify the

driver profile associated to a particular

driver, the detected vehicle key must be

clearly allocated to the driver.

This is the case when:

– The driver is only carrying his or her

own vehicle key.

– The driver unlocks the vehicle.

– The driver gets into the vehicle through

the driver's door.

Settings

The settings, for instance for the following

systems and functions, are stored in the ac-

tive profile. The scope of storable settings

depends on country and equipment.

– Unlocking and locking.

– Lights.

– Radio.

– Instrument cluster.

– Programmable memory buttons.

– Volumes, sound.

– Control Display.

– Climate control.

– Navigation.

– PDC Park Distance Control.

– Rearview camera.

– Head-up Display.

– MINI Driving Modes.

– Intelligent Safety.

Profile management

Selecting a driver profile

Regardless of the vehicle key in use, a dif-

ferent driver profile may be activated. This

allows you to call up personal vehicle set-

tings, even if you did not unlock the vehicle

with your own vehicle key.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Driver profiles"

3. Select driver profile.

4. "OK"

– All settings stored in the selected driver

profile are automatically applied.

– The called-up driver profile is assigned

to the vehicle key being used at the

time.

Seite 72

CONTROLS Opening and closing

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

– If the driver profile is already assigned

to a different vehicle key, this driver

profile will apply to both vehicle keys.

Using a guest profile

The guest profile is for individual settings

that are stored in none of the three personal

driver profiles.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Driver profiles"

3. "Drive off (guest)"

4. "OK"

The guest profile cannot be renamed. It is

not assigned to the vehicle key currently in

use.

Renaming a driver profile

A personal name can be assigned to the ac-

tive driver profile to avoid confusion be-

tween the driver profiles.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Driver profiles"

3. Select driver profile.

The driver profile marked with this

icon can be renamed.

4. "Change driver profile name"

5. Enter profile name.

6. Select the icon.

Resetting a driver profile

The settings of the driver profile currently

in use are reset to their factory settings.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Driver profiles"

3. Select driver profile.

The driver profile marked with this

icon can be reset.

4. "Reset driver profile"

5. "OK"

Exporting driver profiles

Most settings of the active driver profile

can be exported.

Exporting is helpful when storing and re-

trieving personal settings, for instance be-

fore delivering the vehicle to a workshop.

The stored driver profiles can be taken into

another vehicle.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Driver profiles"

3. Select driver profile.

The driver profile marked with this

icon can be exported.

4. "Export driver profile (USB)"

Select USB storage device as needed.

Importing driver profiles

Profiles stored on a USB device can be im-

ported via the USB port.

The existing settings of the active driver

profile are overwritten with the settings of

the imported driver profile.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Driver profiles"

3. Select the driver profile to overwrite.

The driver profile marked with this

icon can be overwritten.

4. "Import driver profile (USB)"

Select USB storage device as needed.

5. Select the driver profile to be imported.

Seite 73

Opening and closing CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Displaying driver profiles during start

The driver profiles can be displayed at each

startup to select the desired profile.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Driver profiles"

3. "Show driver profiles at startup"

System limits

A clear assignment between the vehicle key

and driver may not be possible in the fol-

lowing cases, for example.

– The passenger unlocks the vehicle with

his or her own vehicle key, but another

person is driving.

– The driver unlocks the vehicle via Com-

fort Access and has multiple vehicle

keys with him or her.

– The driver changes, but the vehicle is

not locked and unlocked.

– Multiple vehicle keys are located out-

side of the vehicle.

Settings

General information

Depending on the package and country ver-

sion, various settings are available for the

vehicle key functions.

These settings are stored for the driver pro-

file, refer to page 71, currently used.

Unlocking

Doors

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Doors/Key"

4. "Driver's door" or "All doors"

5. Select the desired setting:

– "Driver's door only"

Only the driver's door and the fuel

filler flap are unlocked. Pressing

again unlocks the entire vehicle.

– "All doors"

The entire vehicle is unlocked.

Tailgate

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Doors/Key"

The text next to the icon indicates the

current setting.

5. Select the desired setting:

– "Tailgate"

Only the tailgate is unlocked.

– "Tailgate and door(s)"

The tailgate and the doors are un-

locked.

– "Tailgate opens after unlocking"

The vehicle must be unlocked before

the tailgate can be used with the ve-

hicle key.

– "Button lock"

It is not possible to use the tailgate

via the vehicle key.

Depending on the vehicle equipment and

country version, this setting may not be of-

fered.

Automatic locking

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

Seite 74

CONTROLS Opening and closing

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Doors/Key"

4. Select the desired setting:

– "Lock automatically"

The vehicle locks automatically after

a while if no door is opened after un-

locking.

– "Lock after starting to drive"

The vehicle locks automatically after

you drive off.

Automatic unlocking

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Doors/Key"

4. "Unlock at end of trip"

After the engine is switched off by

pressing the Start/Stop button, the

locked vehicle is automatically un-

locked.

Confirmation signals from the

vehicle

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Doors/Key"

4. Deactivate or activate the desired con-

firmation signals.

– "Flash for lock/unlock"

Unlocking is signaled by two flashes,

locking by one.

– With alarm system:

"Acoustic signal for lock/unlock"

Unlocking is signaled by one honk of

the horn.

Alarm system

General information

When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle

alarm system reacts to the following

changes:

– Unauthorized opening of a door, the

hood or the tailgate.

– Movements in the vehicle interior.

– Changes in the vehicle tilt, for instance,

during attempts at stealing a wheel or

when towing the vehicle.

– Disconnected battery voltage.

– Improper use of the socket for Onboard

Diagnosis.

– Locking the vehicle while a device is

connected to the socket for the OBD On-

board-Diagnosis. For socket for the OBD

Onboard Diagnosis, refer to page 278.

The alarm system signals these changes vis-

ually and acoustically:

– Acoustic alarm:

Depending on local regulations, the

acoustic alarm may be suppressed.

– Visual alarm:

By flashing of the hazard warning sys-

tem and headlights, where required.

Do not modify the system to ensure func-

tion of the alarm system.

Seite 75

Opening and closing CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Overview

Indicator light on the interior mirror.

Switching on/off

The alarm system is switched on or off as

soon as the vehicle is locked with the vehi-

cle key or unlocked or locked via Comfort

Access.

Opening the doors with the alarm

system switched on

The alarm system is triggered when a door

is opened if the door was unlocked using

the integrated key in the door lock.

Switching off the alarm, refer to page 77.

Opening the tailgate with the alarm

system switched on

The tailgate can be opened even when the

alarm system is switched on.

After the tailgate is closed, it is locked and

monitored again provided the doors are

locked. The hazard warning system flashes

once.

Panic mode

You can trigger the alarm system if you find

yourself in a dangerous situation.

– Press the button on the vehicle

key and hold for at least 3 sec-

onds.

– Briefly press the button on the vehicle

key three times in succession.

To switch off the alarm: press any button.

Signals of the indicator light

– The indicator light flashes briefly every

2 seconds:

The alarm system is switched on.

– Indicator light flashes for approx.

10 seconds, then it flashes briefly every

2 seconds:

Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm

sensor are not active, as doors, hood, or

tailgate are not correctly closed. Cor-

rectly closed access points are secured.

Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm

sensor are not active, as doors, hood, or

trunk lid are not correctly closed. Cor-

rectly closed access points are secured.

When the still open access points are

closed, the interior motion sensor and

tilt alarm sensor will be switched on.

– The indicator light goes out after un-

locking:

The vehicle has not been tampered with.

– The indicator light flashes after unlock-

ing until the engine ignition is switched

on, but no longer than approx. 5 mi-

nutes:

An alarm has been triggered.

Tilt alarm sensor

The tilt of the vehicle is monitored.

The alarm system responds in situations

such as attempts to steal a wheel or when

the vehicle is towed.

Interior motion sensor

The windows and the glass sunroof must be

closed for the system to function properly.

Seite 76

CONTROLS Opening and closing

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Avoiding unintentional alarms

General information

The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion

sensor can trigger an alarm, although no un-

authorized action occurred.

Possible situations for an unwanted alarm:

– In automatic car washes.

– In duplex garages.

– During transport on trains carrying ve-

hicles, at sea or on a trailer.

– With animals in the vehicle.

– When the vehicle is locked after start of

fueling.

The tilt alarm sensor and the interior mo-

tion sensor can be switched off in such sit-

uations.

Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and

interior motion sensor

Press the button on the vehicle key

within 10 seconds as soon as the

vehicle is locked.

The indicator light lights up for approx.

2 seconds and then continues to flash.

The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion

sensor are switched off until the vehicle is

locked again.

Switching off the alarm

– Unlock the vehicle with the vehicle key.

– Unlock the vehicle with the integrated

key and switch on the ignition using the

emergency detection of the vehicle key,

refer to page 66.

– With Comfort Access: if you have the

vehicle key with you, unlock the vehicle

using the button on the driver's side or

passenger side door.

Power windows

General information

If an accident of a certain severity occurs,

the windows are automatically closed ex-

cept a gap.

Safety information

Warning

When operating the windows, body parts

and objects can be jammed. There is a risk

of injury or risk of damage to property.

Make sure that the area of movement of

the windows is clear during opening and

closing.

Overview

On 3-door models

Power windows

Seite 77

Opening and closing CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

On 5-door models

Power windows

Safety switch

Opening

– Press the switch to the resistance

point.

The window opens while the switch is

being held.

– Press the switch beyond the resist-

ance point.

The window opens automatically. Press-

ing the switch again stops the motion.

Convenient opening with the vehicle key,

refer to page 63.

Closing

– Pull the switch to the resistance

point.

The window closes while the switch is

being held.

– Pull the switch beyond the resist-

ance point.

The window closes automatically if the

door is closed. Pulling the switch again

stops the motion.

Convenient closing with the vehicle key, re-

fer to page 64.

Closing via Comfort Access, refer to

page 69.

Jam protection system

Concept

The jam protection prevents objects or body

parts becoming jammed between the door

frame and window while a window is being

closed.

General information

If resistance or a blockage is detected while

a window is being closed, the closing action

is interrupted.

Safety information

Warning

Accessories on the windows such as an-

tennas can impact jam protection. There is

a risk of injury. Do not install accessories

in the area of movement of the windows.

Closing without the jam protection

system

In case of danger from the outside or if ice

might prevent normal closing, proceed as

follows:

1. Pull the switch past the resistance

point and hold it there.

The window closes with limited jam pro-

tection. If the closing force exceeds a

specific threshold, closing is inter-

rupted.

2. Pull the switch past the resistance

point again within approx. 4 seconds

and hold it there.

The window closes without jam protec-

tion.

Seite 78

CONTROLS Opening and closing

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

On 5-door models: safety switch

General information

The safety switch can be used to prevent

children, for instance from opening and

closing the rear windows using the

switches in the rear.

If an accident of a certain severity occurs,

the safety function is switched off automati-

cally.

Switching on/off

Press the button.

The LED lights up if the safety func-

tion is switched on.

Malfunction

General information

In certain situations a window can only be

operated to a limited extent.

– After a power failure during the opening

or closing process, the a window can

only be operated to a limited extent. The

system must be initialized in this case.

– The power window motors are equipped

with overheating protection. If a win-

dow is opened and closed several times

within a short period of time, the over-

heating protection switches the motor

off temporarily. Depending on the de-

gree of overheating, it may only be pos-

sible to close the window or it may not

be possible to operate it at all.

In this case: allow the power window

motor to cool down.

Initializing the system

The system can be initialized when the ve-

hicle is stationary and the engine is run-

ning.

During initialization, the affected window

closes without jam protection.

Warning

When operating the windows, body parts

and objects can be jammed. There is a risk

of injury or risk of damage to property.

Make sure that the area of movement of

the windows is clear during opening and

closing.

1. Open the affected window completely.

2. Pull the switch to the resistance

point and hold.

The window closes.

3. Continue holding the switch pulled

to the resistance point.

The window opens and closes once or

twice after approx. 15 seconds, depend-

ing on the vehicle's equipment.

4. Release switch.

Panoramic glass sunroof

General information

In the event of a severe accident, the glass

sunroof is automatically closed.

Safety information

Warning

Body parts can be jammed when operating

the glass sunroof. There is a risk of injury.

Make sure that the area of movement of

the glass sunroof is clear during opening

and closing.

Seite 79

Opening and closing CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Overview

Tilting the glass sunroof

Press back the switch up to or

beyond the resistance point

and release it.

The glass sunroof is raised.

Opening glass sunroof

When the glass sunroof is closed

Press the switch back beyond

the resistance point and re-

lease it twice.

The glass sunroof is opened.

Pressing the switch again

stops the motion.

With the glass sunroof completely

raised

– Slide switch back to the re-

sistance point and hold.

The glass sunroof is

opened as long as the

switch is pressed.

– Press the switch back beyond the resist-

ance point and release it.

The glass sunroof is opened.

Pressing the switch again stops the mo-

tion.

Comfort position

In some models, the wind noises in the car's

interior are lowest when the glass sunroof

is not fully open. In these models, the auto-

matic function initially only opens the glass

sunroof up to this comfort position.

Pressing the switch again opens the glass

sunroof fully.

Closing glass sunroof

With the glass sunroof open

– Slide switch forward to the

resistance point and hold.

The glass sunroof is closed

as long as the switch is

pressed and stops in the

raised position.

– Press the switch forward beyond the re-

sistance point and release it.

The glass sunroof is closed and stops in

the raised position.

Pressing the switch again stops the mo-

tion.

– Press the switch forward beyond the re-

sistance point and release it twice.

The glass sunroof is closed.

Pressing the switch again stops the mo-

tion.

With the glass sunroof completely

raised

Press the switch forward be-

yond the resistance point and

release it.

The glass sunroof is closed.

Seite 80

CONTROLS Opening and closing

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Opening/closing the sun protection

Use the handle to slide the sun protection

into the desired position.

Jam protection system

Concept

The jam protection prevents objects or body

parts from becoming jammed between the

roof and glass sunroof while the glass sun-

roof is closing.

General information

If resistance or a blockage is detected while

the glass sunroof is being closed, the clos-

ing action is interrupted.

The glass sunroof opens slightly.

Closing without the jam protection

system

If there is an external danger, proceed as

follows:

1. Push the switch forward past the resist-

ance point and hold it.

The glass sunroof closes with limited

jam protection. If the closing force ex-

ceeds a specific threshold, closing is in-

terrupted.

2. Push the switch forward again past the

resistance point and hold until the glass

sunroof closes without jam protection.

Make sure that the closing area is clear.

Initializing after a power

interruption

After a power failure during the opening or

closing process, the glass sunroof can only

be operated to a limited extent. The system

must be initialized in this case. MINI rec-

ommends having this work performed only

by a dealer's service center or another quali-

fied service center or repair shop.

Seite 81

Opening and closing CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Seats, mirrors and steering wheel

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with

the series. It also describes features and

functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-

tions or country versions. This also applies

to safety-related functions and systems.

When using these functions and systems,

the applicable laws and regulations must be

observed.

Sitting safely

An ideal seat position that meets the needs

of the occupants can make a vital contribu-

tion to relaxed, fatigue-free driving.

In the event of an accident, the correct seat

position plays an important role. Follow the

information in the following chapters:

– Seats, refer to page 82.

– Safety belts, refer to page 85.

– Head restraints, refer to page 87.

– Airbags, refer to page 151.

Front seats

Safety information

Warning

Seat setting while driving can lead to un-

expected movements of the seat. Vehicle

control could be lost. There is a risk of ac-

cident. Only adjust the seat on the driver's

side when the vehicle is stationary.

Warning

With a backrest inclined too far to the

rear, the efficacy of the safety belt can no

longer be ensured. There is a risk of slid-

ing under the safety belt in an accident.

There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.

Adjust the seat prior to starting the trip.

Adjust the backrest so that it is in the

most upright position as possible and do

not adjust again while driving.

Warning

There is a risk of jamming when moving

the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk

of damage to property. Make sure that the

area of movement of the seat is clear prior

to any adjustment.

Adjusting seats

Overview

1 Forward/backward

2 Thigh support

3 Height

4 Backrest tilt

Seite 82

CONTROLS Seats, mirrors and steering wheel

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Forward/backward

Warning

Unexpected movements of the seat while

driving may occur if the seat is unlocked.

Vehicle control could be lost. There is a

risk of accident. After adjusting, move the

seat forward or back slightly, making sure

the seat engages properly.

Pull the lever and slide the seat in the de-

sired direction.

Height

Pull the lever up or press it down as often as

needed to reach the desired height.

Backrest tilt

Pull the lever, and apply your weight to the

backrest or lift it off, as necessary.

Lumbar support

The curvature of the seat backrest can be

adjusted in a way that it supports the lum-

bar region of the spine. The lower back and

the spine are supported for upright posture.

Turn the wheel in order to increase or de-

crease the curvature.

Seite 83

Seats, mirrors and steering wheel CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Thigh support

Pull the lever at the front of the seat and ad-

just the thigh support.

In 3-door models: entering the rear

Safety information

Warning

There is a risk of jamming when moving

the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk

of damage to property. Make sure that the

area of movement of the seat is clear prior

to any adjustment.

Warning

Unexpected movements of the seat while

driving may occur if the seat is unlocked.

Vehicle control could be lost. There is a

risk of accident. After adjusting, move the

seat forward or back slightly, making sure

the seat engages properly.

Warning

Unexpected movements of the rear seat

backrest while driving may occur if the

rear seat backrest is unlocked. Vehicle

control could be lost. There is a risk of in-

jury. Fold back and lock the backrests be-

fore driving. Make sure the backrest en-

gages correctly by slightly moving forward

and back.

Fold the seat backrest forward

1. Pull lever up to the stop.

2. Fold the seat backrest forward.

3. Push the seat forward.

Original position

The driver's seat features a mechanical

memory function for forward/back and

backrest adjustment.

1. Push the seat back into the original po-

sition.

2. Fold back the backrest to lock the seat.

If the backrest is folded back when the seat

is not yet in the original position, the seat

engages in the current position. In this

case, manually adjust longitudinal direction,

refer to page 83.

Seite 84

CONTROLS Seats, mirrors and steering wheel

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Front seat heating

Overview

Seat heating

Switching on

Press the button once for each tem-

perature level.

The maximum temperature is reached when

three LEDs are lit.

If the trip is continued within approx.

15 minutes after a stop, seat heating is

switched on automatically with the temper-

ature selected last.

When GREEN Mode is activated, refer to

page 236, the heating output is reduced.

Switching off

Press and hold the button until the

LEDs go out.

Safety belts

General information

The vehicle is fitted with four or five safety

belts to ensure occupants' safety. However,

they can only unfold their protective effect

when adjusted correctly.

Always make sure that safety belts are be-

ing worn by all occupants before driving off.

Although airbags enhance safety by provid-

ing added protection, they do not replace

safety belts.

If needed, disengage the safety belt in the

rear from the belt buckle on the side.

All belt fastening points are designed to

achieve the best possible protective effect

of the safety belts with proper use of the

safety belts and correct seat setting. Follow

notes on sitting safely, refer to page 82.

The two outer safety belt buckles of the rear

seat are intended for the persons sitting on

the left and right.

The center safety belt buckle of the rear

seat is intended for the person sitting in the

middle.

Safety information

Warning

Use of a safety belt to buckle more than

one person will potentially defeat the abil-

ity of the safety belt to serve its protective

function. There is a risk of injuries or dan-

ger to life. Do not allow more than one per-

son to wear a single safety belt. Infants

and children are not allowed on an occu-

pant's lap, but must be transported and se-

cured in designated child restraint sys-

tems.

Warning

The efficacy of safety gear, including

safety belts, can be limited or lost when

safety belts are fastened incorrectly. An

incorrectly fastened safety belt can cause

additional injuries, for instance in the

event of an accident, braking or evasive

maneuvers. There is a risk of injuries or

danger to life. Make sure that all occu-

pants are wearing safety belts correctly.

Seite 85

Seats, mirrors and steering wheel CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Warning

With a rear backrest that is not locked, the

protective function of the middle safety

belt is not guaranteed. There is a risk of

injuries or danger to life. If you are using

the middle safety belt, lock the wider rear

seat backrest.

Warning

The efficacy of safety gear, including

safety belts, may not be fully functional or

fail in the following situations:

– The safety belts or safety belt buckles

are damaged, soiled, or changed in

any other way.

– Belt tensioners or belt retractors

were modified.

Safety belts can be imperceptibly damaged

in the event of an accident. There is a risk

of injuries or danger to life. Do not modify

safety belts, safety belt buckles, belt ten-

sioners, belt retractors or belt anchors and

keep them clean. Have the safety belts

checked after an accident at the dealer’s

service center or another qualified service

center or repair shop.

Correct use of safety belts

– Wear the safety belt twist-free and tight

to your body over your lap and should-

ers.

– Wear the safety belt deep on your hips

over your lap. The safety belt may not

press on your stomach.

– Do not rub the safety belt against sharp

edges, or guide it or jam it in across

hard or fragile objects.

– Avoid thick clothing.

– Re-tighten the safety belt frequently up-

ward around your upper body.

Buckling the safety belt

1. Guide the safety belt slowly over

shoulder and hip to put it on.

2. Insert the tongue plate into the safety

belt buckle. The safety belt buckle must

engage audibly.

Unbuckling the safety belt

1. Hold the safety belt firmly.

2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.

3. Guide the safety belt back into its roll-

up mechanism.

Safety belt reminder for driver's

seat and front passenger seat

Display in the instrument cluster

The indicator light lights up and a

signal sounds. Make sure that the

safety belts are positioned correctly.

The safety belt reminder can also be acti-

vated if objects are placed on the front pas-

senger seat.

Safety belt reminder for rear seats

General information

The safety belt reminder is automatically

activated each time the engine starts.

The safety belt reminder is also activated

when a passenger unbuckles a rear seat

safety belt during the trip.

Seite 86

CONTROLS Seats, mirrors and steering wheel

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Display in the instrument cluster

The indicator light in the instrument cluster

illuminates after the engine is started.

Icon Description

Green: the safety belt is buckled

on the corresponding rear seat.

Red: the safety belt is not buckled

on the corresponding rear seat.

Front head restraints

Safety information

Warning

Removal or incorrect adjustment of head

restraints can cause injuries in the head

and neck area. There is a risk of injury.

– Before driving, install the removed

head restraints on the occupied seats.

– Adjust the head restraint so its center

supports the back of the head at as

close to eye level as possible.

– Adjust the distance so that the head

restraint is as close as possible to the

back of the head. Adjust the distance

via the backrest tilt as needed.

Warning

Body parts can be jammed when moving

the head restraint. There is a risk of injury.

Make sure that the area of movement is

clear when moving the head restraint.

Warning

Objects on the head restraint reduce the

protective effect in the head and neck

area. There is a risk of injury.

– Do not use seat or head restraint cov-

ers.

– Do not hang objects, for instance

clothes hangers, directly on the head

restraint.

– Only use accessories that have been

determined to be safe for attachment

to a head restraint.

– Do not use any accessories, for in-

stance pillows, while driving.

Adjusting the height: John Cooper

Works sport seat

The height of the head restraints cannot be

set.

Adjusting the height

– To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and

push the head restraint down.

– To raise: push the head restraint up.

After setting the height, make sure that the

head restraint engages correctly.

Removing: John Cooper Works

sport seat

The head restraints cannot be removed.

Removing

Only remove the head restraint if no one

will be sitting in the seat in question.

Seite 87

Seats, mirrors and steering wheel CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

1. If necessary, fold the rear seat backrest

forward.

2. Pull head restraint up as far as possible.

3. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the

head restraint out completely.

Installing

Proceed in the reverse order to install the

head restraint.

Rear head restraints

Safety information

Warning

Removal or incorrect adjustment of head

restraints can cause injuries in the head

and neck area. There is a risk of injury.

– Before driving, install the removed

head restraints on the occupied seats.

– Adjust the head restraint so its center

supports the back of the head at as

close to eye level as possible.

– Adjust the distance so that the head

restraint is as close as possible to the

back of the head. Adjust the distance

via the backrest tilt as needed.

Warning

Body parts can be jammed when moving

the head restraint. There is a risk of injury.

Make sure that the area of movement is

clear when moving the head restraint.

Warning

Objects on the head restraint reduce the

protective effect in the head and neck

area. There is a risk of injury.

– Do not use seat or head restraint cov-

ers.

– Do not hang objects, for instance

clothes hangers, directly on the head

restraint.

– Only use accessories that have been

determined to be safe for attachment

to a head restraint.

– Do not use any accessories, for in-

stance pillows, while driving.

Adjusting the height

– To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and

push the head restraint down.

– To raise: push the head restraint up.

After setting the height, make sure that the

head restraint engages correctly.

Seite 88

CONTROLS Seats, mirrors and steering wheel

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Fold down

– To fold down: press the button, arrow 1,

and press down the head restraint, ar-

row 2.

– Forward: fold the head restraint toward

the front as far as it will go. Make sure

that the head restraint engages cor-

rectly.

Removing

Only remove the head restraint if no one

will be sitting in the seat in question.

1. Fold down the rear seat backrest, refer

to page 226, in question.

2. Pull head restraint up against the resist-

ance.

3. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the

head restraint out completely.

Installing

Proceed in the reverse order to install the

head restraint.

Mirrors

Exterior mirrors

General information

The mirror on the front passenger side is

more curved than the driver's side mirror.

Safety information

Warning

Objects reflected in the mirror are closer

than they appear. The distance to the traf-

fic behind could be incorrectly estimated,

for instance while changing lanes. There is

a risk of accident. Estimate the distance to

the traffic behind by looking over your

shoulder.

Overview

1 Adjusting

2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Mon-

itor

3 Folding in and out

Selecting a mirror

To change over to the other mirror:

Slide the switch.

Seite 89

Seats, mirrors and steering wheel CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Adjusting electrically

Press the button.

The mirror movement follows the

button movement.

Malfunction

In case of an electrical malfunction, adjust

the mirror by pressing the edges of the mir-

ror glass.

Automatic heating

Both exterior mirrors are automatically

heated as needed and when the ignition is

switched on.

Automatic dimming feature

The exterior mirror on the driver's side is

automatically dimmed. Photocells in the

car's interior mirror, refer to page 91, are

used to control this.

Automatic Curb Monitor, exterior

mirror

Concept

If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass

on the front passenger side is tilted down-

ward. This improves your view of the curb

and other low-lying obstacles when parking,

for instance.

Activating

1. slide the switch to the driver's

side mirror position.

2. Engage selector lever position R.

Deactivating

Slide the switch to the passenger's side mir-

ror position.

Interior mirror, manually dimmable

Flip lever

To reduce the blinding effect of the interior

mirror, flip the lever forward.

Turn button

Turn the button to reduce the blinding ef-

fect by the interior mirror.

Seite 90

CONTROLS Seats, mirrors and steering wheel

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Interior mirror, automatic dimming

feature

Overview

Photocells are used for control:

– In the mirror glass.

– On the back of the mirror.

Functional requirements

– Keep the photocells clean.

– Do not cover the area between the inte-

rior mirror and the windshield.

Steering wheel

Safety information

Warning

Steering wheel adjustments while driving

can lead to unexpected steering wheel

movements. Vehicle control could be lost.

There is a risk of accident. Adjustng the

steering wheel while the vehicle is sta-

tionary only.

Adjusting

1. Fold the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel to the prefer-

red height and angle to suit your seat

position.

3. Fold the lever back up.

Heated steering wheel

Overview

Heated steering wheel

Switching on/off

Press the button.

– On: the LED lights up.

– Off: the LED goes out.

If the trip is resumed within approx. 15 mi-

nutes after an intermediate stop, the heated

steering wheel switches on automatically if

the function was switched on at the end of

the last trip.

Seite 91

Seats, mirrors and steering wheel CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Transporting children safely

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with

the series. It also describes features and

functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-

tions or country versions. This also applies

to safety-related functions and systems.

When using these functions and systems,

the applicable laws and regulations must be

observed.

The right place for children

Safety information

Warning

Unattended children or animals in the ve-

hicle can cause the vehicle to move and

endanger themselves and traffic, for in-

stance due to the following actions:

– Pressing the Start/Stop button.

– Releasing the parking brake.

– Opening and closing the doors or

windows.

– Engaging selector lever position N.

– Using vehicle equipment.

There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do

not leave children or animals unattended

in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key with

you when exiting and lock the vehicle.

Warning

A heated vehicle may result in death to

persons, especially children, or animals.

There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.

Do not leave persons, especially children,

or animals unattended in the vehicle.

Warning

Exposure to intense sunlight can cause

child restraint systems and their compo-

nents to become very hot. Persons may

sustain burn injuries when touching the

hot components. There is a risk of injury.

Do not expose the child restraint system to

direct sunlight or cover where necessary.

If necessary, let the child restraint system

cool down before transporting a child. Do

not leave children unattended in the vehi-

cle.

Transport children in the rear seat

General information

Accident research shows that the safest

place for children is in the rear seat.

Children younger than 13 years of age or

shorter than 5 ft/150 cm should be trans-

ported in the rear seat in suitable child re-

straint systems designed for the age, weight

and size of the child. Children 13 years of

age or older must wear a safety belt as soon

as a suitable child restraint system can no

longer be used due to their age, weight, or

size.

Seite 92

CONTROLS Transporting children safely

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Safety information

Warning

The safety belt cannot be fastened cor-

rectly on children shorter than 5 ft,

150 cm without suitable additional child

restraint systems. The efficacy of safety

gear, including safety belts, can be limited

or lost when safety belts are fastened in-

correctly. An incorrectly fastened safety

belt can cause additional injuries, for in-

stance in the event of an accident, braking

or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of in-

juries or danger to life. Secure children

shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm using suitable

child restraint systems.

Children on the front passenger

seat

General information

Before using a child restraint system on the

front passenger seat, ensure that the front,

knee, and side airbags on the front passen-

ger side are deactivated. For automatic de-

activation of front-seat passenger airbags,

refer to page 153.

Safety information

Warning

Active front-seat passenger airbags can in-

jure a child in a child restraint system

when the airbags are activated. There is a

risk of injury. Make sure that the front-

seat passenger airbags are deactivated and

that the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indica-

tor light lights up.

Warning

The stability of the child restraint system

is limited or compromised with incorrect

seat setting or improper installation of the

child seat. There is a risk of injuries or

danger to life. Make sure that the child re-

straint system fits securely against the

backrest. If possible, adjust the backrest

tilt for all affected backrests and correctly

adjust the seats. Make sure that seats and

backrests are securely engaged or locked.

If possible, adjust the height of the head

restraints or remove them.

Installing child restraint sys-

tems

General information

Pay attention to the specifications of the

child restraint system manufacturer when

selecting, installing, and using child re-

straint systems.

In order to facilitate the installation of a

back-facing child restraint system in the

rear:

Move the front passenger seat as far up as

possible before folding down the backrest.

Safety information

Warning

The protective effect of child restraint sys-

tems and their fastening systems which

have been damaged or exposed to an acci-

dent can be limited or lost. A child cannot

be properly restrained in the event of an

accident, braking or evasive maneuvers.

There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.

Seite 93

Transporting children safely CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Do not use child restraint systems which

have been damaged or exposed to an acci-

dent.

If a child restraint system and its fasten-

ing system has been damaged or exposed

to an accident, have these systems

checked and replaced by the dealer's serv-

ice center or another qualified service cen-

ter or repair shop.

Warning

The stability of the child restraint system

is limited or compromised with incorrect

seat setting or improper installation of the

child seat. There is a risk of injuries or

danger to life. Make sure that the child re-

straint system fits securely against the

backrest. If possible, adjust the backrest

tilt for all affected backrests and correctly

adjust the seats. Make sure that seats and

backrests are securely engaged or locked.

If possible, adjust the height of the head

restraints or remove them.

On the rear seats

In order to facilitate the installation of a

back-facing child restraint system:

Move the front passenger seat as far up as

possible before folding down the backrest.

On the front passenger seat

Deactivating airbags

Warning

Active front-seat passenger airbags can in-

jure a child in a child restraint system

when the airbags are activated. There is a

risk of injury. Make sure that the front-

seat passenger airbags are deactivated and

that the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indica-

tor light lights up.

Before installing a child restraint system in

the front passenger seat, make sure that the

front, knee and side airbags on the front

passenger side are deactivated.

Deactivate the front-seat passenger airbags

automatically, refer to page 153.

Seat position and height

After installing a child restraint system,

move the front passenger seat as far back as

possible and adjust its height to the highest

and thus best possible position for the belt

and to offer optimal protection in the event

of an accident.

If the upper anchorage of the safety belt is

located in front of the belt guide of the child

seat, move the front passenger seat care-

fully forward until the best possible belt

guide position is reached.

Child seat security

The rear safety belts and the front passen-

ger safety belt can be permanently locked to

fasten child restraint systems.

Locking the safety belt

1. Pull out the belt strap completely.

2. Secure the child restraint system with

the safety belt.

Seite 94

CONTROLS Transporting children safely

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in and

pull it tight against the child restraint

system. The safety belt is disabled.

Unlocking the safety belt

1. Unbuckle the safety belt buckle.

2. Remove the child restraint system.

3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in com-

pletely.

LATCH child restraint fixing

system

General information

LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Chil-

dren.

Pay attention to the operating and safety in-

formation from the child restraint system

manufacturer when installing and using

LATCH child restraint fixing systems.

Mounts for the lower LATCH

anchors

General information

The lower anchors may be used to attach

the CRS to the vehicle seat up to a com-

bined child and CRS weight of 65 lbs/30 kg

when the child is restrained by the internal

harnesses.

Safety information

Warning

If the LATCH child restraint fixing sys-

tems are not correctly engaged, the protec-

tive effect of the LATCH child restraint

fixing system is limited. There is a risk of

injuries or danger to life. Make sure that

the lower anchors are securely engaged

and that the LATCH child restraint fixing

system fits securely against the backrest.

Warning

The attachment points for child restraint

systems in the vehicle are intended for at-

taching child restraint systems only.

When other objects are mounted, the an-

chors can be damaged. There is a risk of

injury or risk of damage to property. At-

tach only child restraint systems at the

corresponding attachment points.

Position

Icon Meaning

The corresponding icon

shows the mounts for the

lower LATCH anchors.

Seats equipped with lower

anchors are marked with a

pair, (2), of LATCH symbols.

For vehicles equipped with

a middle seat:

It is not recommended to

use the inner lower anchors

of standard outer LATCH

positions to fasten a child

restraint system on the

middle seat. Use the vehicle

safety belt instead for the

middle seat.

Before installing LATCH child

restraint fixing systems

Pull the safety belt away from the area of

the child restraint system.

Seite 95

Transporting children safely CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Assembly of LATCH child restraint

fixing systems

1. Install child restraint system, see manu-

facturer's information.

2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are

properly engaged.

Child restraint systems with tether

strap

Safety information

Warning

If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly

used for the child restraint system, the

protective effect is reduced. There is a risk

of injury. Make sure that the upper retain-

ing strap does not run over sharp edges

and is not twisted as it passes the upper

anchor.

Warning

If the rear backrest is not locked, the pro-

tective effect of the child restraint system

is limited or there is none. In certain situa-

tions, for instance braking maneuvers or

in case of an accident, the rear backrest

can fold forward. There is a risk of injuries

or danger to life. Make sure that the rear

backrests are locked.

Warning

The attachment points for child restraint

systems in the vehicle are intended for at-

taching child restraint systems only.

When other objects are mounted, the an-

chors can be damaged. There is a risk of

injury or risk of damage to property. At-

tach only child restraint systems at the

corresponding attachment points.

Anchors

The respective icon shows the an-

chor for the upper retaining strap.

Seats with an upper top tether are

marked with this icon. It can be found on

the rear seat backrest or the rear window

shelf.

Routing the retaining strap

1 Direction of travel

2 Head restraint

3 Hook for upper retaining strap

4 Anchor

5 Seat backrest

6 Upper retaining strap

Attaching the upper retaining strap to

the anchor

1. Raise the head restraint, if needed.

2. On the rear seat: Guide the upper retain-

ing strap between or along both sides of

the supports of the head restraint to the

anchor.

3. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to

the anchor on the rear seat.

4. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it

down.

Seite 96

CONTROLS Transporting children safely

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

ON 5-door models: Locking

the doors and windows

Doors

Push the locking lever on the rear doors up.

The door can now be opened from the out-

side only.

Safety switch for the rear

Press the button on the driver's

door if children are being trans-

ported in the rear.

This locks various functions so that they

cannot be operated from the rear: safety

switch, refer to page 79.

Seite 97

Transporting children safely CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Driving

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with

the series. It also describes features and

functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-

tions or country versions. This also applies

to safety-related functions and systems.

When using these functions and systems,

the applicable laws and regulations must be

observed.

Start/Stop button

Concept

Pressing the Start/Stop button

switches the ignition on or off

and starts the engine.

Steptronic transmission: the

engine starts in selector lever

position P or N with the brake pedal pressed

when you press the Start/Stop button.

Manual transmission: the engine starts with

the clutch pedal pressed when the Start/

Stop button is pressed.

Ignition on

Manual transmission: press the Start/Stop

button without stepping on the clutch

pedal.

Steptronic transmission: press the Start/

Stop button, but do not press on the brake

pedal at the same time.

All vehicle systems are ready for operation.

Most of the indicator/warning lights in the

instrument cluster light up for a varied

length of time.

To save battery power when the engine is

off, switch off the ignition and any unneces-

sary electrical consumers.

Ignition off

Manual transmission: press the Start/Stop

button again without stepping on the clutch

pedal.

Steptronic transmission: shift to selector

lever position P, press the Start/Stop button

again without stepping on the brake.

All indicator lights in the instrument cluster

go out.

To save battery power when the engine is

off, switch off the ignition and any unneces-

sary electrical consumers.

Safety measures

The ignition is switched off automatically in

the following situations while the vehicle is

stationary and the engine is off:

– When locking the vehicle, even if the

low beams are switched on.

– Shortly before the battery is discharged

completely, so that the engine can still

be started. This function is only availa-

ble when the low beams are switched

off.

– When opening or closing the driver

door, if the driver's safety belt is un-

buckled and the low beams are switched

off.

– While the driver's safety belt is unbuck-

led with driver's door open and low

beams off.

– When the front doors are opened if

there is no other person sitting in the

front seats.

Seite 98

CONTROLS Driving

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

– The low beams switch to parking lights

after some minutes of no use.

Steptronic transmission: when switching off

the ignition, the selector lever position P is

engaged automatically if the selector lever

position R, D or M/S is engaged.

Radio-ready state

General information

In the radio-ready state, certain electrical

consumers remain ready for operation.

Activating

With the engine running, press the Start/

Stop button.

If the engine is not running and the ignition

is switched on: the system automatically ac-

tivates radio-ready state when the door is

opened if the lights are switched off or the

daytime running lights are switched on.

Radio-ready state remains active if, for in-

stance the ignition is automatically

switched off for the following reasons:

– Opening or closing the driver's door.

– Unfastening of the driver's safety belt.

– When automatically switching from low

beams to parking lights.

Switching off automatically

The radio-ready state is switched off auto-

matically in the following situations:

– If the driver's or front passenger door is

opened when exiting the vehicle, with

the engine switched off manually.

– If the ignition is switched off manually

with the Start/Stop button.

– After approx. 8 minutes.

– When the vehicle is locked using the

central locking system.

– Shortly before the battery is discharged

completely, so that the engine can still

be started.

Starting the engine

Safety information

DANGER

If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila-

tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases

can enter into the vehicle. The exhaust

gases contain pollutants which are color-

less and odorless. In enclosed areas, ex-

haust gases can also accumulate outside of

the vehicle. There is danger to life. Keep

the exhaust pipe free and ensure sufficient

ventilation.

Warning

An unsecured vehicle can begin to move

and possibly roll away. There is a risk of

accident. Before exiting, secure the vehi-

cle against rolling.

In order to ensure that the vehicle is se-

cured against rolling away, follow the fol-

lowing:

– Set the parking brake.

– On uphill grades or on a downhill

slope, turn the front wheels in the di-

rection of the curb.

– On uphill grades or on a downhill

slope, also secure the vehicle, for in-

stance with a wheel chock.

NOTICE

Repeated attempts to start the vehicle or

repeated starting of the vehicle in rapid

succession can cause the starter to over-

heat. This also results in unburned or inad-

Seite 99

Driving CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

equately burned fuel, and can cause the

catalytic converter to overheat. There is a

risk of damage to property, among other

potential damage. Avoid repeated starting

of the vehicle, particularly repeated start-

ing in rapid succession.

Gasoline engine

Depending on the motorization, the full

drive power may not be available for ap-

proximately 30 seconds after starting the

engine. In this case, the vehicle will not ac-

celerate as usual.

Steptronic transmission

Starting the engine

1. Depress the brake pedal.

2. Engage selector lever position P or N.

3. Press the Start/Stop button.

The ignition is activated automatically for a

brief time and is stopped as soon as the en-

gine starts.

Manual transmission

Starting the engine

1. Depress the brake pedal.

2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift to

neutral.

3. Press the Start/Stop button.

The ignition is activated automatically for a

brief time and is stopped as soon as the en-

gine starts.

Engine stop

Safety information

Warning

Unattended children or animals in the ve-

hicle can cause the vehicle to move and

endanger themselves and traffic, for in-

stance due to the following actions:

– Pressing the Start/Stop button.

– Releasing the parking brake.

– Opening and closing the doors or

windows.

– Engaging selector lever position N.

– Using vehicle equipment.

There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do

not leave children or animals unattended

in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key with

you when exiting and lock the vehicle.

Warning

An unsecured vehicle can begin to move

and possibly roll away. There is a risk of

accident. Before exiting, secure the vehi-

cle against rolling.

In order to ensure that the vehicle is se-

cured against rolling away, follow the fol-

lowing:

– Set the parking brake.

– On uphill grades or on a downhill

slope, turn the front wheels in the di-

rection of the curb.

– On uphill grades or on a downhill

slope, also secure the vehicle, for in-

stance with a wheel chock.

Seite 100

CONTROLS Driving

100

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Steptronic transmission

Switching off the engine

1. When the vehicle is stationary, apply

the parking brake.

2. Engage selector lever position P.

3. Press the Start/Stop button.

The engine is switched off.

The radio-ready state is switched on.

Manual transmission

Switching off the engine

1. With the vehicle at a standstill, press

the Start/Stop button.

The engine is switched off.

The radio-ready state is switched on.

2. Shift into first gear or reverse.

3. Set the parking brake.

Auto Start/Stop function

Concept

The Auto Start/Stop function helps save

fuel. The system switches off the engine

during a stop, for instance in traffic jam or

at traffic lights. The ignition remains

switched on. The engine starts automati-

cally for driving off.

After each engine start using the Start/Stop

button, the Auto Start/Stop function is

ready and is activated at speeds faster than

about 3 mph/5 km/h.

Depending on the selected drive mode, refer

to page 177, the system is automatically ac-

tivated or deactivated.

Engine stop

Functional requirements

The engine is switched off automatically

during a stop under the following condi-

tions:

Manual transmission:

– Neutral is engaged and the clutch pedal

is not pressed.

– The driver's safety belt is buckled or the

driver's door is closed.

Steptronic transmission:

– The selector lever is in selector lever po-

sition D.

– The brake pedal remains depressed

while the vehicle is stopped.

– The driver's safety belt is buckled or the

driver's door is closed.

In order to be able to release the brake

pedal, engage the selector lever in position

P. The engine remains off.

To continue driving depress the brake

pedal. When a gear is engaged, the engine

starts automatically.

The air flow from the air conditioner is re-

duced when the engine is switched off.

Steptronic transmission: manual

engine stop

Depending on the vehicle equipment and

country version, the engine can be switched

off manually, if the engine was not switched

off automatically when the vehicle stopped:

– Press the brake pedal forcefully again

from the current pedal position.

– Engage selector lever position P.

If all functional preconditions are fulfilled,

the engine switches off.

Seite 101

Driving CONTROLS

101

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Displays in the instrument cluster

Instrument cluster without enhanced

features: display

The display indicates that the

Auto Start/Stop function is

ready for an Automatic engine

start.

The display indicates that the

conditions for an automatic

engine stop have not been

met.

Instrument cluster with enhanced

features: display

The display indicates that the

Auto Start/Stop function is

ready for an Automatic engine

start.

The display indicates that the

conditions for an automatic

engine stop have not been

met.

Functional limitations

The engine is not switched off automatically

in the following situations:

– Outside temperature too low.

– The outside temperature is high and au-

tomatic climate control is running.

– The car's interior has not yet been

heated or cooled to the required level.

– The engine is not yet at operating tem-

perature.

– The wheels are at a sharp angle or the

steering wheel is being turned.

– After driving in reverse.

– Fogging of the windows when the auto-

matic climate control is switched on.

– The vehicle battery charge is very low.

– At higher elevations.

– The hood is unlocked.

– The parking assistant is activated.

– Stop-and-go traffic.

– Selector lever in selector lever position

R, N or M/S.

Starting the engine

The engine starts automatically under the

following conditions:

– Manual transmission: clutch pedal is

pressed.

– Steptronic transmission: by releasing

the brake pedal.

After the engine starts, accelerate as usual.

Safety mode

After the engine switches off automatically,

it will not start again automatically if any

one of the following conditions are met:

– The driver's safety belt is unbuckled and

the driver's door is open.

– The hood was unlocked.

Some indicator lights light up for a varied

length of time.

The engine can only be started via the

Start/Stop button.

Functional limitations

Even if driving off was not intended, the de-

activated engine starts up automatically in

the following situations:

– Excessive warming of the car's interior

when air conditioning is switched on.

– When the steering wheel is turned.

– Steptronic transmission: change from

selector lever position D to R, N or M/S.

Seite 102

CONTROLS Driving

102

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

– Steptronic transmission: change from

selector lever position P to R, N, D or

M/S.

– The vehicle begins rolling.

– Fogging of the windows when the auto-

matic climate control is switched on.

– The vehicle battery charge is very low.

– Excessive cooling of the car's interior

when the heating is switched on.

– Manual transmission: low brake vacuum

pressure; this can occur, for instance if

the brake pedal is depressed a number

of times in succession.

Additional Auto Start/Stop

function

Depending on the vehicle equipment and

country-specific version, the vehicle fea-

tures a variety of sensors for assessing the

traffic situation. The Auto Start/Stop func-

tion uses this information to adapt to vari-

ous traffic situations in a proactive manner.

For instance, this applies to the following

situations:

– When a situation is detected in which

the stopping time is expected to be very

short, the engine is not switched off au-

tomatically. A message appears on the

Control Display, depending on the situa-

tion.

– When a situation is detected in which

the vehicle needs to drive off immedi-

ately, the engine is started automati-

cally.

The function may be restricted if the navi-

gation data is invalid, outdated or not avail-

able, for example.

Switching the system on/off

Using the button

Press the button.

– LED comes on: auto Start/Stop function

is deactivated.

The engine is started during an auto-

matic engine stop.

The engine can only be stopped or

started via the Start/Stop button.

– LED goes out: auto Start/Stop function

is activated.

Switching off the vehicle during an

automatic engine stop

During an automatic engine stop, the vehi-

cle can be switched off permanently, for in-

stance when leaving it.

Steptronic transmission:

1. Engage selector lever position P.

2. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition

is switched off. The Auto Start/Stop

function is deactivated.

3. Set the parking brake.

Manual transmission:

1. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition

is switched off. The Auto Start/Stop

function is deactivated.

2. Shift into first gear or reverse.

3. Set the parking brake.

Seite 103

Driving CONTROLS

103

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Engine start as usual via Start/Stop button.

Automatic deactivation

In certain situations, the Auto Start/Stop

function is deactivated automatically for

safety reasons, for instance if no driver is

detected.

Malfunction

The Auto Start/Stop function no longer

switches off the engine automatically. A

Check Control message is displayed. It is

possible to continue driving. Have the sys-

tem checked by a dealer's service center or

another qualified service center or repair

shop.

Parking brake, manual

Safety information

Warning

An unsecured vehicle can begin to move

and possibly roll away. There is a risk of

accident. Before exiting, secure the vehi-

cle against rolling.

In order to ensure that the vehicle is se-

cured against rolling away, follow the fol-

lowing:

– Set the parking brake.

– On uphill grades or on a downhill

slope, turn the front wheels in the di-

rection of the curb.

– On uphill grades or on a downhill

slope, also secure the vehicle, for in-

stance with a wheel chock.

Applying

The lever automatically engages after being

pulled up.

The indicator light lights up red. The

parking brake is set.

Lower light: indicator light in Cana-

dian models

If for once use during driving is required,

engage the parking brake slightly and hold

the button down.

To prevent corrosion and one-sided brake

action, lightly apply the parking brake peri-

odically while coasting, if traffic conditions

permit.

The brake lights will not light up if the park-

ing brake is set.

Releasing

Raise lever slightly, press the button and

guide the lever down.

Parking brake, electric

Concept

The parking brake is used to prevent the ve-

hicle from rolling when it is parked.

Safety information

Warning

An unsecured vehicle can begin to move

and possibly roll away. There is a risk of

accident. Before exiting, secure the vehi-

cle against rolling.

Seite 104

CONTROLS Driving

104

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

In order to ensure that the vehicle is se-

cured against rolling away, follow the fol-

lowing:

– Set the parking brake.

– On uphill grades or on a downhill

slope, turn the front wheels in the di-

rection of the curb.

– On uphill grades or on a downhill

slope, also secure the vehicle, for in-

stance with a wheel chock.

Warning

Unattended children or animals in the ve-

hicle can cause the vehicle to move and

endanger themselves and traffic, for in-

stance due to the following actions:

– Pressing the Start/Stop button.

– Releasing the parking brake.

– Opening and closing the doors or

windows.

– Engaging selector lever position N.

– Using vehicle equipment.

There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do

not leave children or animals unattended

in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key with

you when exiting and lock the vehicle.

Overview

Parking brake

Setting

With a stationary vehicle

Pull the switch.

The LED lights up.

The indicator light lights up red. The

parking brake is set.

Depending on the stopping situation, the

parking brake is engaged automatically.

Steptronic transmission: in some parking

situations, the parking brake is automati-

cally engaged, when selector lever posi-

tion P is engaged. In these cases, the park-

ing brake is released automatically when

you leave the selector lever position P.

While driving

To use as emergency brake while driving:

Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle

brakes hard while the switch is being

pulled.

The indicator light lights up red, a

signal sounds and the brake lights

light up.

A Check Control message is displayed.

If the vehicle is decelerated to a complete

stop, the parking brake is engaged.

Releasing

Releasing manually

1. Switch on the ignition.

2. Manual transmission: press the

switch while the brake pedal is pressed.

Steptronic transmission: press the

switch while the brake is pressed or se-

lector lever position P is set.

The LED and indicator light go out.

Seite 105

Driving CONTROLS

105

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

The parking brake is released.

Automatic release in cars with

Steptronic transmission

For automatic release, step on the accelera-

tor pedal.

The LED and indicator light go out.

The parking brake is automatically released

when you step on the accelerator under the

following conditions:

– Engine on.

– Gear position engaged.

– Driver buckled in and doors closed.

Automatic release in cars with manual

transmission

Drive off as usual. The parking brake disen-

gages when the clutch pedal is released.

The LED and indicator light go out.

Under the following conditions, the parking

brake is automatically released:

– Engine on.

– Gear engaged.

– Driver buckled in and doors closed.

– Engine power is sufficient to drive off.

Malfunction

If the parking brake fails or malfunctions,

secure the vehicle against rolling before ex-

iting.

A Check Control message is displayed.

Secure the vehicle against rolling away, for

instance with a wheel chock, after exiting

the vehicle.

After a power failure

Re-activating the parking brake

1. Switch on the ignition.

2. Press the switch while stepping on

the brake pedal or selector lever posi-

tion P is set.

It may take several seconds for the brake to

be reactivated. Some mechanical sounds as-

sociated with this process are normal.

The indicator light in the instrument

cluster goes out as soon as the park-

ing brake is ready for operation.

Turn signal, high beams, head-

light flasher

Turn signal

Using turn signals

Press the lever past the resistance point.

Canada: the lever returns into its starting

position after actuation. To switch off man-

ually, slightly tap the lever to the resistance

point.

Triple turn signal activation

Lightly tap the lever up or down.

The triple turn signal duration can be ad-

justed.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

Seite 106

CONTROLS Driving

106

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

3. "Lighting"

4. "Exterior lighting"

5. "One-touch turn signal"

6. Select the desired setting.

Settings are stored for the profile currently

used.

Signaling briefly

Press the lever to the resistance point and

hold it there for as long as you want the

turn signal to flash.

Malfunction

Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator

light indicates that a turn signal bulb has

failed.

High beams, headlight flasher

Press the lever forward or pull it backward.

– High beams on, arrow 1.

The high beams light up when the low

beams are switched on.

– High beams off/headlight flasher, ar-

row 2.

Wiper system

General information

Do not use the wipers if the windshield is

dry, as this may damage the wiper blades or

cause them to become worn more quickly.

Safety information

Warning

If the wipers start moving in the folded

away state, body parts can be jammed or

damage may occur to parts of the vehicle.

There is a risk of injury or risk of damage

to property. Make sure that the vehicle is

switched off when the wipers are in the

folded away state and the wipers are

folded in when switching on.

NOTICE

If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,

the wiper blades can be torn off and the

wiper motor can overheat when switching

on. There is a risk of damage to property,

among other potential damage. Defrost the

windshield prior to switching the wipers

on.

Switching on

Press the lever up until the desired position

is reached.

– Resting position of the wipers, posi-

tion 0.

– Intermittent operation or rain sensor,

position 1.

– Normal wiper speed, position 2.

– Fast wiper speed, position 3.

Seite 107

Driving CONTROLS

107

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

When travel is interrupted with the wiper

system switched on: when travel continues,

the wipers resume at their previous speed.

Switching off and brief wipe

Press the lever down.

– Switching off: press the lever down until

it reaches its standard position.

– Brief wipe: press the lever down from

the standard position.

The lever automatically returns to its in-

itial position when released.

Interval mode or rain sensor

Concept

The rain sensor automatically controls the

time between wipes depending on the in-

tensity of the rainfall.

General information

The sensor is located on the windshield, di-

rectly in front of the interior mirror. With-

out the rain sensor, the frequency of the

wiper operation is preset.

Safety information

NOTICE

If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers

can accidentally start moving in vehicle

washes. There is a risk of damage to prop-

erty, among other potential damage. Deac-

tivate the rain sensor in vehicle washes.

Activating

Press the lever up once from its standard

position, arrow 1.

Wiping is started.

The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.

In frosty conditions, wiper operation may

not start.

Deactivating

Press the lever back into the standard posi-

tion.

Seite 108

CONTROLS Driving

108

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Setting the frequency or sensitivity of

the rain sensor

Turn the thumbwheel.

With deactivated rain sensor: set the inter-

val.

With activated rain sensor: set the rain sen-

sor sensitivity.

Up: short interval or high sensitivity of the

rain sensor.

Down: long interval or low sensitivity of the

rain sensor.

Windshield washer system

Safety information

Warning

The washer fluid can freeze onto the win-

dow at low temperatures and obstruct the

view. There is a risk of accident. Only use

the washer systems, if the washer fluid

cannot freeze. Use washer fluid with anti-

freeze, if needed.

NOTICE

When the washer fluid reservoir is empty,

the wash pump cannot work as intended.

There is a risk of damage to property,

among other potential damage. Do not use

the washer system when the washer fluid

reservoir is empty.

Cleaning the windshield

Pull the lever.

The system sprays washer fluid on the

windshield and activates the wipers briefly.

Windshield washer nozzles

The washer jets are automatically heated

whenever the ignition is switched on.

Rear window wiper

Overview

Switching on

Turn the outer switch upward.

– Resting position of the wiper, posi-

tion 0.

– Intermittent mode, arrow 1. When re-

verse gear is engaged, the system

switches to continuous operation.

Clean the rear window

Turn the outer switch in the desired direc-

tion.

Seite 109

Driving CONTROLS

109

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

– In resting position: turn the switch

downward, arrow 3. The switch auto-

matically returns to its idle position

when released.

– In intermittent mode: turn the switch

further, arrow 2. The switch automati-

cally returns to its interval position

when released.

The function is deactivated if the washer

fluid reservoir level is low.

Fold-away position of the wipers

Concept

The fold-away position enables the wipers

to be folded away from the windshield.

General information

Helpful when changing the wiper blades or

under frosty conditions, for instance.

Safety information

Warning

If the wipers start moving in the folded

away state, body parts can be jammed or

damage may occur to parts of the vehicle.

There is a risk of injury or risk of damage

to property. Make sure that the vehicle is

switched off when the wipers are in the

folded away state and the wipers are

folded in when switching on.

NOTICE

If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,

the wiper blades can be torn off and the

wiper motor can overheat when switching

on. There is a risk of damage to property,

among other potential damage. Defrost the

windshield prior to switching the wipers

on.

Folding away the wipers

1. Switch the ignition on and off again.

2. Press and hold the wiper lever down, un-

til the wipers stop in a close to vertical

position.

3. Fold the wipers all the way away from

the windshield.

Folding down the wipers

After the wipers are folded back down, the

wiper system must be reactivated.

1. Fold the wipers back down onto the

windshield.

2. Switch on the ignition.

3. Push wiper lever down. Wipers return

to their resting position and are ready

again for operation.

Seite 110

CONTROLS Driving

110

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Canada: wiper system

General information

Do not use the wipers if the windshield is

dry, as this may damage the wiper blades or

cause them to become worn more quickly.

Safety information

Warning

If the wipers start moving in the folded

away state, body parts can be jammed or

damage may occur to parts of the vehicle.

There is a risk of injury or risk of damage

to property. Make sure that the vehicle is

switched off when the wipers are in the

folded away state and the wipers are

folded in when switching on.

NOTICE

If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,

the wiper blades can be torn off and the

wiper motor can overheat when switching

on. There is a risk of damage to property,

among other potential damage. Defrost the

windshield prior to switching the wipers

on.

Switching on

Tap up the lever or press it past the resist-

ance point.

– Normal wiper speed: tap up once.

– Fast wiper speed: tap up twice or tap

once beyond the resistance point.

The lever automatically returns to its initial

position when released.

Switching off and brief wipe

Press the lever down.

– To switch off from fast wiper speed:

press down twice.

– To switch off from normal wiper speed:

press down once.

– Brief wipe: press down once.

The lever automatically returns to its initial

position when released.

Interval mode or rain sensor

Concept

The rain sensor automatically controls the

time between wipes depending on the in-

tensity of the rainfall.

General information

The sensor is located on the windshield, di-

rectly in front of the interior mirror. With-

out the rain sensor, the frequency of the

wiper operation is preset.

Seite 111

Driving CONTROLS

111

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Safety information

NOTICE

If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers

can accidentally start moving in vehicle

washes. There is a risk of damage to prop-

erty, among other potential damage. Deac-

tivate the rain sensor in vehicle washes.

Activating/deactivating

Press the button on the wiper lever.

Wiping is started.

If the vehicle is equipped with a rain sensor:

the LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.

In frosty conditions, wiper operation may

not start.

If a journey is interrupted with the rain sen-

sor switched on: if the trip is resumed

within approx. 15 minutes, the rain sensor

is automatically activated again.

Setting the frequency or sensitivity of

the rain sensor

Turn the thumbwheel.

With deactivated rain sensor: set the inter-

val.

With activated rain sensor: set the rain sen-

sor sensitivity.

Up: short interval or high sensitivity of the

rain sensor.

Down: long interval or low sensitivity of the

rain sensor.

Windshield washer system

Safety information

Warning

The washer fluid can freeze onto the win-

dow at low temperatures and obstruct the

view. There is a risk of accident. Only use

the washer systems, if the washer fluid

cannot freeze. Use washer fluid with anti-

freeze, if needed.

NOTICE

When the washer fluid reservoir is empty,

the wash pump cannot work as intended.

There is a risk of damage to property,

among other potential damage. Do not use

the washer system when the washer fluid

reservoir is empty.

Seite 112

CONTROLS Driving

112

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Cleaning the windshield

Pull the lever.

The system sprays washer fluid on the

windshield and activates the wipers briefly.

Windshield washer nozzles

The washer jets are automatically heated

whenever the ignition is switched on.

Rear window wiper

Overview

Switching on

Turn the outer switch upward.

– Resting position of the wiper, posi-

tion 0.

– Intermittent mode, arrow 1. When re-

verse gear is engaged, the system

switches to continuous operation.

Clean the rear window

Turn the outer switch in the desired direc-

tion.

– In resting position: turn the switch

downward, arrow 3. The switch auto-

matically returns to its idle position

when released.

– In intermittent mode: turn the switch

further, arrow 2. The switch automati-

cally returns to its interval position

when released.

The function is deactivated if the washer

fluid reservoir level is low.

Fold-away position of the wipers

Concept

The fold-away position enables the wipers

to be folded away from the windshield.

General information

Helpful when changing the wiper blades or

under frosty conditions, for instance.

Safety information

Warning

If the wipers start moving in the folded

away state, body parts can be jammed or

damage may occur to parts of the vehicle.

There is a risk of injury or risk of damage

to property. Make sure that the vehicle is

switched off when the wipers are in the

folded away state and the wipers are

folded in when switching on.

NOTICE

If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,

the wiper blades can be torn off and the

wiper motor can overheat when switching

on. There is a risk of damage to property,

among other potential damage. Defrost the

windshield prior to switching the wipers

on.

Seite 113

Driving CONTROLS

113

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Folding away the wipers

1. Switch the ignition on and off again.

2. Press the wiper lever up past the point

of resistance and hold it for approx.

3 seconds, until the wipers remain in a

nearly vertical position.

3. Fold the wipers all the way away from

the windshield.

Folding down the wipers

After the wipers are folded back down, the

wiper system must be reactivated.

1. Fold the wipers back down onto the

windshield.

2. Switch on the ignition.

3. Push wiper lever down. Wipers return

to their resting position and are ready

again for operation.

Washer fluid

General information

All washer nozzles are supplied from one

reservoir.

Use a mixture of tap water and windshield

washer concentrate. If desired, a windshield

washer concentrate containing antifreeze

can be used.

Recommended minimum fill quantity:

0.2 US gal/1 liter.

Safety information

Warning

Some antifreeze agents can contain harm-

ful substances and are flammable. There is

a risk of fire and a risk of injury. Follow

the instructions on the containers. Keep

antifreeze away from ignition sources. Do

not refill operating materials into different

bottles. Store operating materials out of

reach of children.

United States: the washer fluid mixture ra-

tio is regulated by the U.S. EPA and many

individual states; do not exceed the allow-

able washer fluid dilution ratio limits that

apply. Follow the usage instructions on the

washer fluid container.

Use of BMW’s Windshield Washer Con-

centrate or the equivalent is recom-

mended.

Warning

Washer fluid can ignite and catch fire on

contact with hot engine parts. There is a

risk of injury or risk of damage to prop-

erty. Only add washer fluid when the en-

gine is cooled down. Next, fully close the

lid of the washer fluid reservoir.

Seite 114

CONTROLS Driving

114

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

NOTICE

Silicon-containing additives in the washer

fluid for the water-repelling effect on the

windows can lead to damage to the wash-

ing system. There is a risk of damage to

property, among other potential damage.

Do not add silicon-containing additives to

the washer fluid.

NOTICE

Mixing different windshield washer con-

centrates or antifreeze can damage the

washing system. There is a risk of damage

to property, among other potential dam-

age. Do not mix different windshield

washer concentrates or antifreeze. Follow

the information and mixing ratios pro-

vided on the containers.

Overview

The washer fluid reservoir is located in the

engine compartment.

Malfunction

The use of undiluted windshield washer

concentrate or alcohol-based antifreeze can

lead to incorrect readings at temperatures

below +5 ℉/-15 ℃.

Manual transmission

Safety information

Warning

An unsecured vehicle can begin to move

and possibly roll away. There is a risk of

accident. Before exiting, secure the vehi-

cle against rolling.

In order to ensure that the vehicle is se-

cured against rolling away, follow the fol-

lowing:

– Set the parking brake.

– On uphill grades or on a downhill

slope, turn the front wheels in the di-

rection of the curb.

– On uphill grades or on a downhill

slope, also secure the vehicle, for in-

stance with a wheel chock.

NOTICE

When shifting to a lower gear, excessive

speeds can damage the engine. There is a

risk of damage to property, among other

potential damage. When shifting into 5th

or 6th gear, press the gearshift lever to the

right.

Schematic diagram

– 1–6: forward gears.

Seite 115

Driving CONTROLS

115

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

– R: reverse gear.

Shifting

General information

Depending on the motorization, the engine

speed during a shifting operation is ad-

justed automatically as required for harmo-

nious gear shifting.

Reverse gear

Select only when the vehicle is stationary.

To overcome the resistance push the gear-

shift lever dynamically to the left and en-

gage reverse gear with a forward shifting

movement.

Rolling or pushing the vehicle

In some situations, the vehicle is to roll

without its own power, for instance in a car

wash, or be pushed.

1. Switch on the ignition.

2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift out

of a forward gear or reverse.

3. Release the parking brake.

Steptronic transmission

Concept

The Steptronic transmission combines the

functions of an automatic transmission with

the possibility of manual shifting, if needed.

Safety information

Warning

An unsecured vehicle can begin to move

and possibly roll away. There is a risk of

accident. Before exiting, secure the vehi-

cle against rolling.

In order to ensure that the vehicle is se-

cured against rolling away, follow the fol-

lowing:

– Set the parking brake.

– On uphill grades or on a downhill

slope, turn the front wheels in the di-

rection of the curb.

– On uphill grades or on a downhill

slope, also secure the vehicle, for in-

stance with a wheel chock.

Selector lever version

Selector lever

The selector lever positions R, N, and D are

selected by tapping the selector lever for-

ward or back. The selector lever automati-

cally returns to the center position when re-

leased.

The selector lever position P is engaged by

pressing the P button on the selector lever

or, in certain situations, automatically, refer

to page 117.

Selector lever positions

Drive mode D

Selector lever position for normal vehicle

operation. All gears for forward travel are

activated automatically.

Seite 116

CONTROLS Driving

116

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

R is reverse

Engage selector lever position R only when

the vehicle is stationary.

Neutral N

The vehicle may be pushed or roll without

engine power in selector lever position N,

for instance in vehicle washes, refer to

page 118.

Parking position P

General information

Selector lever position, for instance for

parking the vehicle.

The transmission blocks the drive wheels in

selector lever position P.

Engage selector lever position P only when

the vehicle is stationary.

Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that

selector lever position P is set. Otherwise,

the vehicle may begin to move.

Automatic parking position

Selector lever position P is engaged auto-

matically in situations such as the follow-

ing:

– After the engine is switched off when

the vehicle is in the radio-ready state,

refer to page 99, or when the ignition is

switched off, refer to page 98, while se-

lector lever position R, D or M/S is en-

gaged.

– If the driver's safety belt is unbuckled,

the driver's door is opened, and the

brake pedal is not pressed while the ve-

hicle is stationary and selector lever po-

sition D, M/S or R is engaged.

– After the ignition has been switched off

while selector lever position N is en-

gaged.

Engaging selector lever positions

General information

To prevent the vehicle from creeping after

you select a gear position, maintain pres-

sure on the brake pedal until you are ready

to start.

Functional requirements

Only when the brake pedal is depressed is it

possible to change from selector lever posi-

tion P to another selector lever position.

Depending on the transmission version, the

engine may have to be running too.

The selection lever position P cannot be

changed until all technical requirements are

met.

Engaging selector lever position D, N,

A selector lever lock prevents the following

faulty operation:

– Unintentional shifting into selector

lever position R.

– Unintentional shifting from selector

lever position P into another selector

lever position.

1. Press and hold the button to release the

selector lever lock.

2. With the driver's safety belt fastened,

briefly push the selector lever in the de-

sired direction, past a resistance point,

if needed. The selector lever automati-

Seite 117

Driving CONTROLS

117

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

cally returns to the center position when

released.

Engaging selector lever position P

Press button P.

Rolling or pushing the vehicle

General information

In some situations, the vehicle is to roll

without its own power for a short distance,

for instance in a car wash, or be pushed.

Engaging selector lever position N

NOTICE

Selector lever position P is automatically

engaged when the ignition is switched off.

There is a risk of damage to property,

among other potential damage. Do not

switch ignition off in car washes.

1. Start the engine while pressing on the

brake pedal.

2. If necessary, release the parking brake.

3. Depress the brake pedal.

4. Touch the selector lever lock and en-

gage selector lever position N.

5. Switch the engine off.

In this way, the ignition remains

switched on, and a Check Control mes-

sage is displayed.

The vehicle can roll.

Irrespective of the ignition, the selector

lever position P is automatically engaged af-

ter approx. 15 minutes.

If there is a malfunction, you may not be

able to change the selector lever position.

Electronically unlock the transmission lock,

if needed, refer to page 120.

Kickdown

Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driv-

ing performance. Step on the accelerator

pedal beyond the resistance point at the full

throttle position.

Sport program M/S

Concept

The shifting points and shifting times in the

Sport program are designed for a sportier

driving style. The transmission, for instance

shifts up later and the shifting times are

shorter.

Seite 118

CONTROLS Driving

118

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Activating the Sport program

Press the selector lever to the left from se-

lector lever position D.

The engaged gear is displayed in the instru-

ment cluster, for instance S1.

The sport program of the transmission is ac-

tivated.

Ending the Sport program

Press the selector lever to the right.

D is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Manual mode M/S

Concept

Manual gear-shifting is possible in manual

mode.

Activating manual mode

1. Press the selector lever to the left from

selector lever position D, arrow 1.

2. Press the selector lever forward or pull

it backward, arrows 2.

Manual mode M/S becomes active and the

gear is changed.

The engaged gear is displayed in the instru-

ment cluster, for instance M1.

Shifting

– To shift down: press the selector lever

forward.

– To shift up: pull the selector lever rear-

wards.

The Steptronic transmission continues

shifting automatically in certain situations,

for instance when certain engine speed lim-

its are reached.

When M2 is set manually while the vehicle

is stationary, the transmission will no lon-

ger shift back to M1. This shifting behavior

is retained until you engage M1 manually or

exit M.

Avoiding automatic upshifting

Once a particular engine speed is attained,

M/S manual mode is automatically up-

shifted as needed.

John Cooper Works: once particular engine

speeds are attained, upshifting is not auto-

matically performed in M/S manual mode.

For vehicles with Steptronic Sport transmis-

sion, automatic shift operations are not per-

formed if one of the following conditions is

met:

– DSC is deactivated.

– TRACTION is activated.

In addition, there is no downshifting for

kickdown.

With the appropriate transmission version,

the lowest possible gear can be selected by

simultaneously activating kickdown and op-

erating the left shift paddles. This is not

possible by switching briefly via the shift

paddles from selector lever position D to

manual mode M/S.

Seite 119

Driving CONTROLS

119

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Ending the manual mode

Press the selector lever to the right.

D is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Shift paddles for Steptronic Sport

transmission

Concept

The shift paddles on the steering wheel al-

low you to shift gears quickly while keeping

both hands on the steering wheel.

General information

Shifting

Gears will only be shifted at appropriate en-

gine and road speeds, for instance down-

shifting is not possible if the engine speed

is too high.

Short-term manual mode

In selector lever position D, actuating a

shift paddle switches into manual mode

temporarily.

After conservative driving in manual mode

without acceleration or shifting via the shift

paddles for a certain amount of time, the

transmission switches back to automatic

mode.

It is possible to switch into automatic mode

as follows:

– Keep the right shift paddle pulled until

D is displayed in the instrument cluster.

– In addition to the pulled right shift pad-

dle, pull the left shift paddle.

Continuous manual mode

In selector lever position S, actuating a shift

paddle switches into manual mode perma-

nently.

Shifting

– Shifting up: pull the right shift paddle.

– Shifting down: pull left shift paddle.

– Downshifting to the lowest possible

gear: keep the left shift paddle pulled.

The selected gear is briefly displayed in the

instrument cluster, followed by the current

gear.

Displays in the instrument cluster

The selector lever position is

displayed, for example P.

Releasing the transmission lock

electronically

General information

Electronically unlock the transmission lock

to maneuver vehicle from a danger area.

Before unlocking the transmission lock, set

the parking brake to prevent the vehicle

from rolling away.

Engaging selector lever position N

Unlocking is possible, if the starter can spin

the engine.

1. Press and hold down brake pedal.

2. Press the Start/Stop button. The starter

must audibly start.

Seite 120

CONTROLS Driving

120

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

3. Press the button on the selector lever,

arrow 1, and press and hold the selector

lever into selector lever position N, ar-

row N, until selector lever position N is

displayed in the instrument cluster.

A Check Control message is displayed.

4. Release the selector lever.

5. Release brake, as soon as the starter

stops.

6. Maneuver the vehicle from the danger

area and secure it against moving on its

own.

For additional information, see the chapter

on tow-starting and towing.

Steptronic Sport transmission:

Launch Control

Concept

Launch Control enables optimum accelera-

tion on surfaces with good traction under

dry surrounding conditions.

General information

The use of Launch Control causes prema-

ture component wear since this function

represents a very heavy load for the vehicle.

Do not use Launch Control during the

break-in, refer to page 230, period.

Do not turn the steering wheel when driv-

ing away with Launch Control.

Functional requirements

Launch Control is available as soon as the

engine and transmission are at operating

temperature.

Depending on the outside temperature and

driving style, the engine and transmission

require an interrupted trip of up to

30 miles/50 km in order to reach the oper-

ating temperature needed for Launch Con-

trol.

Start with launch control

While the engine is running:

1. Press button and select SPORT

with the MINI Driving Modes switch.

The instrument cluster displays TRAC-

TION in combination with SPORT. The

DSC OFF indicator light lights up.

2. Engage selector lever position S.

3. With the left foot, forcefully press down

on the brake.

4. Press and hold down the accelerator

pedal beyond the resistance point at the

full throttle position, kickdown.

A destination flag is displayed in the in-

strument cluster.

5. The starting engine speed adjusts. Wait

briefly until the engine speed is con-

stant. Keep accelerator pedal in this po-

sition.

6. Release the brake within 3 seconds after

the destination flag illuminates.

The vehicle accelerates.

Upshifting occurs automatically as long

as the destination flag is displayed and

the accelerator pedal is not released.

Repeated use during a trip

After Launch Control has been used, the

transmission must cool down for approx.

Seite 121

Driving CONTROLS

121

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

5 minutes before Launch Control can be

used again.

After using Launch Control

To increase driving stability, activate DSC

Dynamic Stability Control again.

System limits

An experienced driver may be able to ach-

ieve better acceleration values in DSC OFF

mode.

Seite 122

CONTROLS Driving

122

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Displays

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with

the series. It also describes features and

functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-

tions or country versions. This also applies

to safety-related functions and systems.

When using these functions and systems,

the applicable laws and regulations must be

observed.

Instrument cluster

Instrument cluster without enhanced features: overview

1 Tachometer 131

2 Indicator/warning lights

3 Speedometer

4 Fuel gauge 130

5 Display/reset miles 131

6 Electronic displays 125

Seite 123

Displays CONTROLS

123

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Instrument cluster with enhanced features: overview

1 Tachometer 131

2 Display/reset miles 131

3 Electronic displays 126

4 Vehicle speed

5 Indicator/warning lights

6 Fuel gauge 130

Seite 124

CONTROLS Displays

124

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Instrument cluster without additional functions: electronic displays

1 Driver assistance systems

Messages, for instance Check Control

Time 132

Outside temperature 131

Selection lists 136

Total miles/trip odometer 131

Trip computer 136

2 Selector lever position 116

Gear shift indicator 134

3 MINI Driving Modes switch sta-

tus 177

Seite 125

Displays CONTROLS

125

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Instrument cluster with enhanced features: electronic displays

1 Selector lever position 116

Gear shift indicator 134

2 Time 132

MINI Driving Modes switch sta-

tus 177

3 Driver assistance systems

4 Outside temperature 131

Range 132

5 Messages, for instance Check Control

Selection lists 136

Navigation instructions

6 Total miles/trip odometer 131

Trip computer 136

Check Control

Concept

The Check Control system monitors func-

tions in the vehicle and notifies you of mal-

functions in the monitored systems.

General information

A Check Control message is displayed as a

combination of indicator or warning lights

and text messages in the instrument cluster

and in the Head-up Display.

In addition, an acoustic signal may be out-

put and a text message may appear on the

Control Display.

Indicator/warning lights

General information

The indicator/warning lights can light up in

a variety of combinations and colors.

Several of the lights are checked for proper

functioning and light up temporarily when

the engine is started or the ignition is

switched on.

Seite 126

CONTROLS Displays

126

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Red lights

Safety belt reminder

Indicator light flashes or is illumi-

nated: safety belt on the driver or

passenger side is not buckled. The

safety belt reminder can also be activated if

objects are placed on the front passenger

seat.

Make sure that the safety belts are posi-

tioned correctly.

Airbag system

Airbag system and belt tensioner

may not be working.

Have the vehicle checked immedi-

ately by a dealer's service center or another

qualified service center or repair shop.

Parking brake, manual

The parking brake is set.

For releasing the parking brake, re-

fer to page 104.

Parking brake, electric

The parking brake is set.

For releasing the parking brake, re-

fer to page 105.

Brake system

Braking system impaired. Continue

to drive moderately.

Have the vehicle checked immedi-

ately by a dealer's service center or

another qualified service center or

repair shop.

Forward Collision Warning

Indicator light illuminates: advance

warning is issued, for example when

there is the impending danger of a

collision or the distance to the vehicle

ahead is too small.

Increase the distance.

Indicator light flashes: acute warning of the

imminent danger of a collision when the ve-

hicle approaches another vehicle at a rela-

tively high differential speed.

Intervene by braking or make an evasive

maneuver.

Pedestrian Warning

If a collision with a detected person

is imminent, the icon lights up and a

signal sounds.

Instrument cluster without enhanced

features: orange lights

Active Cruise Control

The number bars shows the selected

distance from the vehicle driving

ahead.

Camera-based cruise control, refer to

page 179.

Vehicle detection, Active Cruise Control

Indicator light illuminates: a vehicle

has been detected ahead of you.

Indicator light flashes: the condi-

tions are not adequate for the system to

work.

The system was deactivated but applies the

brakes until the driver actively resumes

control of the vehicle by pressing on the

brake pedal or accelerator pedal.

Seite 127

Displays CONTROLS

127

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Yellow lights

Antilock Braking System ABS

The Brake Assistant function may

not activate. Avoid abrupt braking.

Take the longer braking distance

into account.

Have the system immediately

checked by a dealer's service center

or another qualified service center or repair

shop.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control

The indicator light flashes: DSC con-

trols the drive and braking forces.

The vehicle is stabilized. Reduce

speed and modify your driving style to the

driving circumstances.

The indicator light lights up: DSC has mal-

functioned.

Have the system checked by a dealer's serv-

ice center or another qualified service cen-

ter or repair shop.

DSC, refer to page 175.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control is

deactivated or DTC Dynamic Traction

Control is activated

DSC is deactivated or DTC is acti-

vated.

DSC, refer to page 175, and DTC, re-

fer to page 176.

Flat Tire Monitor FTM

The FTM signals a loss of tire infla-

tion pressure in a tire.

Reduce your speed and stop cau-

tiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering

maneuvers.

Flat Tire Monitor, refer to page 160.

Tire Pressure Monitor TPM

The indicator light illuminates: the

Tire Pressure Monitor reports a low

tire inflation pressure or a flat tire.

Follow the information in the Check Control

message.

The indicator light flashes and is then illu-

minated continuously: flat tires or tire pres-

sure losses cannot be detected.

– Interference caused by systems or devi-

ces with the same radio frequency: after

leaving the area of the interference, the

system automatically becomes active

again.

– TPM was unable to complete the reset.

Reset the system again.

– A wheel without TPM wheel electronics

is mounted: have it checked by a deal-

er’s service center or another qualified

service center or repair shop as needed.

– Malfunction: have the system checked

by a dealer’s service center or another

qualified service center or repair shop.

Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 155.

Steering system

Steering system may not be working.

Have the system checked by a deal-

er's service center or another quali-

fied service center or repair shop.

Emissions

– The warning light lights up:

Emissions are deteriorating.

Have the vehicle checked as soon

as possible.

– The warning light flashes under certain

circumstances:

This indicates that there is excessive

misfiring in the engine.

Seite 128

CONTROLS Displays

128

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Reduce the vehicle speed and have the

system checked immediately; otherwise,

serious engine misfiring within a brief

period can seriously damage emission

control components, in particular the

catalytic converter.

Socket for Onboard Diagnosis, refer to

page 278.

Green lights

Turn signal

Turn signal switched on.

Unusually rapid flashing of the indi-

cator light indicates that a turn sig-

nal bulb has failed.

Turn signal, refer to page 106.

Parking lights, headlight

Parking lights or headlights are

switched on.

Parking lights/low beams, headlight

control, refer to page 145.

Instrument cluster with enhanced

features: bad weather light

Bad weather light is switched on.

Bad weather light, refer to page 148.

High-beam Assistant

High-beam Assistant is switched on.

High beams are switched on and off

automatically depending on the traf-

fic situation.

High-beam Assistant, refer to page 147.

Cruise control

The system is switched on. It main-

tains the speed that was set using

the control elements on the steering wheel.

Speed Limiter

The indicator light illuminates: the

system is switched on.

The indicator light flashes: the set

speed limit has been exceeded. If this hap-

pens, a signal sounds.

Reduce speed or deactivate system.

Lane departure warning

The indicator light lights up: the sys-

tem is activated. At least one lane

marking was detected and warnings

can be issued.

Lane departure warning, refer to page 169.

Blue lights

High beams

High beams are switched on.

High beams, refer to page 107.

Hiding Check Control messages

Press the button on the turn signal lever.

Continuous display

Some Check Control messages are displayed

continuously and are not cleared until the

malfunction is eliminated. If several mal-

Seite 129

Displays CONTROLS

129

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

functions occur at once, the messages are

displayed consecutively.

The messages can be hidden for approx.

8 seconds. After this time, they are dis-

played again automatically.

Temporary display

Some Check Control messages are hidden

automatically after approx. 20 seconds. The

Check Control messages are stored and can

be displayed again later.

Displaying stored Check Control

messages

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. Tilt the Controller to the left.

4. "Check Control"

5. Select the text message.

Display

Check Control

At least one Check Control message

is displayed or stored.

Text messages

Text messages in combination with a icon

in the instrument cluster explain a Check

Control message and the meaning of the in-

dicator/warning lights.

Supplementary text messages

Additional information, such as on the

cause of an error or the required action, can

be called up via Check Control.

With urgent messages the added text will

be automatically displayed on the Control

Display.

Depending on the Check Control message,

further help can be selected.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. Tilt the Controller to the left.

4. "Check Control"

5. Select the desired text message.

6. Select the desired setting.

Messages after trip completion

Certain messages displayed while driving

are displayed again after the ignition is

switched off.

Fuel gauge

Concept

The current fill level of the fuel tank is dis-

played.

General information

Vehicle tilt position may cause the display

to vary.

Information on refueling, refer to page 242.

Instrument cluster without

enhanced features: display

The arrow beside the fuel

pump icon shows which side

of the vehicle the fuel filler

flap is on.

Seite 130

CONTROLS Displays

130

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Instrument cluster with enhanced

features: display

The arrow beside the fuel

pump icon shows which side

of the vehicle the fuel filler

flap is on.

Indicator light in the instrument

cluster

The yellow indicator light illumi-

nates, once the fuel reserve is

reached.

Tachometer

Always avoid engine speeds in the red

warning field. In this range, the fuel supply

is reduced to protect the engine.

Odometer and trip odometer

Concept

The total mileage driven and the mileage

driven since the last reset are displayed in

the instrument cluster.

Instrument cluster without

additional functions: reset trip

distance

Press the button.

– The odometer is displayed

when the ignition is

switched off.

– When the ignition is

switched on, the trip od-

ometer is reset.

Instrument cluster with enhanced

features: reset trip distance

Press the button.

– The odometer is displayed

when the ignition is

switched off.

– When the ignition is

switched on, the trip od-

ometer is reset.

Outside temperature

General information

If the indicator drops to +37 ℉/+3 ℃, a sig-

nal sounds.

A Check Control message is displayed.

There is an increased risk of ice on roads.

Safety information

Warning

Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃

there can be a risk of icy roads, for in-

stance on bridges or shady sections of the

road. There is a risk of accident. Modify

your driving style to the weather condi-

tions at low temperatures.

Display

The outside temperature is

displayed in the instrument

cluster.

Seite 131

Displays CONTROLS

131

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Time

The time is displayed in the

instrument cluster.

Set the time on the Central In-

formation Display (CID), refer

to page 48.

Date

The date is displayed in the in-

strument cluster.

Set the date on the Central In-

formation Display (CID), refer

to page 48.

Range

General information

When the remaining range is low:

– A Check Control message is displayed

briefly.

– The remaining range is shown on the

trip computer.

– With a sporty driving style, for instance

fast cornering, the engine function is

not always ensured.

The Check Control message appears contin-

uously below a range of approx.

30 miles/50 km.

Safety information

NOTICE

With a driving distance of less than

30 miles/50 km the engine may no longer

have sufficient fuel. Engine functions are

not ensured anymore. There is a risk of

damage to property, among other potential

damage. Refuel promptly.

Display

The current range is displayed

in the instrument cluster.

Displaying the cruising range

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Displays"

4. "Instrument panel"

5. "Range"

Current consumption

Concept

Displays the current fuel consumption.

Check whether you are currently driving in

an efficient and environmentally-friendly

manner.

Displaying the current

consumption

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Displays"

4. "Instrument panel"

5. "Current consumption"

Seite 132

CONTROLS Displays

132

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Service notifications

Concept

The function displays the service notifica-

tions and the corresponding maintenance

scopes.

General information

After the ignition is switched on the instru-

ment cluster briefly displays available driv-

ing distance or time to the next scheduled

maintenance.

A service advisor can read out the current

service notifications from your vehicle key.

Display

Detailed information on service

notifications

More information on the type of service re-

quired may be displayed on the Control Dis-

play.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. Tilt the Controller to the left.

4. "Service required"

Maintenance work and legally mandated

inspections are displayed.

5. Select an entry to call up detailed infor-

mation.

Symbols

Symbols Description

No service is currently re-

quired.

The time for recommended

maintenance or a legally

mandated inspection is ap-

proaching.

Service interval is exceeded.

Entering appointment dates

Enter the dates for the mandatory vehicle

inspections.

Make sure that the vehicle's date and time

are set correctly.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. Tilt the Controller to the left.

4. "Service required"

5. "Vehicle inspection"

6. "Date:"

7. Select the desired setting.

Automatic Service Request

Data regarding the service status or legally

mandated vehicle inspections is automati-

cally transmitted to your dealer’s service

center before your vehicle is due for serv-

ice.

You can check when your dealer’s service

center was notified.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

Seite 133

Displays CONTROLS

133

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

3. Tilt the Controller to the left.

4. "Teleservice Call"

Gear shift indicator

Concept

The system recommends the most efficient

gear for the current driving situation.

General information

Depending on the vehicle equipment and

country version, the gear shift indicator is

active in the manual mode of the Steptronic

transmission and with manual transmission.

Suggestions to shift up or down are dis-

played in the instrument cluster.

Manual transmission: displaying

Example Description

Efficient gear is set.

Depending on the equipment

version, shift to a more effi-

cient gear.

Steptronic transmission: displaying

Example Description

Efficient gear is set.

Depending on the equipment

version, shift to a more effi-

cient gear.

Speed Limit Info

Concept

Speed Limit Info shows the current maxi-

mum permitted speed in the instrument

cluster.

General information

The camera at the base of the interior mir-

ror detects traffic signs at the edge of the

road as well as overhead sign posts. Traffic

signs with extra symbols for wet road con-

ditions, etc., are also detected and compared

with the vehicle's onboard data, such as

from the rain sensor, and will be displayed

depending on the situation.

With the navigation system, the system

takes into account the information stored in

the navigation data and also displays speed

limits present on routes without signs.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute

for the driver’s personal judgment in as-

sessing visibility and traffic situation.

There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving

style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic

closely and actively intervene where ap-

propriate.

Seite 134

CONTROLS Displays

134

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Overview

Camera

The camera is installed near the interior

mirror.

Keep the windshield in front of the interior

mirror clean and clear.

Display

Depending on the vehicle equipment, Speed

Limit Info is displayed permanently in the

instrument cluster or via the trip computer.

Press button on the turn signal lever several

times, if needed.

Speed Limit Info is displayed in the instru-

ment cluster.

Speed Limit Info

The last speed limit detected.

With navigation system:

Speed Limit Info is not availa-

ble.

Speed Limit Info can also be displayed in

the Head-up Display.

System limits

The system may not be fully functional and

may provide incorrect information in the

following situations:

– In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snow-

fall.

– When traffic signs are fully or partially

concealed by objects, stickers or paint.

– When driving very close to the vehicle

in front of you.

– When driving toward bright lights or

strong reflections.

– When the windshield in front of the in-

terior mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov-

ered by a sticker, etc.

– In the event of incorrect detection by

the camera.

– If the speed limits stored in the naviga-

tion system are incorrect.

– In areas not covered by the navigation

system.

– When roads differ from the navigation,

such as due to changes in road routing.

– When passing buses or trucks with a

speed sticker.

– If the traffic signs are non-conforming.

– When traffic signs that are valid for a

parallel road are detected.

– During calibration of the camera imme-

diately after vehicle delivery.

Seite 135

Displays CONTROLS

135

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Selection lists

General information

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the

buttons on the steering wheel and the dis-

play in the instrument cluster can be used

to display or use the following:

– Current audio source.

– Phone redial.

– Turn on voice activation system.

Activating a list and adjusting the

setting

Button on the

steering wheel

Function

Move selection up.

Move selection

down.

Confirm the selec-

tion.

Instrument cluster without

enhanced features: display

Instrument cluster with enhanced

features: display

Trip computer

Concept

The trip computer displays different vehicle

data in the instrument cluster, such as aver-

age values.

Calling up information

Press the button on the turn signal lever.

Information is displayed in the instrument

cluster.

Information at a glance

Repeatedly pressing the but-

ton on the turn signal lever

calls up the following informa-

tion:

– Range.

Seite 136

CONTROLS Displays

136

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

– GREEN Info.

When GREEN Mode is activated.

– Average consumption, fuel.

– Average consumption since delivery

from the factory.

– Current consumption, fuel.

– Average speed.

– Date.

– Engine temperature display.

– With equipment version with Head-up

Display and navigation:

Distance to destination.

When destination guidance is activated

in the navigation system.

– With equipment version with Head-up

Display and navigation:

Arrival time.

When destination guidance is activated

in the navigation system.

– Instrument cluster without enhanced

features:

Speed Limit Info.

– Vehicle speed.

– Trip odometer.

The unit of some information can be

changed.

Setting units, refer to page 49.

Selecting information

Depending on the vehicle equipment, you

can select what information from the trip

computer can be accessed in the instrument

cluster.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Displays"

4. "Instrument panel"

5. Select the desired setting.

Settings are stored for the profile currently

used.

Information in detail

Range

Displays the estimated cruising range avail-

able with the remaining fuel.

The range is calculated based on your driv-

ing style over the last 20 miles/30 km.

GREEN info

The achieved range extension may be dis-

played as a bonus range.

Average consumption

The average consumption is calculated for

the period while the engine is running.

The average consumption is calculated for

the distance traveled since the last reset by

the trip computer.

Average speed

Periods in which the vehicle is parked with

the engine manually stopped are not in-

cluded in the calculation of the average

speed.

Resetting average values

Press and hold the button on the turn signal

lever.

Seite 137

Displays CONTROLS

137

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Engine temperature display

Concept

The current engine temperature, based on a

combination of coolant and engine oil tem-

perature is displayed. As soon as the opti-

mum operating temperature has been at-

tained, the indicator is in the center

position.

General information

If the engine oil or coolant, and thus the en-

gine, become too hot, a Check Control mes-

sage is displayed too.

When the engine temperature is too

high, a red indicator light is dis-

played.

When the engine oil temperature is

too high, a red indicator light is dis-

played.

To check the coolant level, refer to

page 275.

Instrument cluster without enhanced

features: display

Instrument cluster with enhanced

features: display

Distance to destination

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the

distance remaining to the destination is dis-

played if a destination is entered in the nav-

igation system before the trip is started.

The distance to the destination is adopted

automatically.

Time of arrival

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the

estimated time of arrival is displayed if a

destination is entered in the navigation sys-

tem before the trip is started.

The time must be correctly set.

Instrument cluster without additional

functions: Speed Limit Info

Speed Limit Info shows the current maxi-

mum permitted speed in the instrument

cluster.

Trip computer on the Control

Display

Concept

The trip computer displays different vehicle

data on the Control Display, such as average

values.

Seite 138

CONTROLS Displays

138

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

General information

Two types of trip computers are available

on the Control Display:

– "Onboard info": average values, such as

the consumption, are displayed. The val-

ues can be reset individually.

– "Trip computer": the values deliver an

overview of a specific route and can be

reset as often as necessary.

Calling up the trip computer or

onboard computer

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Driving information"

3. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"

Resetting the trip computer

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Driving information"

3. "Onboard info"

4. "Consumption" or "Speed"

5. "OK"

Resetting the trip computer

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Driving information"

3. "Trip computer"

4. Move the Controller to the left, if

needed.

– "Reset": all values are reset.

– "Automatic reset": all values are

reset approx. 4 hours after the vehi-

cle has come to a standstill.

5. If necessary, "OK"

Driving Excitement

Concept

On the Control Display, sport instruments

can be displayed, and the vehicle state can

be checked before the use of the SPORT

program.

Sport instruments

General information

On the Control Display, values for power

and torque are displayed.

Displaying sport instruments

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Technology in action"

3. "Sport displays"

4. "Sports instruments"

Via MINI Driving Modes switch:

1. Activate SPORT.

2. "Sport displays"

3. "Sports instruments"

Vehicle state

General information

The following vehicle and surrounding area

data is automatically checked and evaluated

in succession:

– Range.

– Engine temperature.

– Outside temperature.

– SPORT program state.

Finally, a total evaluation of the vehicle

state is displayed.

Seite 139

Displays CONTROLS

139

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Checking vehicle state

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Technology in action"

3. "Sport displays"

4. "Vehicle and surroundings"

Via the MINI Driving Modes switch:

1. Activate SPORT.

2. "Sport displays"

3. "Vehicle and surroundings"

Speed warning

Concept

The system can be used to set a speed limit.

A warning will be issued when this speed

limit is exceeded.

General information

The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed

exceeds the set speed limit again, after it

has dropped below it by 3 mph/5 km/h.

Adjusting

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Speed warning"

4. "Warning at:"

5. Turn the Controller until the desired

speed is displayed.

6. Press the Controller.

Activating/deactivating

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Speed warning"

4. "Speed warning"

Setting your current speed as the

speed warning

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Speed warning"

4. "Select current speed"

LED ring on the central in-

strument cluster

Concept

The LED ring displays light animations to

represent specific functions.

Basic displays

Basic functions, for instance the tachome-

ter, can be set to be displayed continually if

so desired.

Event displays

Functions that are only displayed tempora-

rily, for instance the volume or temperature

settings, can be set as event displays.

Several vehicle assistance functions can

also be displayed on the LED ring. This dis-

play corresponds with the displays of the

function in the respective display.

Example: tachometer

Like the tachometer in the instrument clus-

ter, the light animations of the tachometer's

basic display show the current RPMs and

the respective RPM warning thresholds.

Seite 140

CONTROLS Displays

140

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Display

– Arrow 1: current RPM.

– Arrow 2: prewarning field.

– Arrow 3: warning field.

Switching on/off LED ring

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Displays"

4. "Center Instrument"

5. "Center Instrument"

Adjusting the LED ring

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Displays"

4. "Center Instrument"

5. "Basic display" or "Event display"

6. Select the desired setting.

Setting the brightness

The brightness can be adjusted when night

lighting is active in the instrument cluster.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Displays"

4. "Center Instrument"

5. "Brightness at night"

6. Turn the Controller until the desired

brightness is set.

7. Press the Controller.

The setting is stored for the driver profile

currently used.

Head-up Display

Concept

This system projects important information

into the driver's field of vision, for instance

the speed.

The driver can get information without

averting his or her eyes from the road.

General information

Follow the instructions for cleaning the

Head-up Display. For additional informa-

tion, see the chapter on care.

Safety information

Warning

When extending and retracting the projec-

tion screen of the Head-up Display, body

parts can be jammed. There is a risk of in-

jury. Make sure that the area of movement

of the projection screen is clear during

opening and closing.

NOTICE

The Head-up Display consists of sensitive

components that can easily be scraped or

damaged. There is a risk of damage to

property, among other potential damage.

Do not place any objects on the Head-up

Seite 141

Displays CONTROLS

141

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Display, attach to system components or

plug into the system. Do not move the

moving parts manually.

Overview

Switching the Head-up Display

on/off

When switching on, the projection lens of

the Head-up Display is extended. When

switching off, the projection lens of the

Head-up Display is retracted again.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Displays"

4. "Head-Up Display"

5. "Head-Up Display"

Display

Overview

The following information is displayed on

the Head-up Display:

– Vehicle speed.

– Navigation instructions.

– Check Control messages.

– Selection list from the instrument clus-

ter.

– Driver assistance systems.

Some of this information is only displayed

briefly as needed.

Selecting displays in the Head-up

Display

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Displays"

4. "Head-Up Display"

5. "Displayed information"

6. Select the desired displays in the Head-

up Display.

Settings are stored for the driver profile

currently used.

Setting the brightness

The brightness is automatically adjusted to

the ambient brightness.

The basic setting can be adjusted manually.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Displays"

4. "Head-Up Display"

5. "Brightness"

6. Turn the Controller until the desired

brightness is set.

7. Press the Controller.

When the low beams are switched on, the

brightness of the Head-up Display can be

additionally influenced using the instru-

ment lighting, refer to page 149.

The setting is stored for the driver profile

currently used.

Adjusting the height

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

Seite 142

CONTROLS Displays

142

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Displays"

4. "Head-Up Display"

5. "Height"

6. Turn the Controller until the desired

height is reached.

7. Press the Controller.

The setting is stored for the driver profile

currently used.

Setting the rotation

The screen of the Head-up Display can be

rotated around its own axis.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Displays"

4. "Head-Up Display"

5. "Rotation"

6. Turn the Controller until the desired set-

ting is selected.

7. Press the Controller.

The setting is stored for the driver profile

currently used.

Display visibility

The visibility of the displays in the Head-up

Display is influenced by the following fac-

tors:

– Certain seat positions.

– Objects on the cover of the Head-up Dis-

play.

– Sunglasses with certain polarization fil-

ters.

– Wet roads.

– Unfavorable light conditions.

John Cooper Works: sport dis-

plays in the Head-up Display

General information

The sport displays in the Head-up Display

assist with a sporty driving style.

Switching on

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Displays"

4. "Head-Up Display"

5. "Displayed information"

6. "Sport displays"

With navigation system: if the sport dis-

plays are switched on, no navigation con-

tent will be displayed on the Head-up Dis-

play.

Display

1 Vehicle speed

2 Shift point indicator

3 Gear display

4 Current engine speed

5 Warning field, speed

Seite 143

Displays CONTROLS

143

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Shift point indicator

Concept

The shift point indicator in the Head-up

Display indicates the optimum shifting

point. Thus, with a sporty driving style, the

best possible vehicle acceleration is ach-

ieved.

Functional requirements

– Steptronic Sport transmission:

Manual mode M/S and, if necessary, Dy-

namic Traction Control DTC are acti-

vated.

– Press the accelerator pedal all the way

down.

Display

Successive gray illuminated fields indicate

the upcoming shift moment.

Shift up immediately when the red fields

light up.

When the maximum speed is reached, the

entire display flashes red and the fuel sup-

ply is interrupted in order to protect the en-

gine.

Vehicle status

General information

The status can be displayed and actions per-

formed for several systems.

Going to the vehicle status

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. Tilt the Controller to the left.

Information at a glance

Symbols Description

"Flat Tire Monitor": status of

the run-flat tires, refer to

page 160.

"Tire Pressure Monitor": sta-

tus of the Tire Pressure

Monitor TPM, refer to

page 155.

"Engine oil level": electronic

engine oil level check, refer

to page 271.

"Check Control": Check Con-

trol messages are stored in

the background and can be

displayed on the Control

Display. Displaying stored

Check Control messages, re-

fer to page 130.

"Service required": display-

ing service notifications, re-

fer to page 133.

"Teleservice Call": Tele-

service Call.

Seite 144

CONTROLS Displays

144

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Lights

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with

the series. It also describes features and

functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-

tions or country versions. This also applies

to safety-related functions and systems.

When using these functions and systems,

the applicable laws and regulations must be

observed.

Overview

Switches in the vehicle

The light switch element is located next to

the steering wheel.

Icon Function

Bad weather light.

Automatic headlight control.

Cornering light.

Lights off.

Daytime running lights.

Icon Function

Parking lights.

Low beams.

Instrument lighting.

Parking lights, low beams and

roadside parking lights

General information

Position of switch: , ,

If the driver's door is opened when the igni-

tion is switched off, the exterior lighting is

automatically switched off.

Parking lights

Position of switch:

The vehicle is illuminated on all sides.

Do not use the parking lights for extended

periods; otherwise, the battery may become

discharged and it would then be impossible

to start the engine.

When parking, switch on the one-sided

roadside parking light, refer to page 146.

Low beams

Position of switch:

The low beams light up when the ignition is

switched on.

Seite 145

Lights CONTROLS

145

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Canada: roadside parking light

Concept

The vehicle can be illuminated on one side.

Switching on

With radio-ready state switched off, press

the lever either up or down past the resist-

ance point for approx. 2 seconds.

Switching off

Briefly press the lever to the resistance

point in the opposite direction.

Welcome lights and pathway

lighting

Welcome lights

General information

Depending on the vehicle equipment and

the ambient brightness, individual light

functions may be switched on briefly when

the vehicle is unlocked.

Activating/deactivating

Position of switch: ,

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Lighting"

4. "Exterior lighting"

5. "Welcome lights"

The setting is stored for the driver profile

currently used.

Pathway lighting

General information

The low beams stay lit for a short while if

the headlight flasher is switched on after

the vehicle's radio-ready state is switched

off.

Setting the duration

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Lighting"

4. "Exterior lighting"

5. "Pathway lighting"

6. Set length of time.

The setting is stored for the driver profile

currently used.

Automatic headlight control

Concept

The low beams are switched on and off au-

tomatically depending on the ambient

brightness, for example in tunnels, in twi-

light or if there is precipitation.

General information

A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon

can cause the lights to be switched on.

Activating

Position of switch:

Seite 146

CONTROLS Lights

146

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

The indicator light in the instrument cluster

is illuminated when the low beams are

switched on.

System limits

The automatic headlight control cannot

serve as a substitute for your personal judg-

ment of lighting conditions.

For example, the sensors are unable to de-

tect fog or hazy weather. In these situa-

tions, switch the lights on manually.

Daytime running lights

General information

Switch position:

– ,

– Depending on the national-market ver-

sion:

The daytime running lights light up when

the ignition is switched on.

Depending on the national-market version:

after switching off the ignition, the parking

lights will illuminate in position .

Activating/deactivating

In some countries, daytime running lights

are mandatory, so it may not be possible to

deactivate the daytime running lights.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Lighting"

4. "Exterior lighting"

5. Select the desired setting.

Settings are stored for the currently used

vehicle key.

Cornering light

General information

Position of switch:

In tight curves, for instance on mountain-

ous roads or when turning, an additional,

cornering light is switched on that lights up

the inside of the curve when the vehicle is

moving below a certain speed.

The cornering light is automatically

switched on depending on the steering an-

gle or, where applicable, the use of turn sig-

nals.

When driving in reverse, the cornering

lights may be automatically switched on re-

gardless of the steering angle.

Adaptive headlight range con-

trol

The adaptive headlight range control fea-

ture balances out acceleration and braking

processes as well as the vehicle load condi-

tions in order to avoid dazzling oncoming

traffic. Illumination of the road is optimized.

High-beam Assistant

Concept

The high-beam Assistant detects other traf-

fic participants early on and automatically

switches the high beams on or off depend-

ing on the traffic situation.

General information

The high-beam Assistant ensures that the

high beams are switched on, whenever the

traffic situation allows. In the low speed

range, the high beams are not switched on

by the system.

Seite 147

Lights CONTROLS

147

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

The system responds to light from oncom-

ing traffic and traffic driving ahead of you,

and to ambient lighting, for instance in

towns and cities.

The high beams can be switched on and off

manually at any time.

Activating/deactivating

Position of switch, depending on the vehicle

equipment: ,

Press the button on the turn signal lever.

The indicator light in the instrument

cluster is illuminated when the low

beams are switched on.

The headlights are automatically switched

between low beams and high beams.

The blue indicator light in the instru-

ment cluster lights up when the sys-

tem switches on the high beams.

The high-beam Assistant is deactivated

when manually switching the high beams

on and off, refer to page 107.

To reactivate the high-beam Assistant,

press the button on the turn signal lever.

System limits

The high-beam Assistant cannot serve as a

substitute for the driver's personal judg-

ment of when to use the high beams. In sit-

uation that require this, therefore switch off

manually.

The system is not fully functional in the fol-

lowing situations, and driver intervention

may be necessary:

– In very unfavorable weather conditions,

such as fog or heavy precipitation.

– When detecting poorly-lit road users

such as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback

riders and wagons; when driving close

to train or ship traffic; or at animal

crossings.

– In tight curves, on hilltops or in depres-

sions, in crossing traffic or half-ob-

scured oncoming traffic on highways.

– In poorly-lit towns and cities or in the

presence of highly reflective signs.

– When the windshield in front of the in-

terior mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov-

ered with stickers, etc.

Fog lights

Bad weather light

Concept

The bad weather light ensures optimized il-

lumination of the roadway in poor visibility,

such as fog or rain. The light distribution of

the low beams is adapted to the visibility.

Functional requirement

The automatic headlight control must be ac-

tivated before switching on the bad weather

light.

Switching on/off

Press the button.

Instrument cluster with enhanced features:

The indicator light in the instrument

cluster is illuminated when the bad

weather light is switched on.

Seite 148

CONTROLS Lights

148

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Instrument lighting

Functional requirement

The parking lights or low beams must be

switched on to set the brightness.

Adjusting

Adjust the brightness with the

thumbwheel.

Interior lights

General information

Depending on the equipment, the interior

lights, footwell lights, entry lights, and cour-

tesy lights are controlled automatically.

The thumbwheel for the instrument lighting

controls brightness of some of these fea-

tures.

Overview

1 Interior lights

2 Reading lights

3 Ambient light

Switching the interior lights on/off

Press the button.

To switch off permanently: press the button

and hold for approx. 3 seconds.

Switching the reading lights on and

off manually

Press the button.

The reading lights are located in the front

next to the interior light.

Ambient light

General information

Depending on the equipment version, light-

ing can be adjusted for some lights in the

car's interior.

Activating/deactivating

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Lighting"

4. "Interior lighting"

5. "Ambient lighting"

6. Select the desired setting.

Settings are stored for the profile currently

used.

Changing color

Push the switch forward or back:

manual color change.

Press the switch forward or back-

ward and hold for approx. 3 seconds

until the Ambient Light flashes sev-

Seite 149

Lights CONTROLS

149

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

eral times: automatic color change. Push the

switch again to end color changes.

The colors of the Ambient Light depend on

the respectively set color world, refer to

page 50.

Setting the brightness

Depending on the equipment, the bright-

ness of the ambient light can be adjusted

via the thumbwheel for the instrument

lighting or on the Control Display.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Lighting"

4. "Interior lighting"

5. "Brightness"

6. Adjust the brightness.

Seite 150

CONTROLS Lights

150

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Safety

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with

the series. It also describes features and

functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-

tions or country versions. This also applies

to safety-related functions and systems.

When using these functions and systems,

the applicable laws and regulations must be

observed.

Airbags

1 Front airbag, driver

2 Front airbag, front passenger

3 Head airbag

4 Side airbag

5 Knee airbag

Front airbags

Front airbags help protect the driver and

the front passenger by responding to frontal

impacts in which safety belts alone would

not provide adequate protection.

Side airbag

In the event of a side impact, the side air-

bag protects the side of the body in the

chest and lap area.

Seite 151

Safety CONTROLS

151

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Head airbag

In the event of a side impact, the head air-

bag protects the head.

Ejection Mitigation

The head airbag system is designed as an

ejection mitigation countermeasure to re-

duce the likelihood of ejections of vehicle

occupants through side windows during

rollovers or side impact events.

Knee airbag

The knee airbag protects the legs in the

event of a frontal impact.

Protective effect

Airbags are not triggered in every impact

situation, for instance in less severe acci-

dents or rear-end collisions.

Information on optimum effect of the

airbags

Warning

If the seat position is incorrect or the de-

ployment area of the airbags is impaired,

the airbag system cannot provide protec-

tion as intended and may cause additional

injuries due to triggering. There is a risk

of injuries or danger to life. Follow the in-

formation on achieving the optimum pro-

tective effect of the airbag system.

– Keep a distance from the airbags.

– Always grasp the steering wheel on the

steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at

the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to

keep the risk of injury to your hands or

arms as low as possible when the airbag

is triggered.

– Adjust seat and steering wheel so that

hands can be crossed over the steering

wheel. Select the settings so that the

shoulder rests against the backrest

when crossing the hands and the upper

body is as far back as possible while still

maintaining a comfortable grip on the

steering wheel.

– Make sure that the front passenger is

sitting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her

feet and legs in the floor area and does

not support them on the dashboard.

– Make sure that occupants keep their

heads away from the side airbag.

– There should be no additional persons,

animals or objects between an airbag

and a person.

– Dashboard and windshield on the front

passenger side must stay clear - do not

attach adhesive labels or coverings and

do not attach brackets or cables, for in-

stance for GPS devices or mobile

phones.

– Do not apply adhesive materials to the

airbag cover panels, do not cover them

or modify them in any way.

– Do not use the cover of the front airbag

on the front passenger side as a storage

area.

– Do not attach slip covers, seat cushions

or other objects to the front passenger

seat that are not specifically suited for

seats with integrated side airbags.

– Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as

jackets, over the backrests.

– Never modify either the individual com-

ponents or the wiring in the airbag sys-

tem. This also applies to steering wheel

covers, the dashboard, and the seats.

– Do not remove the airbag system.

Even when you follow all instructions very

closely, injury from contact with the airbags

cannot be fully ruled out in certain situa-

tions.

Seite 152

CONTROLS Safety

152

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

The ignition and inflation noise may lead to

short-term and, in most cases, temporary

hearing impairment in sensitive occupants.

Vehicle modifications for a person with dis-

abilities may affect the air bag system; con-

tact MINI Customer Relations for further in-

formation.

Warnings and information on the airbags

are also found on the sun visors.

Functional readiness of the airbag

system

Safety information

Warning

Individual components can be hot after

triggering of the airbag system. There is a

risk of injury. Do not touch individual

components.

Warning

Improperly executed work can lead to fail-

ure, malfunction or unintentional trigger-

ing of the airbag system. In the case of a

malfunction, the airbag system might not

trigger as intended despite the accident

severity. There is a risk of injuries or dan-

ger to life. Have the airbag system

checked, repaired, dismantled and scrap-

ped by a dealer’s service center or another

qualified service center or repair shop.

Correct function

When the ignition is switched on,

the warning light in the instrument

cluster lights up briefly and thereby

indicates the operational readiness of the

entire airbag system and the belt tensioner.

Airbag system malfunctioning

– Warning light does not come on when

the ignition is switched on.

– The warning light lights up continu-

ously.

Automatic deactivation of the

front-seat passenger airbags

Concept

The system reads if the front passenger seat

is occupied by measuring the human body's

resistance.

Front, knee, and side airbag on the front

passenger's side are activated or deacti-

vated.

General information

Before transporting a child on the front pas-

senger seat, refer to the safety information

and instructions for children on the front

passenger seat, see Children.

Safety information

Warning

To ensure the front-seat passenger airbag

function, the system must be able to de-

tect whether a person is sitting in the

front passenger seat. The entire seat cush-

ion area must be used for this purpose.

There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.

Make sure that the front passenger keeps

his or her feet in the floor area.

Malfunction of the automatic

deactivation system

When transporting older children and

adults, the front-seat passenger airbags may

be deactivated in certain seat positions. In

this case, the indicator light for the front-

seat passenger airbags lights up.

Seite 153

Safety CONTROLS

153

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

In this case, change the seat position so

that the front-seat passenger airbags are ac-

tivated and the indicator light goes out.

If it is not possible to activate the airbags,

have the person sit in the rear.

To enable correct recognition of the occu-

pied seat cushion.

– Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats

or other items to the front passenger

seat unless they are specifically deter-

mined to be safe for use on the front

passenger seat.

– Do not place any electronic devices on

the front passenger seat if a child re-

straint system is to be installed on it.

– Do not place objects under the seat that

could press against the seat from below.

– No moisture in or on the seat.

Indicator light for the front-seat

passenger airbags

The indicator light for the front-seat passen-

ger airbags indicates the operating state of

the front-seat passenger airbags.

The light indicates whether the airbags are

either activated or deactivated.

– The indicator light lights

up when a child is properly

seated in a child restraint

system or when the seat is

empty. The airbags on the

front passenger side are

not activated.

– The indicator light does not light up

when, for instance a correctly seated

person of sufficient size is detected on

the seat. The airbags on the front pas-

senger side are activated.

Detected child restraint systems

The system generally detects children

seated in a child restraint system, particu-

larly in child restraint systems required by

NHTSA at the point in time when the vehi-

cle was manufactured. After installing a

child restraint system, make sure that the

indicator light for the front-seat passenger

airbags lights up. This indicates that the

child restraint system has been detected

and the front-seat passenger airbags are not

activated.

Strength of the driver's and front-

seat passenger airbag

The explosive power that activates driver's/

front-seat passenger airbags very much de-

pends on the positions of the driver's/front

passenger seat.

To maintain the accuracy of this function

over the long-term, calibrate the front seats

as soon as a relevant Check Control mes-

sage is displayed. A message also appears

on the Control Display.

Calibrating the front seats

Warning

There is a risk of jamming when moving

the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk

of damage to property. Make sure that the

area of movement of the seat is clear prior

to any adjustment.

An appropriate Check Control message is

displayed.

Seite 154

CONTROLS Safety

154

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

1. Move the respective seat all the way for-

ward.

2. Move the respective seat forward again.

The seat moves forward briefly.

3. Readjust the seat to the desired posi-

tion.

The calibration procedure is completed

when the Check Control message disap-

pears.

If the message continues to be displayed,

repeat the calibration.

If the message does not disappear after a re-

peat calibration, have the system checked

as soon as possible.

Tire Pressure Monitor TPM

Concept

The system monitors tire inflation pressure

in the four mounted tires. The system warns

you if there is a significant loss of pressure

in one or more tires.

General information

Sensors in the tire valves measure the tire

inflation pressure and, depending on the

model, the tire temperature.

Further information and instructions on us-

ing the system can also be found under Tire

inflation pressure, refer to page 246.

Functional requirements

The following conditions must be met for

the system; otherwise, reliable message of a

loss of tire inflation pressure is not assured:

– After a tire or wheel replacement, a re-

set was performed with the correct tire

inflation pressure.

– After the tire inflation pressure was ad-

justed to a new value, a reset was per-

formed.

– Wheels with TPM wheel electronics.

Status display

Current status

The system status can be displayed on the

Control Display, e.g., whether or not the sys-

tem is active.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"

The current status is displayed.

Tire conditions

General information

Tire and system status are indicated by the

color of the wheels and a text message on

the Control Display.

All wheels green

System is active and will issue a warning re-

lated to the tire inflation pressures stored

during the last reset.

One to four yellow wheels

A flat tire or major drop in the tire inflation

pressure has occurred in the indicated tires.

Gray wheels

It may not be possible to identify tire infla-

tion pressure losses.

Possible causes:

– Malfunction.

– The system is being reset.

Seite 155

Safety CONTROLS

155

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Additional information

The status control display additionally

shows the current tire inflation pressures.

The values shown are instantaneous meas-

urements and may vary depending on driv-

ing style or weather conditions.

Resetting the system

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"

4. Start the engine but do not drive off.

5. Reset tire inflation pressure: "Perform

reset".

6. Drive away.

The wheels are displayed in gray and the

following is displayed "Resetting Tire

Pressure Monitor…".

After a travel time of several minutes, the

set tire inflation pressures are accepted as

reference values. The resetting process is

completed automatically while driving.

After successful completion of the reset, the

tires appear in green on the Control Display

and "Tire Pressure Monitor active. See label

for recommended pressures." is displayed.

You may interrupt this trip at any time.

When you continue the reset resumes auto-

matically.

Messages

General information

A low tire inflation pressure may cause the

DSC Dynamic Stability Control to be

switched on.

Safety information

Warning

A damaged regular tire with low or miss-

ing tire inflation pressure impacts han-

dling, such as steering and braking re-

sponse. Run-flat tires can maintain limited

stability. There is a risk of accident. Do not

continue driving if the vehicle is equipped

with normal tires. Follow the information

on run-flat tires and continued driving

with these tires.

If a tire inflation pressure check is

required

Message

A icon with a Check Control message ap-

pears on the Control Display.

Icon Possible cause

The system has detected a wheel

change, but no reset was done.

No reset was performed for the

system. The system issues a warn-

ing based on the tire inflation

pressures stored during the last

reset.

Inflation was not carried out ac-

cording to specifications.

The tire inflation pressure has

fallen below the level of the last

reset.

Measure

1. Check the tire pressure and correct as

needed.

2. Reset the system.

Seite 156

CONTROLS Safety

156

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

If the tire inflation pressure is too low

Message

A yellow warning light is illuminated

in the instrument cluster.

In addition, a icon with a Check Control

message appears on the Control Display.

Icon Possible cause

There is a tire inflation pressure

loss.

No reset was performed for the

system. The system issues a warn-

ing based on the tire inflation

pressures stored during the last

reset.

Measure

1. Reduce your speed and drive moder-

ately. Do not exceed a speed of

80 mph/130 km/h.

2. At the next opportunity, for instance gas

station, check and correct the tire infla-

tion pressure in all four tires, if neces-

sary.

3. Reset the system.

If there is a significant loss of tire

inflation pressure

Message

A yellow warning light is illuminated

in the instrument cluster.

In addition, a icon with the affected tire ap-

pears in a Check Control message on the

Control Display.

Icon Possible cause

There is a flat tire or a major loss

in tire inflation pressure.

No reset was performed for the

system. The system issues a warn-

ing based on the tire inflation

pressures stored during the last

reset.

Measure

1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.

Avoid sudden braking and steering ma-

neuvers.

2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with

normal tires or run-flat tires.

Run-flat tires, refer to page 256, are la-

beled with a circular icon containing the

letters RSC marked on the tire's side-

wall.

Actions in the event of a flat tire

Normal tires

1. Identify the damaged tire.

To do this, check the tire inflation pres-

sure in all four tires, for instance using

the tire pressure gage of a flat tire kit.

If the tire inflation pressure in all four

tires is correct, the Tire Pressure Moni-

tor may not have been reset. In this

case, perform the reset.

If the tire inflation pressure in all four

tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor

may not have been initialized. In this

case, initialize the system.

If identification of flat tire damage is

not possible, please contact a dealer’s

service center or another qualified serv-

ice center or repair shop.

2. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire

kit or by changing the wheel.

Seite 157

Safety CONTROLS

157

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Use of sealant, for instance from the flat tire

kit, may damage the TPM wheel electronics.

In this case, have the electronics checked

and replaced at the next opportunity.

Run-flat tires

Safety information

Warning

The vehicle handles differently when a

run-flat tire has insufficient or no tire

pressure; for instance, reduced lane stabil-

ity when braking, braking distances are

longer and the self-steering properties will

change. There is a risk of accident. Drive

moderately and do not exceed a speed of

50 mph/80 km/h.

Maximum speed

You may continue driving with a damaged

tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.

Continued driving with a flat tire

If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:

1. Avoid sudden braking and steering ma-

neuvers.

2. Do not exceed a speed of

50 mph/80 km/h.

3. Check the tire inflation pressure in all

four tires at the next opportunity.

If the tire inflation pressure in all four

tires is correct, the Tire Pressure Moni-

tor may not have been reset. In this

case, perform the reset.

Possible driving distance with a

depressurized tire

The distance for which it may be possible to

drive safely varies depending on how the

vehicle is loaded and used, e.g., speed, road

conditions, outside temperature. The driv-

ing distance may be less but may also be

more if an economical driving style is used.

If the vehicle is loaded with an average

weight and used under favorable conditions,

the distance for which it may be safe to

drive may be up to 50 miles/80 km.

Vehicle handling with damaged tires

Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will

handle differently, potentially leading to

conditions such as the following:

– Greater likelihood of swerving off

course.

– Longer braking distances.

– Changed self-steering properties.

Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt

steering maneuvers or driving over obsta-

cles, for instance curbs or potholes.

Final tire failure

Vibrations or loud noises while driving can

indicate the final failure of a tire.

Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of

the tire could come loose and cause an acci-

dent.

Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s

service center or another qualified service

center or repair shop.

System limits

Temperature

The tire inflation pressure depends on the

tire's temperature.

Driving or exposure to the sun will increase

the tire's temperature, thus increasing the

tire inflation pressure.

The tire inflation pressure is reduced when

the tire temperature falls again.

These circumstances may cause a warning

when temperatures fall very sharply.

Seite 158

CONTROLS Safety

158

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Sudden tire pressure loss

The system cannot indicate sudden serious

tire damage caused by external circumstan-

ces.

Failure performing a reset

The system does not function properly if a

reset has not been carried out, for instance

a flat tire is reported though tire inflation

pressures are correct.

Malfunction

The yellow warning light flashes and

is then illuminated continuously. A

Check Control message is displayed.

It may not be possible to identify tire pres-

sure losses.

Examples and recommendations in the fol-

lowing situations:

– A wheel without TPM wheel electronics,

for instance an emergency wheel, is

mounted: have it checked by a dealer’s

service center or another qualified serv-

ice center or repair shop as needed.

– Malfunction: have system checked by a

dealer’s service center or another quali-

fied service center or repair shop.

– The system was unable to complete the

reset. Perform a system reset again.

– Interference caused by systems or devi-

ces with the same radio frequency: after

leaving the area of the interference, the

system automatically becomes active

again.

Declaration according to NHTSA/

FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring

System

Each tire, including the spare (if provided)

should be checked monthly when cold and

inflated to the inflation pressure recom-

mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the

vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure la-

bel. (If your vehicle has tires of a different

size than the size indicated on the vehicle

placard or tire inflation pressure label, you

should determine the proper tire inflation

pressure for those tires.) As an added safety

feature, your vehicle has been equipped

with a tire pressure monitoring system

(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure

telltale when one or more of your tires is

significantly under-inflated. Accordingly,

when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-

nates, you should stop and check your tires

as soon as possible, and inflate them to the

proper pressure. Driving on a significantly

under-inflated tire causes the tire to over-

heat and can lead to tire failure. Under-infla-

tion also reduces fuel efficiency and tire

tread life, and may affect the vehicle's han-

dling and stopping ability. Please note that

the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire

maintenance, and it is the driver's responsi-

bility to maintain correct tire pressure, even

if under-inflation has not reached the level

to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire

pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been

equipped with a TPMS malfunction indica-

tor to indicate when the system is not oper-

ating properly. The TPMS malfunction indi-

cator is combined with the low tire pressure

telltale. When the system detects a mal-

function, the telltale will flash for approxi-

mately one minute and then remain contin-

uously illuminated. This sequence will

continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups

as long as the malfunction exists. When the

malfunction indicator is illuminated, the

system may not be able to detect or signal

low tire pressure as intended. TPMS mal-

functions may occur for a variety of rea-

sons, including the installation of replace-

ment or alternate tires or wheels on the

vehicle that prevent the TPMS from func-

tioning properly. Always check the TPMS

malfunction telltale after replacing one or

more tires or wheels on your vehicle to en-

sure that the replacement or alternate tires

Seite 159

Safety CONTROLS

159

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to

function properly.

Flat Tire Monitor FTM

Concept

The system detects tire inflation pressure

loss on the basis of rotation speed differen-

ces between the individual wheels while

driving.

In the event of a tire inflation pressure loss,

the diameter and therefore the rotational

speed of the corresponding wheel changes.

The difference will be detected and reported

as a flat tire.

The system does not measure the actual in-

flation pressure in the tires.

Functional requirements

The following conditions must be met for

the system; otherwise, reliable message of a

loss of tire inflation pressure is not assured:

– After a tire or wheel replacement, an ini-

tialization was performed with the cor-

rect tire inflation pressure.

– After the tire pressure was adjusted to a

new value, an initialization was per-

formed.

Status display

The current status of the flat tire monitor

can be displayed, for instance whether the

RPA is active.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Flat Tire Monitor"

The status is displayed.

Initialization required

An initialization must be performed in the

following situations:

– After the tire inflation pressure has

been adjusted.

– After a tire or wheel replacement.

Performing initialization

When initializing, the set tire inflation

pressures serve as reference values in order

to detect a flat tire. Initialization is started

by confirming the tire inflation pressures.

Do not initialize the system when driving

with tire chains.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Flat Tire Monitor"

4. Start the engine but do not drive off.

5. Start the initialization with: "Perform

reset".

6. Drive away.

The initialization is completed while driv-

ing, which can be interrupted at any time.

The initialization automatically continues

when driving continues.

Messages

General information

When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic

Stability Control is switched on, if needed.

Safety information

Warning

A damaged regular tire with low or miss-

ing tire inflation pressure impacts han-

dling, such as steering and braking re-

sponse. Run-flat tires can maintain limited

Seite 160

CONTROLS Safety

160

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

stability. There is a risk of accident. Do not

continue driving if the vehicle is equipped

with normal tires. Follow the information

on run-flat tires and continued driving

with these tires.

Indication of a flat tire

A yellow warning light is illuminated

in the instrument cluster.

In addition, a icon with a Check Control

message appears on the Control Display.

Icon Possible cause

There is a flat tire or a major loss

in tire inflation pressure.

Measure

1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.

Avoid sudden braking and steering ma-

neuvers.

2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with

normal tires or run-flat tires.

Run-flat tires, refer to page 256, are la-

beled with a circular icon containing the

letters RSC marked on the tire's side-

wall.

Actions in the event of a flat tire

Normal tires

1. Identify the damaged tire.

To do this, check the tire inflation pres-

sure in all four tires, for instance using

the tire pressure gage of a flat tire kit.

If the tire inflation pressure in all four

tires is correct, the Tire Pressure Moni-

tor may not have been reset. In this

case, perform the reset.

If the tire inflation pressure in all four

tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor

may not have been initialized. In this

case, initialize the system.

If identification of flat tire damage is

not possible, please contact a dealer’s

service center or another qualified serv-

ice center or repair shop.

2. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire

kit or by changing the wheel.

Use of sealant, for instance from the flat tire

kit, may damage the TPM wheel electronics.

In this case, have the electronics checked

and replaced at the next opportunity.

Run-flat tires

Safety information

Warning

The vehicle handles differently when a

run-flat tire has insufficient or no tire

pressure; for instance, reduced lane stabil-

ity when braking, braking distances are

longer and the self-steering properties will

change. There is a risk of accident. Drive

moderately and do not exceed a speed of

50 mph/80 km/h.

Maximum speed

You may continue driving with a damaged

tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.

Continued driving with a flat tire

If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:

1. Avoid sudden braking and steering ma-

neuvers.

2. Do not exceed a speed of

50 mph/80 km/h.

3. Check the tire inflation pressure in all

four tires at the next opportunity.

If the tire inflation pressure in all four

tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor

Seite 161

Safety CONTROLS

161

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

may not have been initialized. In this

case, initialize the system.

Possible driving distance with a

depressurized tire

The distance for which it may be possible to

drive safely varies depending on how the

vehicle is loaded and used, e.g., speed, road

conditions, outside temperature. The driv-

ing distance may be less but may also be

more if an economical driving style is used.

If the vehicle is loaded with an average

weight and used under favorable conditions,

the distance for which it may be safe to

drive may be up to 50 miles/80 km.

Vehicle handling with damaged tires

Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will

handle differently, potentially leading to

conditions such as the following:

– Greater likelihood of swerving off

course.

– Longer braking distances.

– Changed self-steering properties.

Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt

steering maneuvers or driving over obsta-

cles, for instance curbs or potholes.

Final tire failure

Vibrations or loud noises while driving can

indicate the final failure of a tire.

Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of

the tire could come loose and cause an acci-

dent.

Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s

service center or another qualified service

center or repair shop.

System limits

The system could be delayed or malfunction

in the following situations:

– A natural, even tire inflation pressure

loss in all four tires will not be recog-

nized. Therefore, check the tire inflation

pressure regularly.

– Sudden serious tire damage caused by

external circumstances cannot be recog-

nized in advance.

– When the system has not been initial-

ized.

– When driving on a snowy or slippery

road surface.

– Sporty driving style: spinning traction

wheels, high lateral acceleration (drift-

ing).

– When driving with tire chains.

Intelligent Safety

Concept

Intelligent Safety enables central operation

of the driver assistance systems.

The intelligent safety systems can help pre-

vent an imminent collision.

– Forward Collision Warning with city

collision mitigation, refer to page 163.

– Pedestrian Collision Warning with City

Collision Mitigation, refer to page 167.

– Lane departure warning, refer to

page 169.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute

for the driver’s personal judgment in as-

sessing visibility and traffic situation.

There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving

style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic

closely and actively intervene where ap-

propriate.

Seite 162

CONTROLS Safety

162

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Warning

Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a

substitute for the driver’s personal judg-

ment. Due to its limits, the system may not

issue warnings or reactions, or these may

be issued late or in a manner that is not

consistent with their normal use. There is

a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to

traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely

and actively intervene where appropriate.

Warning

Due to system limits, individual functions

can malfunction during tow-starting/

towing with the Intelligent Safety systems

activated. There is a risk of accident.

Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off

prior to tow-starting/towing.

Overview

Button in the vehicle

Intelligent Safety button

Switching on/off

Some Intelligent Safety systems are auto-

matically active after every departure. Some

Intelligent Safety systems activate accord-

ing to the last setting.

Press button briefly:

– The menu for the Intelligent

Safety system is displayed. The

systems are individually

switched off according to their

respective settings.

– LED lights up orange or goes out respec-

tive to their individual settings.

Adjust the settings as needed. The individ-

ual settings are stored for the driver profile

currently in use.

Press button again:

– All Intelligent Safety systems

are switched on.

– The LED lights up green.

Hold down button:

– All Intelligent Safety systems

are switched off.

– The LED goes out.

Forward Collision Warning

with city light braking func-

tion

Concept

The system may prevent some accidents. In

the event of an accident, the system may re-

duce impact speed.

The system sounds a warning before an im-

minent collision and activates brakes inde-

pendently, if needed.

The Brake Intervention function activates

and applies the brakes with limited force

and duration.

A camera at the base of the interior mirror

controls the system.

The Forward Collision Warning is available

even if cruise control has been deactivated.

Seite 163

Safety CONTROLS

163

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

With the vehicle approaching another vehi-

cle intentionally, the Forward Collision

Warning and brake intervention are delayed

in order to avoid false system reactions.

General information

The system warns at two levels of an immi-

nent danger of collision at speeds from ap-

prox. 3 mph/5 km/h. The timing of warn-

ings may vary with the current driving

situation.

If necessary, a brake intervention will oc-

cur. Depending on the equipment and na-

tional-market version, the brake interven-

tion will occur up to approx.

35 mph/60 km/h or up to approx.

35 mph/60 km/h.

Detection range

Objects that the system can detect are

taken into account.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute

for the driver’s personal judgment in as-

sessing visibility and traffic situation.

There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving

style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic

closely and actively intervene where ap-

propriate.

Warning

Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a

substitute for the driver’s personal judg-

ment. Due to its limits, the system may not

issue warnings or reactions, or these may

be issued late or in a manner that is not

consistent with their normal use. There is

a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to

traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely

and actively intervene where appropriate.

Warning

Due to system limits, individual functions

can malfunction during tow-starting/

towing with the Intelligent Safety systems

activated. There is a risk of accident.

Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off

prior to tow-starting/towing.

Overview

Button in the vehicle

Intelligent Safety button

Seite 164

CONTROLS Safety

164

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Camera

The camera is installed near the interior

mirror.

Keep the windshield in front of the interior

mirror clean and clear.

Switching on/off

Switching on automatically

The system is automatically active when the

vehicle is turned on.

Switching on/off manually

Press button briefly:

– The menu for the Intelligent

Safety system is displayed. The

systems are individually

switched off according to their

respective settings.

– LED lights up orange or goes out respec-

tive to their individual settings.

Adjust the settings as needed. The individ-

ual settings are stored for the driver profile

currently in use.

Press button again:

– All Intelligent Safety systems

are switched on.

– The LED lights up green.

Hold down button:

– All Intelligent Safety systems

are switched off.

– The LED goes out.

Setting the warning time

The warning time can be set via the Central

Information Display (CID).

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Intelligent Safety"

4. "Warning time"

5. Select the desired setting.

The selected warning time is stored for the

driver profile currently in use.

Warning with braking function

Display

A warning symbol appears in the instru-

ment cluster and in the Head-up Display if a

collision with a detected vehicle is immi-

nent.

Icon Measure

Icon lights up red: prewarning.

Brake and increase distance.

Symbol flashes red and an acous-

tic signal sounds: acute warning.

Brake and make an evasive ma-

neuver, if necessary.

Prewarning

This warning is provided, for instance when

there is impending danger of a collision or

the distance to the vehicle ahead is too

small.

If a prewarning is provided, respond by

braking as warranted.

Acute warning with braking function

An acute warning is displayed when there

is an imminent danger of collision due to

Seite 165

Safety CONTROLS

165

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

the vehicle approaching another object at a

high speed.

The driver must intervene actively when

there is an acute warning. If necessary, the

driver is assisted by a minor automatic

brake intervention in a possible risk of colli-

sion.

Acute warnings may be provided even when

there has been no prior warning.

Brake intervention

The warning prompts the driver to inter-

vene. While a warning is active, the maxi-

mum braking force is used when the brake

is applied. In order to activate the Brake As-

sistant function, you must apply the brakes

quickly and forcefully. If there is a risk of

collision, the system may assist with brak-

ing. When the vehicle is traveling at a low

speed, the vehicle may come to a complete

stop.

Manual transmission: during a brake inter-

vention up to a complete stop, the engine

may be shut down.

The driver may interrupt the braking inter-

vention function by stepping on the acceler-

ator pedal or by actively moving the steer-

ing wheel.

The system’s ability to detect objects may

be limited in some circumstances. Refer to

the information in this Owner’s Manual re-

garding the limitations of the system and

actively intervene as warranted.

System limits

Safety information

Warning

The system is designed to operate in cer-

tain conditions and circumstances. Due to

conditions or other factors, the system

may not respond. There may be a risk of

accident or risk of damage to property. Ac-

tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the

information in this Owner’s Manual re-

garding the scope of the system’s opera-

tion and limitations.

Detection range

The system's detection potential is limited.

Thus, a system reaction might not come or

might come late.

The following situations may not be de-

tected, for example:

– Slow moving vehicles when you ap-

proach them at high speed.

– Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front

of you, or sharply decelerating vehicles.

– Vehicles with an unusual rear appear-

ance.

– Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.

Functional limitations

The system may be limited in the following

situations:

– In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snow-

fall.

– In tight curves.

– If the field of view of the camera or the

windshield is dirty or covered.

– If the driving stability control systems

are deactivated, for instance DSC OFF.

– Up to 10 seconds after the start of the

engine via the Start/Stop button.

– During calibration of the camera imme-

diately after vehicle delivery.

– If there are constant blinding effects be-

cause of oncoming light, for instance

from the sun low in the sky.

Warning sensitivity

The more sensitive the warning settings

are, the more warnings are displayed.

Seite 166

CONTROLS Safety

166

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Therefore, there may also be an excess of

premature or unjustified warnings and reac-

tions.

Pedestrian Collision Warning

with City Collision Mitigation

Concept

The system may prevent some accidents

with pedestrians.

When driving at city speeds, the system

will issue a warning if there is imminent

risk of a collision with pedestrians, and sup-

port this with a light braking function.

The camera at the base of the interior mir-

ror controls the system.

General information

In sufficiently bright conditions, the system

issues a warning of a possible risk of colli-

sion with pedestrians in the speed range

from approx. 6 mph/10 km/h to approx.

35 mph/60 km/h

The system reacts to people who are within

the detection range of the system.

Detection range

The detection area in front of the vehicle is

divided into two areas:

– Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of

the vehicle.

– Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and

left of the central area.

A collision is imminent if pedestrians are lo-

cated within the central area. A warning is

issued about pedestrians who are located

within the extended area only if they are

moving in the direction of the central area.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute

for the driver’s personal judgment in as-

sessing visibility and traffic situation.

There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving

style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic

closely and actively intervene where ap-

propriate.

Warning

Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a

substitute for the driver’s personal judg-

ment. Due to its limits, the system may not

issue warnings or reactions, or these may

be issued late or in a manner that is not

consistent with their normal use. There is

a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to

traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely

and actively intervene where appropriate.

Warning

Due to system limits, individual functions

can malfunction during tow-starting/

towing with the Intelligent Safety systems

activated. There is a risk of accident.

Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off

prior to tow-starting/towing.

Seite 167

Safety CONTROLS

167

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Overview

Button in the vehicle

Intelligent Safety button

Camera

The camera is installed near the interior

mirror.

Keep the windshield in front of the interior

mirror clean and clear.

Switching on/off

Switching on automatically

The system is automatically active when the

vehicle is turned on.

Switching on/off manually

Press button briefly:

– The menu for the Intelligent

Safety system is displayed. The

systems are individually

switched off according to their

respective settings.

– LED lights up orange or goes out respec-

tive to their individual settings.

Adjust the settings as needed. The individ-

ual settings are stored for the driver profile

currently in use.

Press button again:

– All Intelligent Safety systems

are switched on.

– The LED lights up green.

Hold down button:

– All Intelligent Safety systems

are switched off.

– The LED goes out.

Warning with braking function

Display

If a collision with a detected person is im-

minent, a warning symbol appears on the

instrument cluster and in the Head-up Dis-

play.

The red icon is displayed and a sig-

nal sounds.

Intervene immediately by braking or

make an evasive maneuver.

Brake intervention

The warning prompts the driver to inter-

vene. While a warning is active, the maxi-

mum braking force is used when the brake

is applied. In order to activate the Brake As-

sistant function, you must apply the brakes

quickly and forcefully. If there is a risk of

collision, the system may assist with brak-

ing. When the vehicle is traveling at a low

speed, the vehicle may come to a complete

stop.

Seite 168

CONTROLS Safety

168

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Manual transmission: during a brake inter-

vention up to a complete stop, the engine

may be shut down.

The driver may interrupt the braking inter-

vention function by stepping on the acceler-

ator pedal or by actively moving the steer-

ing wheel.

The system’s ability to detect objects may

be limited in some circumstances. Refer to

the information in this Owner’s Manual re-

garding the limitations of the system and

actively intervene as warranted.

System limits

Safety information

Warning

The system is designed to operate in cer-

tain conditions and circumstances. Due to

conditions or other factors, the system

may not respond. There may be a risk of

accident or risk of damage to property. Ac-

tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the

information in this Owner’s Manual re-

garding the scope of the system’s opera-

tion and limitations.

Detection range

The detection potential of the camera is lim-

ited.

Thus, a warning might not be issued or be

issued late.

The following situations may not be de-

tected, for example:

– Partially covered pedestrians.

– Pedestrians that are not detected as

such because of the viewing angle or

contour.

– Pedestrians outside of the detection

range.

– Pedestrians having a body size less than

32 in/80 cm.

Functional limitations

The system may be limited or may not be

available in the following situations:

– In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snow-

fall.

– In tight curves.

– If the field of view of the camera or the

windshield is dirty or covered.

– If the driving stability control systems

are deactivated, for instance DSC OFF.

– Up to 10 seconds after the start of the

engine via the Start/Stop button.

– During calibration of the camera imme-

diately after vehicle delivery.

– If there are constant blinding effects be-

cause of oncoming light, for instance

from the sun low in the sky.

– When it is dark outside.

Lane departure warning

Concept

The lane departure warning alerts when the

vehicle on roads with lane markings is

about to leave the lane.

General information

Depending on the country version, the sys-

tem issues a warning at speeds between

35 mph/55 km/h and 45 mph/70 km/h.

Warnings are issued by means of a steering

wheel vibration. The time of the warning

may vary depending on the current driving

situation.

The system does not provide a warning if

the turn signal is set before leaving the

lane.

Seite 169

Safety CONTROLS

169

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute

for the driver’s personal judgment in as-

sessing road and traffic situation. There is

a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to

traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely

and actively intervene where appropriate.

Do not jerk the steering wheel in response

to a warning.

Warning

Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a

substitute for the driver’s personal judg-

ment. Due to its limits, the system may not

issue warnings or reactions, or these may

be issued late or in a manner that is not

consistent with their normal use. There is

a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to

traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely

and actively intervene where appropriate.

Overview

Button in the vehicle

Intelligent Safety button

Camera

The camera is installed near the interior

mirror.

Keep the windshield in front of the interior

mirror clean and clear.

Switching on/off

Switching on automatically

The lane departure warning is automatically

activated after departure, if the function

was switched on the last time the engine

was stopped.

Switching on/off manually

Press button briefly:

– The menu for the Intelligent

Safety system is displayed. The

systems are individually

switched off according to their

respective settings.

– LED lights up orange or goes out respec-

tive to their individual settings.

Adjust the settings as needed. The individ-

ual settings are stored for the driver profile

currently in use.

Press button again:

– All Intelligent Safety systems

are switched on.

– The LED lights up green.

Seite 170

CONTROLS Safety

170

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Hold down button:

– All Intelligent Safety systems

are switched off.

– The LED goes out.

Display in the instrument cluster

The icon illuminates green: at least

one lane marking was detected and

warnings can be issued.

Issued warning

If you leave the lane

If you leave the lane and if a lane marking

has been detected, the steering wheel vi-

brates.

If the turn signal is switched on before

changing the lane, a warning is not issued.

End of warning

The warning is canceled in the following

situations:

– Automatically after approx. 3 seconds.

– When returning to your own lane.

– When braking hard.

– When using the turn signal.

System limits

Safety information

Warning

The system is designed to operate in cer-

tain conditions and circumstances. Due to

conditions or other factors, the system

may not respond. There may be a risk of

accident or risk of damage to property. Ac-

tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the

information in this Owner’s Manual re-

garding the scope of the system’s opera-

tion and limitations.

Functional limitations

The system may be limited in the following

situations:

– In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snow-

fall.

– In the event of missing, worn, poorly

visible, merging, diverging, or multiple

lane markings such as in construction

areas.

– When lane markings are covered in

snow, ice, dirt or water.

– In tight curves or on narrow lanes.

– When lane markings are covered by ob-

jects.

– When driving very close to the vehicle

in front of you.

– When driving toward bright lights.

– When the windshield in front of the in-

terior mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov-

ered with stickers, etc.

– During calibration of the camera imme-

diately after vehicle delivery.

Manual Speed Limiter

Concept

The system can be used to set a speed limit,

for instance to prevent the vehicle from ex-

ceeding speed limits.

General information

The system can limit the speed, starting at a

value of 20 mph/30 km/h. The vehicle can

be driven at any speed below the set speed

limit.

Seite 171

Safety CONTROLS

171

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Exceeding the speed limit

When necessary, the speed limit can be in-

tentionally overcome by stepping on the

gas.

When the vehicle speed exceeds the set

speed limit, a warning is issued.

No brake intervention

If the set speed limit is reached or uninten-

tionally exceeded, such as when driving

downhill, the vehicle is not actively braked.

When the speed limit is set during a trip to

a value below the driving speed, the vehicle

coasts until its driving speed drops below

the set speed limit.

Overview

Steering wheel buttons, left

Button Function

System on/off.

Increase the speed limit.

Reduce the speed limit.

Operation

Switching on

Press the button on the steering

wheel.

The current speed is accepted as the speed

limit.

If the system is switched on while the vehi-

cle is stationary or driving at low speeds,

20 mph/30 km/h is set as the speed limit.

The set speed is displayed under the LIMIT

or LIM indicator.

When the speed limit is switched on, DSC

Dynamic Stability Control is switched on as

well, if needed.

Switching off

Press the button on the steering

wheel.

The system switches off automatically in

the following situations, for example:

– When shifting into reverse gear.

– When the engine is switched off.

– When cruise control is switched on.

– On activation of Dynamic Traction Con-

trol DTC or deactivation of DSC.

The displays go out.

Changing the speed limit

or button: press up or down repeat-

edly until the desired speed limit is set.

– or button: each time it is pressed

to the resistance point, the speed limit

increases or decreases by 1 mph,

1 km/h.

– or button: each time it is pressed

past the resistance point, the desired

speed changes by a maximum of 5 mph/

10 km/h.

When the speed limit is set during a trip to

a value below the current speed, the vehicle

coasts until it drops to the set speed limit.

Exceeding the speed limit

The speed limit can be exceeded intention-

ally. There is no acoustic warning in this

case.

Press the accelerator pedal all the way down

to intentionally exceed the set speed limit.

When the vehicle speed drops below the set

speed limit, the limit is automatically reacti-

vated.

Seite 172

CONTROLS Safety

172

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Warning when the speed limit is

exceeded

Visual warning

If the set speed limit is exceeded, the LIMIT

or LIM indicator flashes while the vehicle

speed is greater than the speed limit.

Acoustic warning

– If the speed limit is exceeded uninten-

tionally, a signal sounds.

– When the speed limit is reduced to be-

low the vehicle speed while driving, a

signal sounds after approx. 30 seconds.

– When the speed limit is intentionally

exceeded by stepping on the accelerator

pedal all the way down, there is no sig-

nal.

Displays in the instrument cluster

Instrument cluster without enhanced

features:

The desired speed is displayed under

the LIMIT indicator.

Instrument cluster with en-

hanced features:

The desired speed is displayed

under the LIM indicator.

– The indicator does not light up: the sys-

tem is switched off.

– The indicator lights up green: the sys-

tem is active.

– Display flashes green: set speed limit ex-

ceeded.

Displays in the Head-up Display

The information from the Speed Limiter can

also be displayed in the Head-up Display.

Fatigue alert

Concept

The system can detect decreasing alertness

or fatigue of the driver during long, monoto-

nous trips, for instance on highways. In this

situation, it is recommended that the driver

takes a break.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute

for the driver’s personal judgment in as-

sessing one's physical state. An increasing

lack of alertness or fatigue may not be de-

tected or not be detected in time. There is

a risk of accident. Make sure that the

driver is rested and alert. Adjust driving

style to traffic conditions.

Function

The system is switched on each time the en-

gine is started and cannot be switched off.

After travel has begun, the system monitors

certain aspects of the driver's behavior, so

that decreasing alertness or fatigue can be

detected.

This procedure takes the following criteria

into account:

– Personal driving style, for instance

steering behavior.

– Driving conditions, for instance time,

length of trip.

Starting at approximately 43 mph/70 km/h,

the system is active and can display a rec-

ommendation to take a break.

Break recommendation

If the driver becomes less alert or fatigued,

a message is displayed in the Control Dis-

Seite 173

Safety CONTROLS

173

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

play with the recommendation to take a

break.

A recommendation to take a break is dis-

played only once during an uninterrupted

trip.

After a break, another recommendation to

take a break cannot be displayed until after

approximately 45 minutes.

System limits

The function may be limited in the follow-

ing situations and may issue an incorrect

warning or no warning at all:

– When the time is set incorrectly.

– When the vehicle speed is mainly below

about 43 mph/70 km/h.

– With a sporty driving style, such as dur-

ing rapid acceleration or when corner-

ing fast.

– In active driving situations, such as

when changing lanes frequently.

– When the road surface is poor.

– In the event of strong side winds.

The system is reset approx. 45 minutes af-

ter parking the vehicle, for instance in the

case of a break during longer trips on high-

ways.

PostCrash – iBrake

Concept

In the event of an accident, the system can

bring the vehicle to a halt automatically

without intervention by the driver in cer-

tain situations. This can reduce the risk of a

further collision and the consequences

thereof.

At standstill

After coming to a halt, the brake is released

automatically. Secure the vehicle against

rolling.

Harder vehicle braking

In certain situations, it can be necessary to

bring the vehicle to a halt more quickly than

the Brake Assistant allows.

To do this, quickly apply extra force to the

brake. For a brief period, the braking pres-

sure will be higher than the braking pres-

sure that is achieved by the automatic brak-

ing function. This interrupts automatic

braking.

Interrupting automatic braking

It can be necessary to interrupt automatic

braking in certain situations, for instance

for an evasive maneuver.

Interrupt automatic braking:

– By pressing the brake pedal.

– By pressing the accelerator pedal.

Seite 174

CONTROLS Safety

174

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Driving stability control systems

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with

the series. It also describes features and

functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-

tions or country versions. This also applies

to safety-related functions and systems.

When using these functions and systems,

the applicable laws and regulations must be

observed.

Antilock Braking System ABS

ABS prevents locking of the wheels during

braking.

The vehicle maintains its steering power

even during full brake applications, which

increases the active safety.

ABS is ready when the drive-ready state is

switched on.

Brake assistant

When you apply the brakes rapidly, this sys-

tem automatically boosts the vehicle brak-

ing capability to the furthest possible ex-

tent. It reduces the braking distance to a

minimum during an emergency stop. This

system utilizes all of the capabilities pro-

vided by the Antilock Brake System ABS.

Do not reduce the pressure on the brake

pedal for the duration of the emergency

stop.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control

Concept

Within the physical limits, the system helps

to keep the vehicle on a steady course by

reducing engine speed and by applying

brake intervention to the individual wheels.

General information

DSC detects the following unstable driving

conditions, for instance:

– Fishtailing, which can lead to oversteer-

ing.

– Loss of traction of the front wheels,

which can lead to understeering.

Dynamic Traction Control DTC, refer to

page 176, is a version of the DSC where

drive power is optimized.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute

for the driver’s personal judgment in as-

sessing the traffic situation. Based on the

limits of the system, it cannot independ-

ently react to all traffic situations. There is

a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to

traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely

and actively intervene where appropriate.

Warning

When driving with a roof load, for in-

stance with roof-mounted luggage rack,

the vehicle's center of gravity is higher,

which increases the risk of the vehicle tip-

ping in critical driving situations. There

may be a risk of accident or risk of damage

Seite 175

Driving stability control systems CONTROLS

175

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

to property. Do not deactivate DSC Dy-

namic Stability Control when driving with

roof load.

Indicator/warning lights

The indicator light flashes: DSC con-

trols the drive and braking forces.

The indicator light lights up: DSC has

malfunctioned.

Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF

General information

When DSC is deactivated, driving stability

is reduced during acceleration and when

driving in curves.

To increase driving stability, activate DSC

again as soon as possible.

Deactivating DSC

Press and hold this button but not

longer than approx. 10 seconds, un-

til the indicator light for DSC OFF

lights up in the instrument cluster and dis-

plays DSC OFF.

DSC is switched off.

Activating DSC

Press the button.

DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator

light go out.

Indicator/warning lights

When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is dis-

played in the instrument cluster.

The indicator light lights up: DSC is

deactivated.

Automatic activation

When DSC is deactivated, automatic activa-

tion occurs in the following situations:

– The vehicle has a flat tire.

– When activating cruise control in the

TRACTION or DSC OFF settings.

DTC Dynamic Traction Con-

trol

Concept

DTC is a version of the DSC Dynamic Stabil-

ity Control where drive power is optimized.

The system ensures maximum drive power

on unusual road conditions, for instance

unplowed snow covered roads, or loose road

surfaces, but with somewhat limited driving

stability.

When DTC is activated, the vehicle has

maximum traction. Driving stability is lim-

ited during acceleration and when driving

in curves.

Drive carefully.

You may find it useful to briefly activate

DTC under the following special circum-

stances:

– When driving in slush or on uncleared,

snow-covered roads.

– When driving off from deep snow or

loose ground.

– When driving with tire chains.

Deactivating/activating DTC

Dynamic Traction Control

Activating DTC

Press the button.

Seite 176

CONTROLS Driving stability control systems

176

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

TRACTION is displayed in the instrument

cluster and the indicator light for DSC OFF

lights up.

Deactivating DTC

Press the button again.

TRACTION and the DSC OFF indica-

tor light go out.

Performance Control

Performance Control enhances the agility of

the vehicle.

To increase maneuverability, wheels are

braked individually when a sporty driving

style is used.

Adaptive chassis

Concept

The system reduces undesired vehicle

movements.

The driving dynamics and driving comfort

are enhanced depending on the road surface

condition and driving style.

MINI Driving Modes switch

Concept

The MINI Driving Modes switch helps to

fine-tune the vehicle's settings and features.

Choose between three different programs.

Pressing the MINI Driving Modes switch

will activate the particular program.

Operating the programs

Switch Program

SPORT

MID

GREEN

MID

MID provides balanced tuning.

With each starting operation, MID is acti-

vated using the Start/Stop button.

GREEN

Concept

GREEN provides consistent tuning to maxi-

mize range.

Activating GREEN

Press the MINI Driving Modes switch

downward until GREEN is displayed in the

instrument cluster.

Configuring GREEN

Via MINI Driving Modes switch

1. Activate GREEN.

2. "Configure GREEN"

3. Configure the program.

This configuration is retrieved when

GREEN is activated.

Via the Central Information Display (CID)

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. If necessary, "Driving mode"

4. "Configure GREEN"

5. Select the desired setting.

Seite 177

Driving stability control systems CONTROLS

177

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

This configuration is retrieved when

GREEN is activated.

SPORT

Concept

Consistently sporty tuning of the drivetrain

for greater driving agility.

Activating SPORT

Press the MINI Driving Modes switch up-

ward until SPORT is displayed in the instru-

ment cluster.

Configuring driving program

Settings can be made for the following driv-

ing programs in Drive mode:

– GREEN, refer to page 177.

Displays

Program selection

Pressing the MINI Driving

Modes switch displays a list of

programs, which can be se-

lected.

Selected program

The instrument cluster dis-

plays the selected program.

Drive-off assistant

Concept

This system supports driving off on uphill

grades. The parking brake is not required.

Driving off with the drive-off

assistant

1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot

brake.

2. Release the foot brake and drive off

without delay.

After the foot brake is released, the vehicle

is held in place for approx. 2 seconds.

Servotronic

Servotronic is a speed-dependent power

steering function.

The system provides the steering force with

more support at low speeds than at higher

ones. This makes it easier to park, for in-

stance, and makes steering firmer when

driving at faster speeds.

Furthermore, the steering force adapts ac-

cording to the driving program, so that a

firm, sporty feel or a comfortable steering

response is conveyed.

Seite 178

CONTROLS Driving stability control systems

178

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Driving comfort

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with

the series. It also describes features and

functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-

tions or country versions. This also applies

to safety-related functions and systems.

When using these functions and systems,

the applicable laws and regulations must be

observed.

Camera-based cruise control

Concept

Using this system, a desired speed and a

distance to a vehicle ahead can be adjusted

using the buttons on the steering wheel.

The system maintains the desired speed on

clear roads. The vehicle accelerates or

brakes automatically.

If a vehicle is driving ahead of you, the sys-

tem adjusts the speed of your vehicle so

that the set distance to the vehicle ahead is

maintained. The speed is adjusted as far as

the given situation allows.

The distance can be adjusted in several

steps. For safety reasons, it depends on the

respective speed.

With the Stop&Go function for Steptronic

transmissions: if the vehicle ahead of you

brakes to a halt, and then proceeds to drive

again shortly thereafter, the system is able

to detect this within the given system lim-

its.

General information

A camera on the interior mirror is used to

detect vehicles driving ahead.

Depending on the settings, the cruise con-

trol settings may change under certain con-

ditions.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute

for the driver’s personal judgment in as-

sessing the traffic situation. Based on the

limits of the system, it cannot independ-

ently react to all traffic situations. There is

a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to

traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely

and actively intervene where appropriate.

Warning

The desired speed can be incorrectly ad-

justed or called up by mistake. There is a

risk of accident. Adjust the desired speed

to the traffic conditions. Watch traffic

closely and actively intervene where ap-

propriate.

Warning

Risk of accident due to too high speed dif-

ferences to other vehicles, for instance in

the following situations:

– When fast approaching a slowly mov-

ing vehicle.

– Vehicle suddenly swerving into own

lane.

– When fast approaching standing ve-

hicles.

Seite 179

Driving comfort CONTROLS

179

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.

Watch traffic closely and actively inter-

vene where appropriate.

Warning

An unsecured vehicle can begin to move

and possibly roll away. There is a risk of

accident. Before exiting, secure the vehi-

cle against rolling.

In order to ensure that the vehicle is se-

cured against rolling away, follow the fol-

lowing:

– Set the parking brake.

– On uphill grades or on a downhill

slope, turn the front wheels in the di-

rection of the curb.

– On uphill grades or on a downhill

slope, also secure the vehicle, for in-

stance with a wheel chock.

Overview

Buttons on the steering wheel

Button Function

Cruise control on/off, refer to

page 181.

Pause cruise control, refer to

page 181.

Continue cruise control with the

last setting, refer to page 182.

Reduce distance, refer to

page 182.

Increase the distance, refer to

page 182.

Increase speed, refer to

page 181.

Reduce speed, refer to page 181.

Buttons are arranged according to vehicle's

series, optional features and country speci-

fications.

Camera

The camera is installed near the interior

mirror.

Keep the windshield in front of the interior

mirror clean and clear.

Functional requirements

The system is best used on well-constructed

roads.

The system is functional at speeds begin-

ning at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.

With the Stop&Go function for Steptronic

transmissions: the system can also be acti-

vated while the vehicle is stationary.

The max. speed that can be set is

85 mph/140 km/h.

Manual transmission: Active Cruise Control

is interrupted below a speed of approx.

20 mph/30 km/h. The system does not

brake to a stop.

If distance control is switched off, refer to

page 183, higher desired speeds can be se-

lected as well.

Seite 180

CONTROLS Driving comfort

180

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Switching on/off and interrupting

cruise control

Switching on

Press the button on the steering

wheel.

Instrument cluster without enhanced

features:

Display in the instrument cluster

lights up.

Instrument cluster without enhanced

features:

Display in the instrument cluster

lights up. The current speed is adopted as

desired speed and displayed with icon.

Instrument cluster with en-

hanced features:

Display in the instrument

cluster lights up. The current

speed is adopted as desired

speed and displayed with icon.

Cruise control is active and maintains the

set speed.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched

on, if necessary.

Switching off

With the Stop&Go function for Steptronic

transmissions: when switching off while

stationary, depress the brake pedal simulta-

neously.

Press the button on the steering

wheel.

The displays go out. The stored desired

speed is deleted.

Interrupting manually

Press the button on the steering

wheel.

With the Stop&Go function for Steptronic

transmission: when canceling while station-

ary, depress the brake pedal simultaneously.

Interrupting automatically

The system is automatically interrupted in

the following situations:

– When the driver applies the brakes.

– Manual transmission: when the clutch

pedal is depressed for a few seconds or

released while a gear is not engaged.

– If selector lever position N is set.

– Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti-

vated or DSC Dynamic Stability Control

is deactivated.

– If DSC Dynamic Stability Control inter-

venes.

– If the detection range of the camera is

impaired, for instance by soiling, heavy

precipitation or glare effects from the

sun.

– Manual transmission: if the vehicle in

front decelerates below a speed of ap-

prox. 20 mph/30 km/h.

– With the Stop&Go function for Step-

tronic transmissions: following a sta-

tionary period of approx. 3 seconds, af-

ter the vehicle was braked to a stop by

the system.

Setting the speed

Maintaining/storing the speed

Press or button in the interrupted

state.

When the system is switched on, the cur-

rent speed is maintained and stored as the

desired speed.

Instrument cluster without enhanced

features:

Seite 181

Driving comfort CONTROLS

181

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

The stored speed is displayed by the icon in

the Info Display of the instrument cluster.

Instrument cluster with en-

hanced features:

The stored speed is displayed.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched

on, if necessary.

Changing the speed

or button: press until the desired

speed is set.

If active, the displayed speed is stored and

the vehicle reaches the stored speed when

the road is clear.

– or button: each time it is pressed

to the point of resistance, the desired

speed increases or decreases by approx.

1 mph/1 km/h.

– or button: each time it is pressed

past the resistance point, the desired

speed changes by a maximum of 5 mph/

10 km/h.

or button: hold down to repeat the

action.

Adjusting the distance

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute

for the driver’s personal judgment. Due to

the system limits, braking can be late.

There may be a risk of accident or risk of

damage to property. Be aware to the traffic

situation at all times. Adjust the distance

to the traffic and weather conditions and

maintain the prescribed safety distance,

possibly by braking.

Reduce distance

Press the button repeatedly until

the desired distance is set.

Instrument cluster without enhanced

features:

The set distance is briefly displayed

in the left part of the Info Display of the in-

strument cluster.

Increase the distance

Press the button repeatedly until

the desired distance is set.

Instrument cluster without enhanced

features:

The set distance is briefly displayed

in the left part of the Info Display of the in-

strument cluster.

Continuing cruise control

General information

An interrupted cruise control can be contin-

ued by calling up the stored speed.

Make sure that the difference between cur-

rent speed and stored speed is not too large

before calling up the stored speed. Other-

wise, unintentional braking or accelerating

may occur.

In the following cases, the stored speed

value is deleted and cannot be called up

again:

– When the system is switched off.

– When the ignition is switched off.

Calling up the stored speed and

distance

Press the button with the system in-

terrupted. Cruise control is contin-

ued with the stored values. The in-

Seite 182

CONTROLS Driving comfort

182

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

strument cluster briefly displays the

selected distance.

Switching distance control on/off

Safety information

Warning

The system does not react to traffic driv-

ing ahead of you, but instead maintains

the stored speed. There may be a risk of

accident or risk of damage to property. Ad-

just the desired speed to the traffic condi-

tions and brake as needed.

Switching distance control off

Distance control can be switched off and on

when driving with cruise control activated.

Press and hold this button.

Or:

Press and hold this button.

The indicator light in the instrument

cluster lights up.

To switch distance control back on, press

one of the two buttons again briefly.

After changing over distance control, a

Check Control message is displayed.

Displays in the instrument cluster

Desired speed and stored speed

Instrument cluster without enhanced

features:

In addition to the indicator light, the

desired speed is displayed in the Info Dis-

play.

– Display lights up green: system is active,

the display indicates the desired speed.

– Display lights up orange: system is in-

terrupted, the display indicates the

stored speed.

– No display: system is switched off.

Instrument cluster with en-

hanced features:

– Display lights up green:

system is active, the dis-

play indicates the desired

speed.

– Speed value is illuminated gray: system

is interrupted.

– No display: system is switched off.

If no speed is indicated, it is possible that

the conditions necessary for operation are

not currently fulfilled.

Distance to vehicle ahead of you

Distance display

Distance 1

Distance 2

Distance 3

Distance 4

This value is set automatically af-

ter the system is switched on.

Instrument clusters without enhanced fea-

tures: selected distance from the vehicle

driving ahead is briefly displayed in the left

hand portion of the Info Display.

Seite 183

Driving comfort CONTROLS

183

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Detected vehicle

Instrument cluster without enhanced

features:

Icon lights up orange: a vehicle has

been detected ahead of you.

Instrument cluster with en-

hanced features:

Vehicle symbol is displayed: a

vehicle has been detected

ahead of you.

With the Stop&Go function for Step-

tronic transmissions:

Rolling bars: the detected vehicle

has driven away.

ACC does not accelerate. To accelerate, acti-

vate ACC as follows:

– By briefly pressing the accelerator

pedal.

– By pressing the RES CNCL button.

– By pressing the or button.

Indicator/warning lights

Instrument cluster without enhanced

features:

Icon flashes orange.

Instrument cluster with enhanced

features:

Vehicle symbol flashes.

The conditions are not adequate for the sys-

tem to work.

The system was deactivated but applies the

brakes until you actively resume control by

pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator

pedal.

Icon flashes red and a signal sounds:

Brake and make an evasive maneu-

ver, if necessary.

System interrupted without detected

vehicle.

System interrupted with detected ve-

hicle.

Displays in the Head-up Display

The information from Active Cruise Control

can also be displayed in the Head-up Dis-

play.

System limits

Detection range

The detection capacity of the system and

the automatic braking capacity are limited.

Two-wheeled vehicles for instance might

not be detected.

Deceleration

The system does not decelerate in the fol-

lowing situations:

– For pedestrians, cyclists or similarly

slow-moving road users.

– For red traffic lights.

– For cross traffic.

– For oncoming traffic.

– Unlit vehicles or vehicles with nonwork-

ing lighting at night.

Seite 184

CONTROLS Driving comfort

184

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Merging vehicles

A vehicle driving in front of you is not de-

tected until it is completely within the same

lane as your vehicle.

If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly

merges into your lane, the system may not

be able to automatically restore the selected

distance. It may not be possible to restore

the selected distance in certain situations,

including if you are driving significantly

faster than vehicles driving ahead of you,

for instance when rapidly approaching a

truck. When a vehicle driving ahead of you

is reliably detected, the system requests

that the driver intervene by braking and

carrying out evasive maneuvers, if needed.

With Stop&Go function for Steptronic

transmission: driving off

In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive

off automatically; for example:

– On steep uphill grades.

– In front of bumps in the road.

In these cases, press on the accelerator

pedal.

Cornering

When the desired speed is too high for a

curve, the speed is reduced slightly. Be-

cause curves may not be anticipated in ad-

vance, drive into a curve at an appropriate

speed.

The system has a limited detection range.

Situations can arise in tight curves where a

vehicle driving ahead will not be detected

or will be detected very late.

When you approach a curve the system may

briefly report vehicles in the next lane due

to the bend of the curve. If the system de-

celerates you may compensate it by briefly

accelerating. After releasing the accelerator

pedal the system is reactivated and controls

speed independently.

Weather

The following restrictions can occur under

unfavorable weather or light conditions:

– Poorer vehicle recognition.

– Short-term interruptions for vehicles

that are already recognized.

Seite 185

Driving comfort CONTROLS

185

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Examples of unfavorable weather or light

conditions:

– Wet conditions.

– Snowfall.

– Slush.

– Fog.

– Glare.

Drive attentively, and react to the current

traffic situation. If necessary, intervene ac-

tively, for instance by braking, steering or

evading.

Engine power

The desired speed may not be maintained

on uphill grades if engine power is insuffi-

cient.

Malfunction

A Check Control message is displayed if the

system fails or was automatically deacti-

vated.

The system may be limited in the following

situations:

– When an object was not correctly de-

tected.

– In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snow-

fall.

– In tight curves.

– If the field of view of the camera or the

windshield is dirty or covered.

– When driving toward bright lights.

– Up to 20 seconds after the start of the

engine, via the Start/Stop button.

– During calibration of the camera imme-

diately after vehicle delivery.

Cruise control

Concept

Using this system, a desired speed can be

adjusted using the buttons on the steering

wheel. The system maintains the desired

speed. The system accelerates and brakes

automatically as needed.

General information

The system is functional at speeds begin-

ning at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.

Depending on the settings, the cruise con-

trol settings may change under certain con-

ditions.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute

for the driver’s personal judgment in as-

sessing the traffic situation. Based on the

limits of the system, it cannot independ-

ently react to all traffic situations. There is

a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to

traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely

and actively intervene where appropriate.

Warning

The use of the system can lead to an in-

creased risk of accidents in the following

situations, for instance:

– On winding roads.

– In heavy traffic.

– On slippery roads, in fog, snow, or

wet conditions, or on a loose road

surface.

There may be a risk of accident or risk of

damage to property. Only use the system if

driving at constant speed is possible.

Seite 186

CONTROLS Driving comfort

186

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Overview

Buttons on the steering wheel

Button Function

Cruise control on/off, refer to

page 187.

Pause cruise control, refer to

page 187.

Continue cruise control with the

last setting, refer to page 188.

Increase speed, refer to

page 187.

Reduce speed, refer to page 187.

Switching on/off and interrupting

cruise control

Switching on

Press the button on the steering

wheel.

Instrument cluster without enhanced

features:

The indicator light in the instrument

cluster lights up.

Instrument cluster without enhanced

features:

The current speed is adopted as the

desired speed and is displayed with the

symbol in the instrument cluster.

Instrument cluster with en-

hanced features:

Display in the instrument

cluster lights up. The current

speed is adopted as the speed

limit.

Cruise control is active and maintains the

set speed.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched

on, if necessary.

Switching off

Press the button on the steering

wheel.

The displays go out. The stored desired

speed is deleted.

Interrupting manually

When active, press the button on

the steering wheel.

Interrupting automatically

The system is automatically interrupted in

the following situations:

– When the driver applies the brakes.

– If the clutch pedal is depressed for a few

seconds or released while a gear is not

engaged.

– If the gear engaged is too high for the

current speed.

– If selector lever position N is set.

– Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti-

vated or DSC Dynamic Stability Control

is deactivated.

– If DSC Dynamic Stability Control inter-

venes.

Setting the speed

Maintaining/storing the speed

Press or button in the interrupted

state.

When the system is switched on, the cur-

rent speed is maintained and stored as the

desired speed.

The stored speed is displayed in the instru-

ment cluster.

Seite 187

Driving comfort CONTROLS

187

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched

on, if necessary.

Changing the speed

or button: press until the desired

speed is set.

If active, the displayed speed is stored and

the vehicle reaches the stored speed when

the road is clear.

– or button: each time it is pressed

to the point of resistance, the desired

speed increases or decreases by approx.

1 mph/1 km/h.

– or button: each time it is pressed

past the resistance point, the desired

speed changes by a maximum of 5 mph/

10 km/h.

– or button: press button to resist-

ance point and hold. The vehicle acceler-

ates or decelerates without pressure on

the accelerator pedal. After the button is

released, the vehicle maintains its final

speed. Pressing the switch beyond the

resistance point causes the vehicle to

accelerate more rapidly.

Continuing cruise control

General information

An interrupted cruise control can be contin-

ued by calling up the stored speed.

Make sure that the difference between cur-

rent speed and stored speed is not too large

before calling up the stored speed. Other-

wise, unintentional braking or accelerating

may occur.

Calling up the stored speed

Press the button on the steering

wheel.

The stored speed is reached again and main-

tained.

Displays in the instrument cluster

Indicator light

Instrument cluster without enhanced

features:

Depending on how the vehicle is

equipped, the indicator light in the instru-

ment cluster indicates whether the system

is switched on.

Instrument cluster with en-

hanced features:

The indicator in the instru-

ment cluster lights up: the sys-

tem is switched on.

Desired speed and stored speed

Instrument cluster without enhanced

features:

The desired speed is displayed to-

gether with the symbol.

– Display lights up green: system is active,

the display indicates the desired speed.

– Display lights up orange: system is in-

terrupted, the display indicates the

stored speed.

– No display: system is switched off.

Instrument cluster with en-

hanced features:

The desired speed is displayed

together with the symbol.

– Display lights up green:

system is active, the dis-

play indicates the desired

speed.

– Display lights up gray: system is inter-

rupted, the display indicates the stored

speed.

– No display: system is switched off.

Seite 188

CONTROLS Driving comfort

188

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Instrument cluster without enhanced fea-

tures:

If no speed is indicated, it is possible that

the conditions necessary for operation are

not currently fulfilled.

System limits

Engine power

The desired speed is also maintained down-

hill, but may not be maintained on uphill

grades if engine power is insufficient.

PDC Park Distance Control

Concept

PDC is a support when parking. The system

detects objects behind the vehicle. If the ve-

hicle is equipped with front PDC, objects in

front of the vehicle are detected too. Ob-

jects that you are approaching slowly are in-

dicated by signal tones and a visual display.

General information

The ultrasound sensors for measuring the

distances are located in the bumpers.

The range, depending on obstacles and en-

vironmental conditions, is approx. 6 ft/2 m.

An acoustic warning is first given in the fol-

lowing situations:

– By the front middle sensors and the two

corner sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm

from the object.

– By the rear middle sensors at ap-

prox. 5 ft/1.50 m from the object.

– When a collision is imminent.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute

for the driver’s personal judgment in as-

sessing the traffic situation. There is a risk

of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic

conditions. Watch traffic and vehicle sur-

roundings closely and actively intervene

where appropriate.

Warning

Due to high speeds when PDC Park Dis-

tance Control is activated, the warning can

be delayed due to physical circumstances.

There is a risk of injury or risk of damage

to property. Avoid approaching an object

too fast. Avoid driving off fast while PDC

Park Distance Control is not yet active.

Overview

With front PDC: button in vehicle

Park assistance button

Ultrasound sensors

Ultrasound sensors of the

PDC, for instance in the bump-

ers.

Seite 189

Driving comfort CONTROLS

189

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Functional requirements

Ensure full functionality:

– Do not cover sensors, for instance with

stickers, bicycle racks or similar.

– Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.

Switching on/off

Switching on automatically

The system switches on automatically in the

following situations:

– If selector lever position R is engaged

when the engine is running.

The rearview camera also switches on.

– With front PDC: when obstacles are de-

tected behind or in front of the vehicle

by PDC and the speed is slower than ap-

prox. 2.5 mph/4 km/h.

With front PDC: automatic activation on ob-

stacle detection can be switched off. Via the

Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Parking"

4. "Automatic PDC Activation": depending

on the vehicle equipment.

5. "Automatic PDC Activation"

The setting is stored for the driver pro-

file currently used.

Automatic deactivation during

forward travel

The system switches off when a certain

driving distance or speed is exceeded.

Switch the system back on, if needed.

With front PDC: switching on/off

manually

Press the park assistance button.

– On: the LED lights up.

– Off: the LED goes out.

The rearview camera image is displayed if

the reverse gear is engaged when pressing

the park assistance button.

Depending on the equipment version, the

system cannot be switched off manually if

the reverse gear is engaged.

Warning

Signal tones

An intermittent tone indicates when the ve-

hicle is approaching an object. E.g., when an

object is detected to the left rear of the ve-

hicle, a signal tone sounds from the left rear

speaker.

The shorter the distance to the object, the

shorter the intervals.

When the distance to a detected object is

less than approx. 10 inches/25 cm, a contin-

uous tone is sounded.

With front PDC: when objects are simulta-

neously located both in front of and behind

the vehicle, an alternating continuous sig-

nal is sounded.

The signal tone is switched off, when selec-

tor lever position P is engaged on vehicles

with Steptronic transmission.

Volume

The ratio of the PDC signal tone volume to

the entertainment volume can be adjusted.

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Tone"

4. "Volume settings"

5. "PDC"

6. Set the desired value.

The setting is stored for the driver profile

currently used.

Seite 190

CONTROLS Driving comfort

190

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Visual warning

The approach of the vehicle to an object can

be shown on the Control Display. Objects

that are farther away are already displayed

on the Control Display before a signal

sounds.

A display appears as soon as Park Distance

Control (PDC) is activated.

The range of the sensors is represented in

colors: red, green and yellow.

When the image of the rearview camera is

displayed, the switch can be made to PDC:

"Rear view camera"

System limits

Safety information

Warning

The system is designed to operate in cer-

tain conditions and circumstances. Due to

conditions or other factors, the system

may not respond. There may be a risk of

accident or risk of damage to property. Ac-

tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the

information in this Owner’s Manual re-

garding the scope of the system’s opera-

tion and limitations.

Limits of ultrasonic measurement

The detection of objects with ultrasonic

measurements can run into physical limits,

for instance under the following conditions:

– For small children and animals.

– For persons with certain clothing, for in-

stance coats.

– With external interference of the ultra-

sound, for instance from passing vehi-

cles or loud machines.

– When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam-

aged or out of position.

– If cargo protrudes.

– Under certain weather conditions such

as high relative humidity, wet condi-

tions, snowfall, extreme heat, or strong

wind.

– With tow bars and trailer couplings of

other vehicles.

– With thin or wedge-shaped objects.

– With moving objects.

– With elevated, protruding objects such

as ledges or cargo.

– With objects with corners and sharp

edges.

– With objects with a fine surface struc-

ture such as fences.

– For objects with porous surfaces.

– Low objects already displayed, for in-

stance curbs, can move into the blind

area of the sensors before or after a con-

tinuous tone sounds.

False warnings

The system may issue a warning under the

following conditions even though there is

no obstacle within the detection range:

– In heavy rain.

– When sensors are very dirty or covered

with ice.

– When sensors are covered in snow.

– On rough road surfaces.

– On uneven surfaces, such as speed

bumps.

– In large buildings with right angles and

smooth walls, for instance in under-

ground garages.

– In automatic car washes.

– Due to heavy exhaust.

– Due to other ultrasound sources, for in-

stance sweeping machines, high pres-

sure steam cleaners or neon lights.

Seite 191

Driving comfort CONTROLS

191

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

The malfunction is signaled by a contin-

uous tone alternating between the front

and rear speakers. As soon as the mal-

function due to other ultrasound sources

is no longer present, the system is again

fully functional.

With front PDC: to reduce false alarms,

switch off automatic PDC activation on ob-

stacle detection, for instance in car washes;

see Switching on/off.

Malfunction

A Check Control message is displayed in the

instrument cluster.

Red icon is displayed, and the range

of the sensors is dimmed on the Con-

trol Display.

PDC has failed. Have the system checked by

a dealer's service center or another qualified

service center or repair shop.

Rearview camera

Concept

The rearview camera provides assistance in

parking and maneuvering backwards. The

area behind the vehicle is shown on the

Control Display.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute

for the driver’s personal judgment in as-

sessing the traffic situation. There is a risk

of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic

conditions. Watch traffic and vehicle sur-

roundings closely and actively intervene

where appropriate.

Overview

Depending on the vehicle equipment:

button in the vehicle

Park assistance button

Camera

The camera lens is located in the handle of

the tailgate.

The image quality may be impaired by dirt.

If necessary, clean the camera lens.

Switching on/off

Switching on automatically

The system is switched on automatically if

selector lever position R is engaged when

the engine is running.

Automatic deactivation during

forward travel

The system switches off when a certain

driving distance or speed is exceeded.

Seite 192

CONTROLS Driving comfort

192

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Switch the system back on, if needed.

Depending on the vehicle equipment:

switching on/off manually

Press the park assistance button.

– On: the LED lights up.

– Off: the LED goes out.

The parking assistance functions are shown

on the Control Display.

Switching the view via the Central

Information Display (CID)

If the rearview camera view is not dis-

played, change the view via the Central In-

formation Display (CID):

"Rear view camera"

The rearview camera image is displayed.

Display on the Control Display

Functional requirements

– The rearview camera is switched on.

– The tailgate is fully closed.

– Keep the recording range of the camera

open.

Protruding cargo or carrier systems that

are not connected to a trailer power

socket can lead to malfunctions.

Activating assistance functions

More than one assistance function can be

active at the same time.

– Parking aid lines

"Parking aid lines"

Lanes and turning radius lines are indi-

cated.

– Obstacle marking

"Obstacle marking"

Obstacles are marked, depending on the

vehicle equipment.

Lanes

Lanes can be superimposed on the image of

the rearview camera.

Lanes help you to estimate the space re-

quired when parking and maneuvering on

level roads.

Lanes depend on the current steering angle

and are continuously adjusted to the steer-

ing wheel movements.

Turning radius lines

Turning radius lines can be superimposed

on the image of the rearview camera.

Turning radius lines show the course of the

smallest possible turning radius on a level

road.

Only one turning radius line is displayed af-

ter the steering wheel is turned past a cer-

tain angle.

Seite 193

Driving comfort CONTROLS

193

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Obstacle marking

Depending on the vehicle equipment, obsta-

cle markings can be faded into the image of

the rearview camera.

The colored thresholds of the obstacle mark-

ings match the markings of the PDC Park

Distance Control.

Parking using lanes and turning

radius lines

1. Position the vehicle so that the turning

radius lines lead to within the limits of

the parking space.

2. Turn the steering wheel to the point

where the lane covers the corresponding

turning radius line.

Display settings

Brightness

With the rearview camera switched on:

1. Select the icon.

2. Turn the Controller until the desired set-

ting is reached and press the Controller.

Contrast

With the rearview camera switched on:

1. Select the icon.

2. Turn the Controller until the desired set-

ting is reached and press the Controller.

System limits

Detection of objects

Very low obstacles or high, protruding ob-

jects such as ledges may not be recognized

by the system.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, some

assistance functions also consider data from

the PDC Park Distance Control.

Follow the notes in the PDC Park Distance

Control chapter.

The objects displayed on the Control Dis-

play may be closer than they appear. There-

Seite 194

CONTROLS Driving comfort

194

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

fore, do not estimate the distance from the

objects on the display.

Parking assistant

Concept

This system assists the driver in parking

parallel to the road.

General information

Parking assistant handling is divided into

three steps:

– Switching on and activating.

– Parking space search.

– Parking.

Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces

on both sides of the vehicle.

The parking assistant calculates the best

possible parking line and takes control of

steering during the parking operation.

System status and instructions on required

actions are displayed on the Control Dis-

play.

A component of the parking assistant is the

PDC Park Distance Control.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute

for the driver’s personal judgment in as-

sessing the traffic situation. Based on the

limits of the system, it cannot independ-

ently react to all traffic situations. There is

a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to

traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely

and actively intervene where appropriate.

NOTICE

The parking assistant can steer the vehicle

over or onto curbs. There is a risk of dam-

age to property, among other potential

damage. Watch traffic closely and actively

intervene where appropriate.

The safety information of the PDC Park Dis-

tance Control applies in addition.

Overview

Button in the vehicle

Park assistance button

Seite 195

Driving comfort CONTROLS

195

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Ultrasound sensors

The ultrasound sensors for measuring park-

ing spaces are located on the wheel hous-

ing.

Functional requirements

Ultrasound sensors

Ensure full functionality:

– Do not cover sensors, for instance with

stickers.

– Keep the sensors clean and unob-

structed.

For measuring parking spaces

– Maximum speed while driving forward

approx. 22 mph/35 km/h.

– Maximum distance to row of parked ve-

hicles: 5 ft/1.5 m.

Suitable parking space

– Gaps behind an object that has a min.

length of 5 ft/1.5 m.

– Gap between two objects with a mini-

mum length of approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.

– Min. length of gap between two objects:

your vehicle's length plus approx.

3.3 ft/1.0 m.

– Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.

For the parking operation

– Doors and tailgate are closed.

– The parking brake is released.

– When parking in parking spaces on the

driver's side, the corresponding turn sig-

nal must be switched on.

Switching on and activating

Switching on with the button

Press the park assistance button.

The LED lights up.

The current status of the parking space

search is indicated on the Control Display.

Parking assistant is activated automati-

cally.

Switching on with reverse gear

Shift into reverse.

The current status of the parking space

search is indicated on the Control Display.

To activate: "Parking Assistant"

Display on the Control Display

System activated/deactivated

Icon Meaning

Gray: the system is not available.

White: the system is available but

not activated.

The system is activated.

Seite 196

CONTROLS Driving comfort

196

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Parking space search and system

status

– Symbol P on the vehicle image: the park-

ing assistant is activated and the park-

ing space search is active.

– Control Display shows suitable parking

spaces at the edge of the road next to

the vehicle symbol. When the parking

assistant is active, suitable parking

spaces are highlighted.

– The parking operation is

active. The system takes

over the steering.

– Parking space search is always active

whenever the vehicle is moving forward

slow and straight, even if the system is

deactivated. When the system is deacti-

vated, the displays on the Control Dis-

play are shown in gray.

Parking using the parking assistant

Parking

1. Press the park assistance button or

shift into reverse gear to switch on the

parking assistant, refer to page 196. Ac-

tivate the parking assistant, if needed.

Parking assistant is activated.

2. Pass the row of parked vehicles at a

speed of up to approx. 22 mph/35 km/h

and at a distance of maximum

5 ft/1.5 m.

The status of the parking space search

and possible parking spaces are dis-

played on the Control Display, refer to

page 196.

3. Follow the instructions on the Control

Display.

The parking assistant takes control of

steering during the parking operation.

The driver takes over braking and accel-

erating.

The best possible parking position will

come after gear change on the station-

ary vehicle - wait for the automatic

steering wheel move.

The end of the parking operation is indi-

cated on the Control Display.

4. Adjust the parking position yourself, if

needed.

Interrupting manually

The parking assistant can be interrupted at

any time:

– Press the park assistance button.

– "Parking Assistant"

Interrupting automatically

The system is interrupted automatically in

the following situations:

– If the driver grasps the steering wheel

or takes over steering.

– If a gear is selected that does not match

the instruction on the Control Display.

– If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.

6 mph/10 km/h.

– Possibly on snow-covered or slippery

road surfaces.

Seite 197

Driving comfort CONTROLS

197

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

– If a maximum number of parking at-

tempts or the time taken for parking is

exceeded.

– If the PDC Park Distance Control dis-

plays clearances that are too small.

– When switching into other functions of

the radio.

A Check Control message is displayed.

Resuming

An interrupted parking operation can be

continued, if needed.

Reactivate the parking assistant, refer to

page 196, and follow the instructions on the

Control Display.

Switching off

The system can be switched off as follows:

– Press the park assistance button.

– Switching off the ignition.

System limits

Safety information

Warning

The system is designed to operate in cer-

tain conditions and circumstances. Due to

conditions or other factors, the system

may not respond. There may be a risk of

accident or risk of damage to property. Ac-

tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the

information in this Owner’s Manual re-

garding the scope of the system’s opera-

tion and limitations.

No parking assistance

The parking assistant does not offer assis-

tance in the following situations:

– In tight curves.

Functional limitations

The system may be limited in the following

situations:

– On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel

roads.

– On slippery ground.

– With accumulations of leaves/snow in

the parking space.

– With a mounted emergency wheel.

– With ditches or edges, for instance an

edge of a port.

Limits of ultrasonic measurement

The detection of objects with ultrasonic

measurements can run into physical limits,

for instance under the following conditions:

– For small children and animals.

– For persons with certain clothing, for in-

stance coats.

– With external interference of the ultra-

sound, for instance from passing vehi-

cles or loud machines.

– When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam-

aged or out of position.

– If cargo protrudes.

– Under certain weather conditions such

as high relative humidity, wet condi-

tions, snowfall, extreme heat, or strong

wind.

– With tow bars and trailer couplings of

other vehicles.

– With thin or wedge-shaped objects.

– With moving objects.

– With elevated, protruding objects such

as ledges or cargo.

– With objects with corners and sharp

edges.

– With objects with a fine surface struc-

ture such as fences.

– For objects with porous surfaces.

Seite 198

CONTROLS Driving comfort

198

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

– Low objects already displayed, for in-

stance curbs, can move into the blind

area of the sensors before or after a con-

tinuous tone sounds.

– The parking assistant may identify park-

ing spaces that are not suitable for park-

ing.

Tire size

The parking position may vary depending

on the tire size.

Malfunction

A Check Control message is displayed.

The parking assistant failed. Have the sys-

tem checked by a dealer's service center or

another qualified service center or repair

shop.

Seite 199

Driving comfort CONTROLS

199

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Climate control

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with

the series. It also describes features and

functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-

tions or country versions. This also applies

to safety-related functions and systems.

When using these functions and systems,

the applicable laws and regulations must be

observed.

Interior air quality

The air quality in the vehicle is improved by

the following components:

– Emission tested passenger compart-

ment.

– Microfilter.

– Air conditioning system to control the

temperature, air flow and recirculated-

air mode.

Depending on the equipment specification:

– Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter.

– Automatic climate control.

– Parked-car ventilation.

Seite 200

CONTROLS Climate control

200

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Air conditioner

1 Air distribution settings

2 Air flow

3 Temperature

4 Seat heating, right 85

5 Air conditioning

6 Air recirculation mode

7 Rear window defroster

8 Windshield defroster

9 Seat heating, left 85

Climate control functions in detail

Switching the system on/off

Switching on

Set any air flow.

Switching off

Turn the wheel for air flow all

the way to the left.

Temperature

Concept

The system heats or cools, depending on the

set temperature.

Adjusting

Turn the wheel to set the de-

sired temperature.

Seite 201

Climate control CONTROLS

201

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Air conditioning

Concept

The air in the car's interior will be cooled

and dehumidified and, depending on the

temperature setting, warmed again.

Functional requirement

The car's interior can only be cooled with

the engine running.

Switching on/off

Press the button.

The LED is illuminated with air con-

ditioning switched on.

Depending on the weather, the windshield

may fog up briefly when the engine is

started.

The cooling mode produces condensation,

refer to page 233, that will exit from below

the vehicle.

Air recirculation mode

Concept

You may react to unpleasant odors or pollu-

tants in the immediate environment by tem-

porarily suspending the supply of outside

air. The system then recirculates the air

flow within the vehicle.

Operation

Press the button:

The LED is illuminated when recir-

culated-air mode is switched on. The supply

of outside air is shut off.

When recirculated-air mode is switched off,

fresh air is directed into the vehicle's inte-

rior.

To prevent window condensation, recircu-

lated-air mode switches off automatically af-

ter a certain amount of time, depending on

the outside temperature.

With extended air recirculation mode, the

air quality in the interior deteriorates and

window fogging increases.

If the windows fog over, switch off air recir-

culation mode and increase the air flow, if

needed.

Air flow, manual

Concept

The air flow for climate control can be ad-

justed manually.

Adjusting

Turn the ring to set the de-

sired air flow.

The higher the air flow, the

more effective the heating or

cooling will be.

The air flow from the air conditioner may be

reduced automatically to save battery

power.

Manual air distribution

Concept

The air distribution for climate control can

be adjusted manually.

Adjusting

Turn the wheel to select the

desired program or the desired

intermediate setting.

– Windows.

– Upper body region.

– Floor area.

– Windows, upper body region, and

floor area.

Seite 202

CONTROLS Climate control

202

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

To defrost windows and remove

condensation

Make the following settings to defrost the

windows and remove condensation:

– Direct the air distribution onto the win-

dows.

– Increasing the air flow.

– Increase the temperature.

– Switch on air conditioning if needed.

Windshield defroster

Press the button. The LED lights up.

The front window defroster

switches off automatically after a certain

period of time.

Rear window defroster

Press the button. The LED lights up.

The rear window defroster switches

off automatically after a certain period of

time.

When GREEN drive mode is activated, the

heating output is reduced.

Microfilter

In external and recirculated-air mode, the

microfilter filters dust and pollen from the

air.

Have this filter changed during vehicle

maintenance, refer to page 277.

Automatic climate control

1 Temperature, left

2 Display

3 Air flow, AUTO intensity

4 AUTO program

5 Air distribution, manual

6 Display

7 Temperature, right

8 Seat heating, right 85

Seite 203

Climate control CONTROLS

203

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

9 Maximum cooling

10 Air conditioning

11 Air recirculation mode

12 Rear window defroster

13 Windshield defroster

14 To defrost windows and remove conden-

sation

15 Seat heating, left 85

Climate control functions in detail

Switching the system on/off

Switching on

Set any air flow.

Switching off

Turn wheel for air flow to the

left until the control switches

off.

Temperature

Concept

The automatic climate control achieves the

set temperature as quickly as possible, if

necessary by using the maximum cooling or

heating power, and then keeps it constant.

Adjusting

Turn the wheel to set the de-

sired temperature.

Do not rapidly switch between different

temperature settings. The automatic climate

control will not have sufficient time to ad-

just the set temperature.

Air conditioning

Concept

The air in the car's interior will be cooled

and dehumidified and, depending on the

temperature setting, warmed again.

Functional requirement

The car's interior can only be cooled with

the engine running.

Switching on/off

Press the button.

The LED is illuminated with air con-

ditioning switched on.

Depending on the weather, the windshield

may fog up briefly when the engine is

started.

Air conditioning is switched on automati-

cally with the AUTO program.

The cooling mode produces condensation,

refer to page 233, that will exit from below

the vehicle.

Maximum cooling

Concept

The system is set to the lowest temperature,

maximum air flow and recirculated-air

mode.

Functional requirement

The function is available at outside temper-

atures above approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and with

the engine running.

Seite 204

CONTROLS Climate control

204

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Switching on/off

Press the button.

The LED is illuminated with the

system switched on.

Air flows out of the vents to the upper body

region. The vents need to be open for this.

The air flow can be adjusted when maxi-

mum cooling is switched on.

AUTO program

Concept

The AUTO program cools, ventilates or

heats the car's interior automatically.

For this, the air flow, air distribution and

temperature are regulated depending on the

settings and the interior temperature.

Switching on/off

Press the button.

The LED is illuminated with the

AUTO program switched on.

Depending on the selected temperature,

AUTO intensity and outside influences, the

air is directed to the windshield, side win-

dows, upper body, and into the floor area.

Point the side vents toward the side win-

dows.

The following features are switched on au-

tomatically with the AUTO program:

– Air conditioning, refer to page 204.

To switch off the program: press the button

again or manually adjust the air distribu-

tion.

Controlling the intensity of the air flow

With the AUTO program switched on, the

intensity can be adjusted. This changes the

automatic control for the air mass.

Turn the wheel to set the de-

sired intensity from soft to in-

tensive.

The set intensity is displayed via the posi-

tion of the illuminated LED segment.

Air recirculation mode

Concept

You may react to unpleasant odors or pollu-

tants in the immediate environment by tem-

porarily suspending the supply of outside

air. The system then recirculates the air

flow within the vehicle.

Operation

Press the button:

The LED is illuminated when recir-

culated-air mode is switched on. The supply

of outside air is shut off.

When recirculated-air mode is switched off,

fresh air is directed into the vehicle's inte-

rior.

To prevent window condensation, recircu-

lated-air mode switches off automatically af-

ter a certain amount of time, depending on

the outside temperature.

With extended air recirculation mode, the

air quality in the interior deteriorates and

window fogging increases.

If the windows fog over, switch off air recir-

culation mode and increase the air flow, if

needed.

Air flow, manual

Concept

The air flow for climate control can be ad-

justed manually.

Seite 205

Climate control CONTROLS

205

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

General information

To adjust the air flow manually switch off

AUTO program first.

Adjusting

Turn the ring to set the de-

sired air flow.

The manually adjusted air flow is displayed

via illuminated LED segments.

The air flow of the automatic climate con-

trol may be reduced automatically to save

battery power.

Manual air distribution

Concept

The air distribution for climate control can

be adjusted manually.

Adjusting

Press the button repeatedly to se-

lect a program:

– Windows, upper body region, and floor

area.

– Upper body region and floor area.

– Floor area.

– Windows and floor area.

– Windows.

– Windows and upper body region.

– Upper body region.

To defrost windows and remove

condensation

Concept

Ice and condensation are quickly removed

from the windshield and the front side win-

dows.

Switching on/off

Press the button.

The LED is illuminated with the

system switched on.

The air flow can be adjusted with the pro-

gram active.

If there is window condensation, switch on

the climate control function as well.

Windshield defroster

Press the button. The LED lights up.

The front window defroster

switches off automatically after a certain

period of time.

Rear window defroster

Press the button. The LED lights up.

The rear window defroster switches

off automatically after a certain period of

time.

When GREEN drive mode is activated, the

heating output is reduced.

Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter

In external and recirculated-air mode, the

microfilter/activated charcoal filter filters

dust, pollen, and gaseous pollutants out of

the air.

Have this filter changed during vehicle

maintenance, refer to page 277.

Ventilation

Setting

The air flow directions can be individually

adjusted:

– Direct ventilation:

Seite 206

CONTROLS Climate control

206

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

The air flow is directly pointed onto the

person. The air flow heats or cools no-

ticeably, depending on the adjusted tem-

perature.

– Indirect ventilation:

If the vents are fully or partly closed, the

air is directly routed into the car's inte-

rior.

Front ventilation

– Turn knob for continuous opening and

closing of the vents.

– Swivel the vents to alter the direction of

the vent flow, arrows.

Parked-car ventilation

Concept

The parked-car ventilation ventilates the

car's interior and lowers its temperature, if

needed.

General information

The parked-car ventilation can be switched

on and off directly or by using two preset

activation times. The system remains

switched on for 30 minutes.

The parked-car ventilation system is oper-

ated via the Central Information Display

(CID).

Functional requirements

– Direct operation: vehicle is in radio-

ready state.

– Direct operation or preset activation

time: does not depend on outside tem-

perature.

– Battery is sufficiently charged.

If parked-car ventilation is switched on,

the vehicle battery will be discharged.

Thus, limit the maximum activation time

to save the vehicle battery. The system

will be available again after the engine

is started or after a short trip.

– Make sure that the vehicle's date and

time are set correctly.

– Open the vents to allow air to flow out.

Switching on/off directly

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. If necessary, "Climate functions"

4. "Activate comfort ventilation now"

The icon on the automatic climate con-

trol flashes if the system is switched on.

Preselecting the activation time

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. If necessary, "Climate functions"

4. "Comfort ventilation"

5. Select the desired activation time.

6. Set the desired time.

Activating the activation time

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

Seite 207

Climate control CONTROLS

207

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. If necessary, "Climate functions"

4. "For start time at:"

Activate the desired activation time.

The icon on the automatic climate con-

trol lights up when the activation time is ac-

tivated.

The icon on the automatic climate con-

trol flashes when the system has been

switched on.

The system will only be switched on within

the next 24 hours. After that, it needs to be

reactivated.

Seite 208

CONTROLS Climate control

208

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Interior equipment

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with

the series. It also describes features and

functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-

tions or country versions. This also applies

to safety-related functions and systems.

When using these functions and systems,

the applicable laws and regulations must be

observed.

Integrated Universal Remote

Control

Concept

The integrated Universal Remote Control in

the interior mirror can operate up to 3 func-

tions of remote-controlled systems such as

garage door drives, barriers, or lighting sys-

tems.

General information

The Integrated Universal Remote Control

replaces up to 3 different hand-held trans-

mitters. To operate the remote control, the

buttons on the interior mirror must be pro-

grammed with the desired functions. The

hand-held transmitter for the particular sys-

tem is required in order to program the re-

mote control.

Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored

functions for the sake of security.

If possible, do not install the antenna of the

remote-controlled system, e.g. the garage

door drive, near metal objects to ensure the

best possible operation.

Safety information

Warning

The operation of remote-controlled sys-

tems with the integrated universal remote

control, such as the garage door, may re-

sult in injury, for example, body parts be-

coming jammed in a garage door. There is

a risk of injury or risk of damage to prop-

erty. Make sure that the area of movement

of the respective system is clear during

programming and operation. Also follow

the safety information of the hand-held

transmitter.

Compatibility

If this symbol is printed on the pack-

aging or in the owner's manual of the

system to be controlled, the system

is generally compatible with the integrated

Universal Remote Control.

Additional questions are answered by:

– A dealer's service center or another

qualified service center or repair shop.

– www.homelink.com on the Internet.

HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gen-

tex Corporation.

Seite 209

Interior equipment CONTROLS

209

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Overview

1 LED

2 Programmable keys

3 Hand-held transmitters of the system

Programming

General information

The battery of the hand-held transmitter

must be fully charged at the time of pro-

gramming to ensure an optimal range of the

integrated universal remote control.

1. Switch on the ignition.

2. Initial setup:

Press and hold the two outer buttons on

the interior mirror simultaneously for

approximately 10 seconds until the LED

flashes green rapidly. This erases all pro-

gramming of the buttons on the interior

mirror.

3. Press the interior mirror button to be

programmed. The LED on the interior

mirror will slowly begin flashing orange.

4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the

system to be used approx. 1 to 12 in/2.5

to 30 cm away from the buttons on the

interior mirror. The required distance

depends on the hand-held transmitter.

5. Press and hold the button of the desired

function on the hand-held transmitter.

Canada: if programming with the hand-

held transmitter was interrupted, hold

down the interior mirror button and re-

peatedly press and release the hand-held

transmitter button for 2 seconds.

– The LED lights up green: program-

ming completed.

Release the button.

– The LED flashes fast: programming

is not complete.

Press the button on the interior mir-

ror for 2 seconds and release. Per-

form this procedure three times to

complete the programming proce-

dure.

If the integrated universal remote

control remains nonoperational, con-

tinue with the special features for

change code wireless systems.

– LED does not flash green after

60 seconds: programming not com-

pleted.

Repeat steps 3 to 6.

To program other functions on other but-

tons, repeat steps 3 to 5.

Special feature of the rolling code

wireless system

If you are unable to operate the system af-

ter repeated programming, please check if

the system to be controlled features a roll-

ing code radio system.

Refer to the owner's manual for the system.

For systems with a rolling code radio sys-

tem, the integrated Universal Remote Con-

trol and the system also have to be

synchronized.

Please read the owner's manual to find out

how to synchronize the system.

Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a

second person.

Synchronizing the universal remote control

with the system:

Seite 210

CONTROLS Interior equipment

210

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

1. Park the vehicle within range of the re-

mote-controlled system.

2. Program the relevant button on the inte-

rior mirror as described.

3. Locate and press the synchronizing but-

ton on the system being programmed,

e.g. at the garage gate. You have approx.

30 seconds for the next step.

4. Hold down the programmed button on

the interior mirror for approximately

3 seconds and then release it. If neces-

sary, repeat this step up to three times

in order to finish synchronization. Once

synchronization is complete, the pro-

grammed function will be carried out.

Reprogramming individual buttons

1. Switch on the ignition.

2. Press and hold the interior mirror but-

ton to be programmed.

3. As soon as the LED on the interior mir-

ror flashes orange after approx. 20 sec-

onds, release the button.

4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the

system to be used approx. 1 to 12 in/2.5

to 30 cm away from the buttons on the

interior mirror. The required distance

depends on the hand-held transmitter.

5. Press and hold the button of the desired

function on the hand-held transmitter.

Canada: if programming with the hand-

held transmitter was interrupted, hold

down the interior mirror button and re-

peatedly press and release the hand-held

transmitter button for 2 seconds.

6. The LED can light up in different ways.

– The LED lights up green: the pro-

gramming procedure is completed.

Release the button.

– The LED flashes fast: the hand-held

transmitter was detected but pro-

gramming is not complete.

Press the button on the interior mir-

ror for 2 seconds and release. Per-

form this procedure three times to

complete the programming proce-

dure.

If the integrated universal remote

control remains nonoperational, con-

tinue with the special features for

change code wireless systems.

– LED does not flash green after

60 seconds: programming not com-

pleted.

Repeat steps 3 to 6.

If the programming procedure is not com-

pleted, the previous programming will re-

main unchanged.

Operation

Warning

The operation of remote-controlled sys-

tems with the integrated universal remote

control, such as the garage door, may re-

sult in injury, for example, body parts be-

coming jammed in a garage door. There is

a risk of injury or risk of damage to prop-

erty. Make sure that the area of movement

of the respective system is clear during

programming and operation. Also follow

the safety information of the hand-held

transmitter.

The system, such as the garage door, can be

operated using the button on the interior

mirror while the engine is running or when

the ignition is started. To do this, hold down

the button within receiving range of the

system until the function is activated. The

interior mirror LED stays lit while the wire-

less signal is being transmitted.

Deleting stored functions

All stored functions will be deleted. The

functions cannot be deleted individually.

Seite 211

Interior equipment CONTROLS

211

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Press and hold the two outer buttons on the

interior mirror simultaneously for approxi-

mately 10 seconds until the LED on the in-

terior mirror flashes green rapidly.

Digital compass

Overview

1 Control button

2 Mirror display

Mirror display

The compass shows the current driving di-

rection.

Operating concept

Various functions can be called up by press-

ing the control button with a pointed object,

such as the tip of a ballpoint pen or similar

object. The following setting options are

displayed in succession, depending on how

long the control button is pressed:

– Pressed briefly: turns display on/off.

– 3 to 6 seconds: compass zone setting.

– 6 to 9 seconds: compass calibration.

– 9 to 12 seconds: left/right-hand steering

setting.

– 12 to 15 seconds: language setting.

Setting the compass zones

Sets the particular compass zones on the ve-

hicle so that the compass operates correctly;

refer to World map with compass zones.

Seite 212

CONTROLS Interior equipment

212

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

World map with magnetic zones

Procedure

1. Press and hold the control button for ap-

prox. 3 to 4 seconds. The number of the

set compass zone appears in the mirror.

2. To change the zone setting, press the

control button quickly and repeatedly

until the number of the compass zone

that corresponds with your location ap-

pears in the mirror.

The set zone is stored automatically. The

compass is ready for use again after approx-

imately 10 seconds.

Calibrating the digital compass

The digital compass must be calibrated in

the event of the following:

– The wrong compass point is displayed.

– The point of the compass displayed does

not change despite changing the direc-

tion of travel.

– Not all points of the compass are dis-

played.

Procedure

1. Make sure that there are no large metal-

lic objects or overhead power lines near

the vehicle and that there is sufficient

room to drive around in a circle.

2. Set the currently applicable compass

zone.

3. Press and hold the control button for ap-

prox. 6 to 7 seconds so that "C" appears

on the display. Next, drive in a complete

circle at least once at a speed of no more

than 4 mph/7 km/h. If calibration is suc-

cessful, the "C" is replaced by the points

of the compass.

Left/right-hand steering

The digital compass is already set for right

or left-hand steering at the factory.

Setting the language

Press and hold the control button for ap-

prox. 12 to 13 seconds. Briefly press the

Seite 213

Interior equipment CONTROLS

213

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

control button again to switch between

English "E" and German "O".

Settings are stored automatically after ap-

proximately 10 seconds.

Sun visor

Glare shield

To provide protection against glare, fold the

sun visor down or pivot it to the side.

Vanity mirror

A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor

behind a cover.

When the cover is opened, the mirror light-

ing switches on.

Dashboard

Decorative trim

Customizable decorative trim is available

for the dashboard on the driver’s side and

on the passenger's side.

Follow the assembly instructions.

Ashtray/cigarette lighter

Overview

The ashtray is located in one of the frontal

cup holders, the cigarette lighter above it in

the center console.

Ashtray

In order to empty the ashtray, remove the

ashtray from the cup holder.

Cigarette lighter

Safety information

Warning

Contact with the hot heating element or

the hot socket of the cigarette lighter can

cause burns. Flammable materials can ig-

nite if the cigarette lighter falls down or is

held against the objects. There is a risk of

fire and injuries. There is a risk of damage

to property, among other potential dam-

age. Take hold of the cigarette lighter by

its handle. Make sure that children do not

use the cigarette lighter.

Seite 214

CONTROLS Interior equipment

214

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

NOTICE

If metal objects fall into the socket, they

can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of

damage to property, among other potential

damage. Replace the cigarette lighter or

socket cover again after using the socket.

Operation

Push in the cigarette lighter.

The cigarette lighter can be

removed as soon as it pops

back out.

Sockets

Concept

The lighter socket can be used as a socket

for electrical equipment while the ignition

is switched on or the engine is running.

General information

The total load of all sockets must not exceed

140 watts at 12 volts.

Do not damage the socket by using non-

compatible connectors.

Safety information

Warning

Devices and cables in the unfolding area of

the airbags, such as portable navigation

devices, can hinder the unfolding of the

airbag or be thrown around in the car's in-

terior during unfolding. There is a risk of

injury. Make sure that devices and cables

are not in the airbag's area of unfolding.

NOTICE

Battery chargers for the vehicle battery

can work with high voltages and currents,

which means that the 12 volt electrical

system can be overloaded or damaged.

There is a risk of damage to property,

among other potential damage. Only con-

nect battery chargers for the vehicle bat-

tery to the starting aid terminals in the en-

gine compartment.

NOTICE

If metal objects fall into the socket, they

can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of

damage to property, among other potential

damage. Replace the cigarette lighter or

socket cover again after using the socket.

In the center console

Remove the cover or cigarette lighter.

Seite 215

Interior equipment CONTROLS

215

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

In the cargo area

The socket is located on the right side in

the cargo area.

USB port

General information

Follow the information regarding the con-

nection of mobile devices to the USB port in

the section on USB connections, refer to

page 55.

In the center console

Depending on the equipment version, a USB

port Type A or a USB port Type A and a USB

port Type C are located in the front of the

center console.

Properties of upper USB port:

– USB port Type A.

– For charging mobile devices and for

data transfer.

– Charge current: max. 1.5 A.

Properties of lower USB port:

– USB port Type C.

– For charging mobile devices and for

data transfer.

– Charge current: max. 3 A.

Wireless charging tray

Concept

The wireless charging tray enables the fol-

lowing functions to be performed without

cables:

– Charging the rechargeable battery of a

mobile phone with Qi capability and of

other mobile devices, which support the

Qi standard.

– Connect the mobile phone to the exter-

nal antenna.

Depending on the country, this provides

for better network reception and a con-

sistent reproduction quality.

General information

When inserting the mobile phone, make

sure there are no objects between it and the

wireless charging tray.

During charging, the surface of the tray and

the mobile phone may become warm.

Higher temperatures may lead to a reduc-

tion in the charge current through the mo-

bile phone, and in isolated cases the charg-

ing process is paused temporarily. Follow

the relevant instructions in the mobile

phone owner's manual.

NOTE

This device has been tested for human ex-

posure limits and found compliant at a mini-

mum distance of 4 in/10 cm during opera-

tion.

Seite 216

CONTROLS Interior equipment

216

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Therefore, a distance of 4 in/10 cm must be

maintained in every direction when operat-

ing the device.

Mounting position of the product.

Safety information

Warning

When charging a device that meets the Qi

standard in the wireless charging tray, any

metal objects located between the device

and the tray can become very hot. Placing

storage devices or electronic cards, such

as chip cards, cards with magnetic strips

or cards for signal transmission, between

the device and the tray may impair the

card function. There is a risk of injury and

risk of damage to property. When charg-

ing mobile devices, make sure there are no

objects between the device and the tray.

NOTICE

The tray is intended for mobile phones up

to a particular size. Forceful inserting of

the mobile phone into the tray can damage

the tray or the mobile phone. There is a

risk of damage to property, among other

potential damage. Observe the maximum

dimensions for mobile phones. Do not

force the mobile phone into the tray.

Functional requirements

– Ignition or standby state is switched on.

– The mobile phone must compatibly sup-

port the required Qi standard. Compati-

ble mobile phones, refer to page 53.

If the mobile phone does not support the

Qi standard, the mobile phone can be

charged using a special Qi-compatible

charging case.

– Use only protective jackets and covers

up to a maximum thickness of

0.07 in/2 mm. Otherwise, the charging

function may be impaired.

– The mobile phone must not exceed the

maximum size of approximately 5.9 x

3.07 x 0.62 in/150 x 78 x 16 mm.

Overview

The wireless charging tray is located in the

center armrest.

1 Front holder with LED

2 Storage area

3 Movable clamp

Inserting the mobile phone

1. Open the center armrest.

2. Push back the clamp.

Seite 217

Interior equipment CONTROLS

217

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

3. Insert the mobile phone with the display

facing upward in the direction of the

front holder, arrow 1.

4. Place the mobile phone in the storage

area, arrow 2.

5. Push the clamp forward and clamp the

mobile phone in the tray.

6. Close the center armrest.

Removing the mobile phone

1. Open the center armrest.

2. Push the clamp back and remove the

mobile phone.

LED displays

Color Meaning

Blue The mobile phone is charging.

Depending on the model, the

blue LED is no longer illuminated

once the inserted mobile phone

with Qi capability is fully

charged.

Or-

ange

The mobile phone is not charg-

ing.

Temperature on the mobile

phone possibly too high or for-

eign object in the charging tray.

Red The mobile phone is not charg-

ing.

Contact a dealer’s service center

or another qualified service cen-

ter or repair shop.

System limits

At high temperatures on the mobile phone

or in the vehicle, the charging functions of

the mobile phone may be limited and some

functions may no longer work.

LTE-Compensator - Information

and User Manual

Your car is equipped with a wireless charg-

ing tray (WCA) to charge your mobile phone

and connect it to the mobile network. To en-

sure the best possible connection a signal

booster (LTE-Compensator) is used in con-

junction with the WCA. The following para-

graphs refer to this booster:

This is a CONSUMER device.

BEFORE USE, you MUST REGISTER THIS

DEVICE with your wireless provider and

have your provider's consent. Most wireless

providers consent to the use of Compensa-

tors. Some providers may not consent to the

use of this device on their network. If you

Seite 218

CONTROLS Interior equipment

218

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

are unsure, contact your provider. You

MUST operate this device with approved an-

tennas and cables as specified by the manu-

facturer. Antennas MUST be installed at

least 20 cm (8 inches) from any person. You

MUST cease operating this device immedi-

ately if requested by the FCC or a licensed

wireless service provider. Warning E911 lo-

cation information may not be provided or

may be inaccurate for calls served by using

this device.

Please observe additionally the following in-

formation

– Sprint Nextel will allow consumers to

their toll-free number.

– T-Mobile online registration link:

(www.T-Mobile.com/BoosterRegistra-

tion); (https://saqat.t-mobile.com/sites/

SignalBooster#).

– Verizon’s online registration link:

(http://www.verizonwireless.com/

wcms/consumer/register-signal-boos-

ter.html).

– AT&T online registration link (https://

securec45.securewebsession.com/

attsignalbooster.com/).

– U.S.Cellular online registration link

(http://www.uscellular.com/uscellular/

support/fcc-booster-registration.jsp).

Before use you must register your booster

device with your wireless provider.

If you should be requested by the FCC to

cease operating your booster, you are not

allowed to insert your mobile phone in the

charging tray anymore unless the booster is

permanently deactivated by your local MINI

dealer.

You must not remove the booster from the

car nor use it with any other than the prein-

stalled coupling device or antenna. Any

modification of the existing antenna or cou-

pling device as well as the use of other an-

tennas or coupling devices will cause the

cease of the booster´s operating license.

The booster device fulfills the network pro-

tection standards as required by the FCC,

such as intermodulation limits, oscillation

detection and gain limits.

Booster Manufacturer: Kathrein Automotive

Model Number: LTECOMPB0

Part Number: 6803145-01

FCC-ID: 2ACC7LTECOMPB0

Seite 219

Interior equipment CONTROLS

219

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Storage compartments

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with

the series. It also describes features and

functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-

tions or country versions. This also applies

to safety-related functions and systems.

When using these functions and systems,

the applicable laws and regulations must be

observed.

Safety information

Warning

Loose objects or devices with a cable con-

nection to the vehicle, for instance mobile

phones, can be thrown about the car's in-

terior while driving, for instance in the

event of an accident, braking or evasive

maneuver. There is a risk of injury. Secure

loose objects or devices with a cable con-

nection to the vehicle in the car's interior.

NOTICE

Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can

damage the dashboard. There is a risk of

damage to property, among other potential

damage. Do not use anti-slip pads.

Overview

The following storage compartments are

available in the car's interior:

– Glove compartment on the front passen-

ger side.

– Compartments in the doors.

– Storage compartment in the center arm-

rest.

– Storage compartment in front of the cup

holders.

– Clothes hooks

– Storage tray in the center console.

– Pockets on the backrests of the front

seats.

Glove compartment

Safety information

Warning

Folded open, the glove compartment pro-

trudes in the car's interior. Objects in the

glove compartment can be thrown into the

car's interior while driving, for instance in

the event of an accident, braking or eva-

sive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury.

Always close the glove compartment im-

mediately after using it.

Seite 220

CONTROLS Storage compartments

220

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Opening

Pull the handle.

The light in the glove compartment

switches on.

Closing

Fold up the cover.

Compartments in the doors

General information

There are storage compartments in the

doors.

Safety information

Warning

Breakable objects, such as glass bottles or

glasses, can break in the event of an acci-

dent or a braking or evasive maneuver.

Broken glass can be scattered in the car's

interior. There is a risk of injury or risk of

damage to property. Do not use any break-

able objects while driving. Only stow

breakable objects in closed storage com-

partments.

Center armrest

General information

The center armrest contains a storage com-

partment.

Opening

Press button, arrow 1, and open center arm-

rest upward, arrow 2.

Adjusting the height

Press button, arrow 1, and swing center

armrest upward or downward into the de-

sired height, arrow 2.

Seite 221

Storage compartments CONTROLS

221

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Cup holders

Safety information

Warning

Unsuitable containers in the cup holders

may damage the cup holders or be thrown

about the car’s interior in the event of an

accident, an evasive maneuver, or forceful

braking. Spilled liquids can distract from

the traffic conditions and lead to an acci-

dent. Hot drinks can damage the cup

holder or lead to scalding. There is a risk

of injury or risk of damage to property. Do

not force objects into the cup holder. Use

lightweight, shatterproof, and sealable

containers. Do not transport hot bever-

ages.

Front

In the center console.

Rear

For 3-door models: in front of the rear seats

and in the side armrests.

For 5-door models: in front of the rear seats.

Clothes hooks

General information

3-door model: The clothes hooks are located

above the side windows in the rear.

5-door model: The clothes hooks are located

above the rear doors.

Safety information

Warning

Clothing articles on the clothes hooks can

obstruct the view while driving. There is a

risk of accident. When suspending cloth-

ing articles from the clothes hooks, ensure

Seite 222

CONTROLS Storage compartments

222

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

that they will not obstruct the driver's

view.

Warning

Improper use of the clothes hooks can lead

to a risk of objects flying about during

braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a

risk of injury and risk of damage to prop-

erty. Only hang lightweight objects, for in-

stance clothing articles, from the clothes

hooks.

Seite 223

Storage compartments CONTROLS

223

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Cargo area

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with

the series. It also describes features and

functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-

tions or country versions. This also applies

to safety-related functions and systems.

When using these functions and systems,

the applicable laws and regulations must be

observed.

Safety information

Warning

High gross weight can overheat the tires,

damage them internally and cause a sud-

den drop in tire inflation pressure. Driving

characteristics may be negatively im-

pacted, reducing lane stability, lengthen-

ing the braking distances and changing

the steering response. There is a risk of

accident. Pay attention to the permitted

load capacity of the tires and never exceed

the permitted gross weight.

Warning

Loose objects or devices with a cable con-

nection to the vehicle, for instance mobile

phones, can be thrown about the car's in-

terior while driving, for instance in the

event of an accident, braking or evasive

maneuver. There is a risk of injury. Secure

loose objects or devices with a cable con-

nection to the vehicle in the car's interior.

Warning

Improperly stowed objects can shift and

be thrown into the car's interior, for in-

stance in the event of an accident or dur-

ing braking and evasive maneuver. Vehi-

cle occupants can be hit and injured. There

is a risk of injury. Stow and secure objects

and cargo properly.

NOTICE

Fluids in the cargo area can cause damage.

There is a risk of damage to property,

among other potential damage. Make sure

that no fluids leak in the cargo area.

Steps for Determining Correct Load

Limit

1. Locate the statement “The combined

weight of occupants and cargo should

never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on

your vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the

driver and passengers that will be riding

in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the

driver and passengers from XXX kg or

XXX lbs

4. The resulting figure equals the available

amount of cargo and luggage load ca-

pacity. For example, if the “XXX”

amount equals 1,400 lbs and there will

be five 150 lbs passengers in your vehi-

cle, the amount of available cargo and

Seite 224

CONTROLS Cargo area

224

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (1,400 -

750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs)

5. Determine the combined weight of lug-

gage and cargo being loaded on the ve-

hicle. That weight may not safely exceed

the available cargo and luggage load ca-

pacity calculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,

load from your trailer will be transferred

to your vehicle. Consult this manual to

determine how this reduces the availa-

ble cargo and luggage load capacity of

your vehicle.

Load

On 3-door models

On 5-door models

The maximum load is the sum of the weight

of the occupants and the cargo.

The greater the weight of the occupants,

the less cargo that can be transported.

Stowing and securing cargo

– Cover sharp edges and corners on the

cargo.

– Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as pos-

sible, directly behind and at the bottom

of the rear passenger seat backrests.

– Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is

not occupied, secure each of the outer

safety belts in the opposite buckle.

– If necessary, fold down the rear back-

rests to stow large cargo.

– Do not stack cargo above the top edge of

the backrests.

– Small and light cargo: secure with

ratchet straps or draw straps.

– Larger and heavy cargo: secure with

cargo straps.

Lashing eyes in the cargo area

Without storage compartment package: to

secure the cargo there are two lashing eyes,

arrows 1, in the cargo area.

With storage compartment package: to se-

cure the cargo there are six lashing eyes, ar-

rows 1 and 2, in the cargo area.

Attach load securing aids, such as lashing

straps, tensioning straps, draw straps or

cargo nets, to the lashing eyes in the cargo

area.

Seite 225

Cargo area CONTROLS

225

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Cargo cover

General information

When the tailgate is opened, the cargo

cover is raised.

Safety information

Warning

Loose objects or devices with a cable con-

nection to the vehicle, for instance mobile

phones, can be thrown about the car's in-

terior while driving, for instance in the

event of an accident, braking or evasive

maneuver. There is a risk of injury. Secure

loose objects or devices with a cable con-

nection to the vehicle in the car's interior.

Removing

For storing bulky objects the cargo cover

can be removed.

1. Detach the left and right retaining

straps at the tailgate.

2. Pull the cargo cover out of the brackets

on the left and right.

Installing

1. Slide the cargo cover forward horizon-

tally into the two side brackets until it

audibly engages.

2. Attach the left and right retaining straps

at the tailgate.

Storage space under cargo

floor panel

Located under the cargo floor panel on the

right side is a trough for the onboard vehi-

cle tool kit.

Fold the right side of the cargo floor panel

upward to remove the onboard vehicle tool

kit.

Enlarging the cargo area

Concept

The cargo area can be enlarged as follows:

– The rear seat backrests can be folded

down.

– The rear seat backrests can be moved

into an upright loading position using

the cargo setting.

General information

The rear seat backrest is divided into two

parts at a ratio of 60 to 40. The left rear seat

backrest is connected to the center section.

The rear seat backrests can be folded down

from the rear.

Seite 226

CONTROLS Cargo area

226

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Safety information

Warning

Danger of jamming with folding down the

backrests. There is a risk of injury or risk

of damage to property. Make sure that the

area of movement of the rear backrest and

the of the head restraint is clear prior to

folding down.

Warning

If a rear seat backrest is not locked, unse-

cured cargo can be thrown about the car’s

interior; for instance, in the event of an ac-

cident, braking or an evasive maneuver.

There is a risk of injury. Make sure that

the rear seat backrest is locked after fold-

ing it back.

Warning

With a rear backrest that is not locked, the

protective function of the middle safety

belt is not guaranteed. There is a risk of

injuries or danger to life. If you are using

the middle safety belt, lock the wider rear

seat backrest.

Warning

The stability of the child restraint system

is limited or compromised with incorrect

seat setting or improper installation of the

child seat. There is a risk of injuries or

danger to life. Make sure that the child re-

straint system fits securely against the

backrest. If possible, adjust the backrest

tilt for all affected backrests and correctly

adjust the seats. Make sure that seats and

backrests are securely engaged or locked.

If possible, adjust the height of the head

restraints or remove them.

Warning

Body parts can be jammed when moving

the head restraint. There is a risk of injury.

Make sure that the area of movement is

clear when moving the head restraint.

Folding down the rear seat

backrest from the rear

1. Before the rear seat backrest is folded

down, hook the corresponding safety

belt into the belt buckle on the side.

2. Pull the lever up, arrow 1, and fold the

rear seat backrest forward, arrow 2.

Cargo position

Concept

The rear seat backrests can be moved into

an upright loading position.

Adjusting

1. Release the backrest, and tilt it forward.

Seite 227

Cargo area CONTROLS

227

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

2. Fold the frame up until it engages.

3. Fold back and engage the rear seat

backrest.

Folding back the backrest

Fold up the backrest and press it into the

latch. Make sure that the safety belt is not

caught behind the backrest or in between

the backrest and the rear seats.

Variable cargo area floor

Concept

With the variable cargo area floor, the cargo

area can be configured corresponding to

transport requirements.

General information

Follow instructions on securing cargo, refer

to page 224.

Removing the cargo floor panel

On 5-door models: To change the position of

the cargo floor panel, first fold up the rear

part of the cargo floor panel.

Grasp the cargo floor panel in the rear and

fold slightly upward. Next, pull it backward

from the supports.

The cargo floor panel can be removed from

the cargo area above the tail lights.

Lower position

– Larger objects can be transported.

Seite 228

CONTROLS Cargo area

228

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

– Space for smaller objects remains be-

tween the fixed and variable cargo area

floor.

Folded up position

Safety information

Warning

Improper use of the variable cargo floor

panel can lead to a danger of objects flying

about during braking and evasive maneu-

vers. There is a risk of injury and risk of

damage to property.

– Do not use the variable cargo floor

panel to separate the cargo area and

vehicle interior in the sense of a par-

tition net.

– Only use the variable cargo floor

panel in the folded-up position when

the backrests are folded up and

locked.

– Fold down the variable cargo floor

panel before driving off.

– Always secure cargo against shifting,

using straps, belts and lashing eyes,

for instance.

Fold up the cargo floor panel

Fold up the cargo floor panel in the lower

position and push it behind the locks, arrow.

You've reached the maximum cargo height.

Upper position

– With the backrests folded down, a long,

flat loading surface is produced.

– For 3-door models:

Maximum load in this position:

330 lbs/150 kg.

– For 5-door models:

Maximum load in this position:

441 lbs/200 kg.

– Space for objects remains between the

fixed and variable cargo area floor.

Seite 229

Cargo area CONTROLS

229

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Things to remember when driving

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with

the series. It also describes features and

functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-

tions or country versions. This also applies

to safety-related functions and systems.

When using these functions and systems,

the applicable laws and regulations must be

observed.

Breaking-in period

General information

Moving parts need to begin working to-

gether smoothly.

The following instructions will help you to

achieve a long vehicle life and good effi-

ciency.

During break-in, do not use the Launch

Control, refer to page 121.

Safety information

Warning

Due to new parts and components, safety

and driver assistance systems can react

with a delay. There is a risk of accident.

After installing new parts or with a new

vehicle, drive conservatively and inter-

vene early if necessary. Observe the break-

in procedures of the respective parts and

components.

Engine, transmission, and axle

drive

Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km

Do not exceed the maximum engine and

road speed:

– For gasoline engine 4,500 rpm and

100 mph/160 km/h.

Avoid full load or kickdown under all cir-

cumstances.

From 1,200 miles/2,000 km

The engine and vehicle speed can gradually

be increased.

Tires

Tire traction is not optimal due to manufac-

turing circumstances when tires are brand-

new; they achieve their full traction poten-

tial after a break-in time.

Drive conservatively for the first

200 miles/300 km.

Brake system

Brake discs and brake pads only reach their

full effectiveness after ap-

prox. 300 miles/500 km. Drive moderately

during this break-in period.

Clutch

The function of the clutch reaches its opti-

mal level only after a distance driven of ap-

prox. 300 miles/500 km. During this break-

in period, engage the clutch gently.

Following part replacement

The same break-in procedures should be ob-

served if any of the components mentioned

Seite 230

DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving

230

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

above have to be renewed in the course of

the vehicle's operating life.

General driving notes

Closing the tailgate

Safety information

Warning

An open tailgate protrudes from the vehi-

cle and can endanger occupants and other

traffic participants or damage the vehicle

in the event of an accident, braking or eva-

sive maneuvers. In addition, exhaust

fumes may enter the vehicle interior.

There is a risk of injury or risk of damage

to property. Do not drive with the tailgate

open.

Driving with the tailgate open

If driving with the tailgate open cannot be

avoided:

– Close all windows and the glass sunroof.

– Greatly increase the air flow from the

vents.

– Drive moderately.

Ice on window glass

NOTICE

The window will be lowered slightly when

pulling on the door handle. In the event of

frost, the window may freeze up and not

be lowered. There is a risk of damage to

property, among other potential damage.

When pulling on the door handle, make

sure that the window is lowered. If neces-

sary, remove snow and ice from the win-

dow. Do not open the door with force.

Hot exhaust gas system

Warning

High temperatures can occur underneath

the body, for instance caused by the ex-

haust gas system, while driving. Contact

with the exhaust gas system can cause

burns. There is a risk of injury. Do not

touch the hot exhaust gas system, includ-

ing the exhaust pipe.

Warning

If combustible materials, such as leaves or

grass, come in contact with hot parts of

the exhaust gas system, these materials

can ignite. There is a risk of fire and inju-

ries. Do not remove the heat shields instal-

led and never apply undercoating to them.

Make sure that no combustible materials

can come in contact with hot vehicle parts

in driving operation, idle or during park-

ing.

Mobile communication devices in

the vehicle

Warning

Vehicle electronics and mobile phones can

influence one another. There is radiation

due to the transmission operations of mo-

bile phones. There is a risk of injury or

risk of damage to property. If possible, in

the car's interior use only mobile phones

with direct connections to an exterior an-

tenna in order to exclude mutual interfer-

ence and deflect the radiation from the

car's interior.

Seite 231

Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS

231

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Hydroplaning

On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water

can form between the tires and road sur-

face.

This phenomenon is referred to as hydro-

planing. It is characterized by a partial or

complete loss of contact between the tires

and the road surface, ultimately undermin-

ing your ability to steer and brake the vehi-

cle.

Driving through water

General information

When driving through water, follow the fol-

lowing:

– Deactivate Auto Start/Stop function.

– Drive through calm water only.

– Drive through water only if it is not

deeper than maximum 9.8 inches/25 cm.

– Drive through water no faster than

walking speed, up to 3 mph/5 km/h.

Safety information

NOTICE

When driving too quickly through too

deep water, water can enter into the en-

gine compartment, the electrical system or

the transmission. There is a risk of damage

to property, among other potential dam-

age. When driving through water, do not

exceed the maximum indicated water level

and the maximum speed for driving

through water.

Braking safely

General information

The vehicle is equipped with an Antilock

Braking System ABS as a standard feature.

Perform an emergency stop in situations

that require such.

Steering is still responsive. You can still

avoid any obstacles with a minimum of

steering effort.

Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds

from the hydraulic circuits indicate that the

Antilock Braking System ABS is in its active

mode.

Objects in the area around the pedals

Warning

Objects in the driver's floor area can limit

the pedal distance or block a depressed

pedal. There is a risk of accident. Stow ob-

jects in the vehicle such that they are se-

cured and cannot enter into the driver's

floor area. Use floor mats that are suitable

for the vehicle and can be safely attached

to the floor. Do not use loose floor mats

and do not layer several floor mats. Make

sure that there is sufficient clearance for

the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats are

securely fastened again after they were re-

moved, for instance for cleaning.

Driving in wet conditions

When roads are wet, salted, or in heavy

rain, gently press the brake pedal every few

miles.

Ensure that this action does not endanger

other traffic.

The heat generated during braking dries

brake discs and brake pads and protects

them against corrosion.

In this way braking efficiency will be avail-

able when you need it.

Seite 232

DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving

232

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Hills

General information

Drive long or steep downhill gradients in

the gear that requires least braking effort.

Otherwise, the brakes may overheat and re-

duce brake efficiency.

You can increase the engine's braking effect

by shifting down, going all the way to first

gear, if needed.

Safety information

Warning

Light but consistent brake pressure can

lead to high temperatures, brakes wearing

out and possibly even brake failure. There

is a risk of accident. Avoid placing exces-

sive stress on the brake system.

Warning

In idle state or with the engine switched

off, safety functions, for instance engine

braking effect, braking assistance and

steering assistance, may not be available.

There is a risk of accident. Do not attempt

to drive in idle state or with the engine

switched off.

Brake disc corrosion

Corrosion on the brake discs and contami-

nation on the brake pads are increased by

the following circumstances:

– Low mileage.

– Extended periods when the vehicle is

not used at all.

– Infrequent use of the brakes.

– Aggressive, acidic, or alkaline cleaning

agents.

Corrosion buildup on the brake discs will

cause a pulsating effect on the brakes in

their response - generally this cannot be

corrected.

Condensation water under the

parked vehicle

When using the automatic climate control,

condensation water develops and collects

underneath the vehicle.

Ground clearance

NOTICE

If the ground clearance is insufficient, e.g.,

curbs or underground garage entrances,

contact with vehicle parts, e.g., spoiler,

and the underbody may occur. There is a

risk of damage to property, among other

potential damage. Ensure that there is suf-

ficient ground clearance available.

Roof-mounted luggage rack

General information

Installation only possible with roof rack.

Roof racks are available as special accesso-

ries.

Mounting

Follow the installation instructions of the

roof rack.

Because roof-mounted luggage racks raise

the vehicle's center of gravity when loaded,

they have a major effect on vehicle handling

and steering response.

Therefore, note the following when loading

and driving:

Seite 233

Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS

233

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

– Do not exceed the approved roof/axle

loads and the approved gross vehicle

weight.

– Be sure that adequate clearance is main-

tained for tilting and opening the glass

sunroof.

– Distribute the roof load uniformly.

– The roof load should not extend past the

loading area.

– Always place the heaviest pieces on the

bottom.

– Secure the roof luggage firmly, for in-

stance using ratchet straps.

– Do not let objects project into the open-

ing path of the tailgate.

– Drive cautiously and avoid sudden ac-

celeration and braking maneuvers. Take

corners gently.

Driving on racetracks

Warning

The vehicle is not designed for use in M

Sport or motor sport type competition.

There is a risk of accident. Do not use the

vehicle for M Sport or motor sport type

competitions.

Higher mechanical and thermal loads during

racetrack operation lead to increased wear.

Use of the vehicle in M sport or motor sport

type competition is an improper use of the

vehicle and may affect your warranty cover-

age. See “New Vehicle Limited Warranty”

for more details.

Seite 234

DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving

234

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Reducing fuel consumption

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with

the series. It also describes features and

functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-

tions or country versions. This also applies

to safety-related functions and systems.

When using these functions and systems,

the applicable laws and regulations must be

observed.

General information

The vehicle contains advanced technologies

for the reduction of consumption and emis-

sion values.

Fuel consumption depends on a number of

different factors.

The implementation of certain measures,

driving style and regular maintenance can

influence fuel consumption and environ-

mental impact.

Remove unnecessary cargo

Additional weight increases fuel consump-

tion.

Remove attached parts follow-

ing use

Remove roof-mounted or rear rear carriers

which are no longer required following use.

Attached parts on the vehicle impair the

aerodynamics and increase the fuel con-

sumption.

Close the windows and glass

sunroof

Driving with the glass sunroof and windows

open results in increased air resistance and

raises fuel consumption.

Tires

General information

Tires can affect consumption in various

ways, for instance tire size may influence

consumption.

Check the tire inflation pressure

regularly

Check and, if needed, correct the tire infla-

tion pressure at least twice a month and be-

fore starting on a long trip.

Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling

resistance and thus raises fuel consumption

and tire wear.

Drive away without delay

Do not wait for the engine to warm-up

while the vehicle remains stationary. Start

driving right away, but at moderate engine

speeds.

This is the fastest way for the cold engine

to reach its operating temperature.

Seite 235

Reducing fuel consumption DRIVING TIPS

235

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Look well ahead when driving

Driving smoothly and proactively reduces

fuel consumption.

Avoid unnecessary acceleration and brak-

ing.

By maintaining a suitable distance to the

vehicle driving ahead of you.

Avoid high engine speeds

Driving at low engine speeds lowers fuel

consumption and reduces wear.

If necessary, observe the vehicle's gear shift

indicator, refer to page 134.

Use coasting conditions

When approaching a red light, take your

foot off the accelerator and let the vehicle

coast to a halt.

For going downhill take your foot off the ac-

celerator and let the vehicle roll.

The fuel supply is interrupted while coast-

ing.

Switch off the engine during

longer stops

Switching off the engine

Switch off the engine during longer stops,

for instance at traffic lights, railroad cross-

ings or in traffic jam.

Auto Start/Stop function

The Auto Start/Stop function of the vehicle

automatically switches off the engine dur-

ing a stop.

If the engine is switched off and then re-

started rather than leaving the engine run-

ning constantly, fuel consumption and emis-

sions are reduced. Savings can begin within

a few seconds of switching off the engine.

In addition, fuel consumption is also deter-

mined by other factors, such as driving

style, road conditions, maintenance or envi-

ronmental factors.

Switch off any functions that

are not currently needed

Functions such as seat heating and the rear

window defroster require a lot of energy

and consume additional fuel, especially in

city and stop-and-go traffic.

Switch off these functions if they are not

needed.

Have maintenance carried out

Have the vehicle maintained regularly to

achieve optimal vehicle efficiency and serv-

ice life. MINI recommends that mainte-

nance work be performed by a MINI service

center.

Also note the MINI maintenance systems,

refer to page 277.

GREEN Mode

Concept

GREEN Mode supports a driving style that

saves on consumption. For this purpose, the

engine control and comfort features, for in-

stance the climate control output, are ad-

justed.

For Steptronic transmission:

Seite 236

DRIVING TIPS Reducing fuel consumption

236

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Under certain conditions the engine is auto-

matically decoupled from the transmission

in the D selector lever position. The vehicle

continues traveling with the engine idling

to reduce consumption. The D selector lever

position remains engaged.

In addition, context-sensitive instructions

are displayed to assist with an efficient

driving style.

The achieved extended range is displayed in

the instrument cluster as bonus range.

General information

The system includes the following MINI-

MALISM functions and MINIMALISM dis-

plays:

– GREEN Limit, refer to page 237

– GREEN climate control, refer to

page 237.

– GREEN bonus range, refer to page 238.

– GREEN tip, driving instruction, refer to

page 238.

– Coasting driving condition, refer to

page 239.

– MINIMALISM analyzer, refer to

page 241.

Activating GREEN Mode

Press the MINI Driving Modes

switch downward until

GREEN is displayed in the in-

strument cluster.

Configuring GREEN

Via MINI Driving Modes switch

1. Activating GREEN Mode.

2. "Configure GREEN"

3. Select the desired setting.

Via the Central Information Display

(CID)

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Configure GREEN"

4. Select the desired setting.

Activating/deactivating the functions

The following functions can be activated/

deactivated:

– "GREEN speed warning"

– "GREEN climate control"

– "Coasting"

Settings are stored for the driver profile

currently used.

GREEN Limit

– "GREEN speed warning": GREEN Limit

is activated.

A GREEN tip is displayed if the speed of

the set GREEN Limit is exceeded.

– "Tip at:"

Set the desired speed for the GREEN

Limit.

GREEN climate control

Climate control is set to be efficient.

By making a slight change to the set tem-

perature and adjusting the rate of heating

or cooling of the car's interior consumption

can be economized.

The power output to the seat heater and ex-

terior mirror is reduced.

Coasting

Efficiency can be optimized by disengaging

the engine and coasting, refer to page 239,

with the engine idling.

This function is only available in GREEN

drive mode.

Seite 237

Reducing fuel consumption DRIVING TIPS

237

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Deactivate the function to use the braking

effect of the engine when traveling down-

hill.

GREEN potential savings

Shows potential savings with the current

settings in percentages.

Display in the instrument cluster

GREEN bonus range

A modified driving style helps

you extend your driving dis-

tance.

The range extension can be

displayed as the bonus range

in the instrument cluster.

The bonus range is shown in the range dis-

play.

The bonus range is automatically reset ev-

ery time the vehicle is refueled.

– Green display: efficient driving style.

– Gray display: modify driving style, for

instance by backing off the accelerator

pedal.

Efficiency display

A bar display in the instru-

ment cluster indicates your

current driving efficiency.

Mark in the left area, arrow 1:

display for energy recovered

by coasting or when braking.

Mark in the right area, arrow 2: display

when accelerating.

The efficiency of your driving style is

shown by the position of the mark:

– Mark inside the green range: efficient

driving style.

– Mark outside the green range: modify

driving style, for example by backing off

the accelerator.

GREEN tip, driving instruction

General information

The GREEN tip indicates that your driving

style can be modified to be more efficient,

for example by backing off the accelerator.

Instrument cluster without enhanced

features: display

Instrument cluster with enhanced

features: display

Activating/deactivating the display

Activate information relating to the driving

style and GREEN tips in the instrument

cluster using the Central Information Dis-

play (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

Seite 238

DRIVING TIPS Reducing fuel consumption

238

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

3. "Displays"

4. "Instrument panel"

5. "GREEN info"

GREEN tip, symbols

An additional icon and text instructions are

displayed.

Icon Measure

For an efficient driving style, look

well ahead when driving, acceler-

ate conservatively, and delay ac-

celerating.

Reduce speed to the selected

GREEN speed.

Steptronic transmission:

Switch from M/S to D and avoid

manual shift interventions.

Manual transmission:

Follow the shift instructions.

Manual transmission:

Engage neutral for an engine stop.

Indications on the Control Display

Displaying MINIMALISM information

The current efficiency of the functions in

GREEN drive mode can be displayed on the

Control Display.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Technology in action"

3. "MINIMALISM"

Information is shown on the following func-

tions:

– Auto Start/Stop function.

– Energy recovery.

– Coasting.

Displaying the MINIMALISM analyzer

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Technology in action"

3. "MINIMALISM Analyser"

Further information on the MINIMALISM

analyzer, refer to page 241.

Coasting

Concept

The function helps to conserve fuel.

To do this, under certain conditions the en-

gine is automatically decoupled from the

transmission when selector lever position D

is set. The vehicle continues traveling with

the engine idling to reduce consumption.

Selector lever position D remains engaged.

This driving condition is referred to as

coasting.

As soon as you step on the brake or acceler-

ator pedal, the engine is automatically cou-

pled again.

General information

Coasting is a component of the GREEN

drive mode.

Coasting is automatically activated when

the GREEN drive mode is called via the

MINI Driving Modes switch, refer to

page 177.

A proactive driving style helps the driver to

use the function often and supports the effi-

cient effect of coasting.

Functional requirements

The function is available in the speed range

from approx. 15 mph/25 km/h up to

100 mph/160 km/h.

Seite 239

Reducing fuel consumption DRIVING TIPS

239

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

– Accelerator pedal and brake pedal are

not operated.

– The selector lever is in selector lever po-

sition D.

– Engine and transmission are at operat-

ing temperature.

– With a camera in the area of the interior

mirror: the system does not detect any

vehicles ahead of you.

Operation via shift paddles

Concept

Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the

coasting mode can be influenced with the

shift paddles.

Activating/deactivating coasting via shift

paddles

1. Shift to the highest gear by pulling the

right shift paddle.

2. To activate coasting mode, actuate the

right shift paddle again.

To deactivate, actuate the left shift paddle.

Display

Instrument cluster without enhanced

features

The bar display below the tachometer is fil-

led in green and the mark appears at the

zero point. The tachometer indicates idle

speed.

Instrument cluster with enhanced features

The bar display below the tachometer is fil-

led in green and the mark appears at the

zero point. The tachometer indicates idle

speed.

Indications on the Control Display

The coasting driving condition is displayed

in the MINIMALISM Info while driving.

The distance traveled in the coasting driv-

ing condition is indicated by a counter.

Displaying MINIMALISM information

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Technology in action"

3. "MINIMALISM"

System limits

The function is not available if one of the

following conditions applies:

– DSC OFF and TRACTION are activated.

– Cruise control is activated.

– If driving in the dynamic limit range.

– If driving on steep uphill or downhill

grades.

– The battery charge state is temporarily

too low.

– The vehicle electrical system is drawing

excessive current.

Seite 240

DRIVING TIPS Reducing fuel consumption

240

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

MINIMALISM analyzer

Concept

The function helps develop an especially ef-

ficient driving style and to conserve fuel.

For this purpose, the driving style is ana-

lyzed. The assessment is done in various

categories and is displayed on the Control

Display.

This display will help you adjust your driv-

ing style and save some fuel.

The range of the vehicle can be extended by

adopting an efficient driving style. This gain

in range is displayed as a bonus range in the

instrument cluster and on the Control Dis-

play.

Functional requirement

This function is available in GREEN drive

mode.

Displaying the MINIMALISM analyzer

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Technology in action"

3. "MINIMALISM Analyser"

Display on the Control Display

The display of the MINIMALISM analyzer

consists of a fish in a water glass, a table of

values and the display of the achieved bo-

nus range.

The fish and the movements of the water in

the bowl symbolize the efficiency of the

driving style.

Depending on the equipment, the fish is

shown with efficient and inefficient driving

style or only with inefficient driving style.

The more efficient the driving style, the less

the water sloshes around in the bowl and

the better is the fish's mood. If the driving

style is inefficient, the water oscillates, the

fish's mood worsens, and a reduced number

of stars is displayed.

The table of values contains stars and evalu-

ates the driving style in different catego-

ries. The more efficient the driving style,

the more stars are displayed in the table.

The bonus range achieved by a driving style

that minimizes consumption is displayed

below the table of values. The more effi-

cient the driving style, the faster the bonus

range increases.

To assist with an efficient driving style,

GREEN tips are displayed while driving.

Tips for an energy-saving driving style, Sav-

ing fuel, refer to page 235.

Seite 241

Reducing fuel consumption DRIVING TIPS

241

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Refueling

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with

the series. It also describes features and

functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-

tions or country versions. This also applies

to safety-related functions and systems.

When using these functions and systems,

the applicable laws and regulations must be

observed.

General information

Follow the fuel recommendation, refer to

page 244, prior to refueling.

Safety information

NOTICE

With a driving distance of less than

30 miles/50 km the engine may no longer

have sufficient fuel. Engine functions are

not ensured anymore. There is a risk of

damage to property, among other potential

damage. Refuel promptly.

Fuel cap

Opening

1. Grasp the fuel filler flap at the rear edge

and open it.

2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.

3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket at-

tached to the fuel filler flap.

Seite 242

MOBILITY Refueling

242

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Closing

Warning

The retaining strap of the fuel cap can be

jammed and crushed during closing. The

cap cannot be correctly closed. Fuel or fuel

vapors can escape. There is a risk of injury

or risk of damage to property. Pay atten-

tion that the retaining strap is not jammed

or crushed when closing the cap.

1. Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until

you clearly hear a click.

2. Press on the fuel filler flap until it en-

gages.

Emergency unlocking

It may be necessary in certain situations to

unlock the fuel filler flap manually, for in-

stance with an electrical fault.

Have fuel filler flap unlocked by a dealer’s

service center or another qualified service

center or repair shop.

Follow the following when re-

fueling

General information

When refueling, insert the filler nozzle

completely into the filler pipe. Lifting up the

fuel pump nozzle during refueling causes:

– Premature switching off.

– Reduced return of the fuel vapors.

The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle

clicks off the first time.

Make sure that the fuel cap is closed prop-

erly after refueling, otherwise the emissions

warning light may light up.

Follow safety regulations posted at the gas

station.

Safety information

NOTICE

Fuels are toxic and aggressive. Overfilling

of the fuel tank can damage the fuel sys-

tem. Painted surfaces may be damaged by

contact with fuel. Escaping fuel can harm

the environment. There is a risk of damage

to property, among other potential dam-

age. Avoid overfilling.

Seite 243

Refueling MOBILITY

243

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Fuel

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with

the series. It also describes features and

functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-

tions or country versions. This also applies

to safety-related functions and systems.

When using these functions and systems,

the applicable laws and regulations must be

observed.

Fuel recommendation

General information

Depending on the region, many gas stations

sell fuel that has been customized to winter

or summer conditions. Fuel that is available

in winter, for instance helps make a cold

start easier.

Gasoline

General information

For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline

should be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur

content.

Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as

containing metal must not be used.

Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of

25 %, i. e. E10 or E25, may be used for refu-

eling.

Ethanol should meet the following quality

standards:

US: ASTM 4806–xx

CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx

xx: comply with the current standard in

each case.

Safety information

NOTICE

Even small quantities of the wrong fuel or

wrong fuel additives can damage the fuel

system and engine. Furthermore, the cata-

lytic converter is permanently damaged.

There is a risk of damage to property,

among other potential damage. Do not re-

fuel or add the following in the case of

gasoline engines:

– Leaded gasoline.

– Metallic additives, for instance man-

ganese or iron.

Do not press the Start/Stop button after

refueling with the wrong fuel. Contact a

dealer’s service center or another qualified

service center or repair shop.

NOTICE

Incorrect fuels can damage the fuel system

and the engine. There is a risk of damage

to property, among other potential dam-

age. Do not use fuels with a higher per-

centage of ethanol than recommended. Do

not refuel with fuels containing methanol,

e.g. M5 to M100.

NOTICE

Fuel that does not comply with the mini-

mum quality can compromise engine func-

tion or cause engine damage. There is a

risk of damage to property, among other

potential damage. Do not fill with fuel that

Seite 244

MOBILITY Fuel

244

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

does not comply with the minimum qual-

ity.

CAUTION

The use of poor-quality fuels may result in

harmful engine deposits or damage. Addi-

tionally, problems relating to drivability,

starting and stalling, especially under cer-

tain environmental conditions such as

high ambient temperature and high alti-

tude, may occur.

If drivability problems are encountered,

we recommend switching to a high quality

gasoline brand and a higher octane grade

— AKI number — for a few tank fills. To

avoid harmful engine deposits, it is highly

recommended to purchase gasoline from

Top Tier retailers.

Failure to comply with these recommenda-

tions may result in the need for additional

maintenance.

Recommended fuel grade

MINI recommends AKI 91.

John Cooper Works:

MINI recommends AKI 93.

Refuel with this gasoline to achieve the

rated performance and consumption values.

Minimum fuel grade

MINI recommends AKI 89.

John Cooper Works:

MINI recommends AKI 91.

If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI

Rating, the engine may produce knocking

sounds when starting at high external tem-

peratures. This has no effect on the engine

life.

Seite 245

Fuel MOBILITY

245

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Wheels and tires

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with

the series. It also describes features and

functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-

tions or country versions. This also applies

to safety-related functions and systems.

When using these functions and systems,

the applicable laws and regulations must be

observed.

Tire inflation pressure

General information

The tire characteristics and tire inflation

pressure influence the following:

– The service life of the tires.

– Road safety.

– Driving comfort.

– Fuel consumption.

Safety information

Warning

A tire with too little or no tire inflation

pressure may heat up significantly and

sustain damage. This will have a negative

impact on aspects of handling, such as

steering and braking response. There is a

risk of accident. Regularly check the tire

inflation pressure, and correct it as

needed, for instance twice a month and be-

fore a long trip.

Tire pressure specifications

In the tire inflation pressure table

The tire inflation pressure table, refer to

page 247, contains all tire inflation pres-

sure specifications for the specified tire

sizes at the ambient temperature. The tire

inflation pressure values apply to tire sizes

approved by the manufacturer of the vehicle

for the vehicle type.

To identify the correct tire inflation pres-

sure, please note the following:

– Tire sizes of your vehicle.

– Maximum speed for driving.

Checking the tire inflation pressure

General information

Tires heat up while driving. The tire infla-

tion pressure increases with the tire tem-

perature.

Tires have a natural, consistent loss of tire

inflation pressure.

The displays of inflation devices may under-

read by up to 0.1 bar/2 psi.

Checking using tire inflation pressure

specifications in the tire inflation

pressure table

The tire inflation pressure specifications in

the tire inflation pressure table only relate

to cold tires or tires at the same tempera-

ture as the ambient temperature.

Only check the tire inflation pressure levels

when the tires are cold, i.e.:

– Driving distance of max.

1.25 miles/2 km has not been exceeded.

– If the vehicle has not moved again for at

least 2 hours after a trip.

Seite 246

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

246

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

1. Determine the intended tire inflation

pressure levels for the mounted tires.

2. Check the tire inflation pressure in all

four tires, using a pressure gage, for ex-

ample.

3. Correct the tire inflation pressure if the

actual tire inflation pressure deviates

from the intended tire inflation pres-

sure.

4. Check whether all valve caps are

screwed onto the tire valves.

After correcting the tire inflation

pressure

For run-flat tires: reinitialize run-flat tires.

For the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM: reset

the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM.

Checking the tire inflation pressure of

the emergency wheel

Located behind the bumper on the under-

side of the vehicle is an opening for check-

ing the tire inflation pressure.

Tire pressures up to 100 mph/

160 km/h

For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and

for optimum driving comfort, note the pres-

sure values in the tire inflation pressure ta-

ble, refer to page 247, and adjust as neces-

sary.

These pressure values can also be found on

the tire inflation pressure label on the driv-

er's door pillar.

Do not exceed a speed of 100 mph/

160 km/h.

Tire pressure values up to

100 mph/160 km/h

On 3-door models: COOPER

Tire size Pressure specifica-

tions in bar/PSI

Specifications in

bar/PSI with

cold tires

195/55 R 16 87

V A/S

195/55 R 16 87

H M+S

2.2 / 32 2.2 / 32

Seite 247

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

247

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Tire size Pressure specifica-

tions in bar/PSI

175/65 R 15 84

H A/S

205/45 R 17 88

V XL A/S

205/45 R 17 88

W XL

175/65 R 15 88

H XL M+S

205/45 R 17 88

V XL M+S

2.4 / 35 2.2 / 32

205/40 R 18 86

W XL

175/60 R 16 86

H XL M+S

185/50 R 17 86

H XL M+S

2.6 / 38 2.2 / 32

On 3-door models: COOPER S

Tire size Pressure specifica-

tions in bar/PSI

Specifications

in bar/PSI with

cold tires

195/55 R 16 87

V A/S

195/55 R 16 87

H M+S

2.3 / 33 2.2 / 32

Tire size Pressure specifica-

tions in bar/PSI

205/45 R 17 88

V XL A/S

205/45 R 17 88

W XL

205/45 R 17 88

V XL M+S

2.5 / 36 2.2 / 32

205/40 R 18 86

W XL

185/50 R 17 86

H XL M+S

2.7 / 39 2.3 / 33

On 3-door models: JOHN COOPER

WORKS

Tire size Pressure specifications

in bar/PSI

Specifications

in bar/PSI with

cold tires

205/45 R 17 88

V XL A/S

205/45 R 17 88

W XL

205/45 R 17 88

Y XL

205/45 R 17 88

V XL M+S

2.6 / 38 2.2 / 32

205/40 R 18 86

W XL

185/50 R 17 86

H XL M+S

2.8 / 41 2.4 / 35

Seite 248

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

248

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

On 5-door models: COOPER

Tire size Pressure specifica-

tions in bar/PSI

Specifications in

bar/PSI with

cold tires

195/55 R 16 87

V A/S

195/55 R 16 87

H M+S

2.3 / 33 2.2 / 32

175/65 R 15 84

H A/S

205/45 R 17 88

V XL A/S

205/45 R 17 88

W XL

175/65 R 15 88

H XL M+S

205/45 R 17 88

V XL M+S

2.6 / 38 2.3 / 33

205/40 R 18 86

W XL

175/60 R 16 86

H XL M+S

185/50 R 17 86

H XL M+S

2.7 / 39 2.5 / 36

On 5-door models: COOPER S

Tire size Pressure specifica-

tions in bar/PSI

Specifications

in bar/PSI with

cold tires

195/55 R 16 87

V A/S

195/55 R 16 87

H M+S

2.4 / 35 2.2 / 32

205/45 R 17 88

V XL A/S

205/45 R 17 88

W XL

205/45 R 17 88

V XL M+S

2.6 / 38 2.3 / 33

205/40 R 18 86

W XL

185/50 R 17 86

H XL M+S

2.8 / 41 2.5 / 36

Tire inflation pressures at max.

speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h

Warning

In order to drive at maximum speeds in ex-

cess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please ob-

serve, and, if necessary, adjust tire pres-

sures for speeds exceeding 100 mph/

160 km/h from the relevant table on the

following pages. Otherwise, tire damage

and accidents could occur.

For speeds over 100 mph/160 km/h and for

optimum driving comfort, note the pressure

values in the tire inflation pressure table,

refer to page 250, and adjust as necessary.

Seite 249

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

249

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Tire pressure values over 100 mph/

160 km/h

On 3-door models: COOPER

Tire size Pressure specifica-

tions in bar/PSI

Specifications in

bar/PSI with

cold tires

195/55 R 16 87

V A/S

195/55 R 16 87

H M+S

2.5 / 36 2.2 / 32

175/65 R 15 84

H A/S

205/45 R 17 88

V XL A/S

205/45 R 17 88

W XL

175/65 R 15 88

H XL M+S

205/45 R 17 88

V XL M+S

2.7 / 39 2.3 / 33

205/40 R 18 86

W XL

175/60 R 16 86

H XL M+S

185/50 R 17 86

H XL M+S

2.9 / 42 2.4 / 35

On 3-door models: COOPER S

Tire size Pressure specifica-

tions in bar/PSI

Specifications

in bar/PSI with

cold tires

195/55 R 16 87

V A/S

195/55 R 16 87

H M+S

2.8 / 41 2.3 / 33

205/45 R 17 88

V XL A/S

205/45 R 17 88

W XL

205/45 R 17 88

V XL M+S

3.1 / 45 2.6 / 38

205/40 R 18 86

W XL

185/50 R 17 86

H XL M+S

3.2 / 46 2.7 / 39

Seite 250

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

250

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

On 3-door models: JOHN COOPER

WORKS

Tire size Pressure specifications

in bar/PSI

Specifications

in bar/PSI with

cold tires

205/45 R 17 88

V XL A/S

205/45 R 17 88

W XL

205/45 R 17 88

Y XL

205/45 R 17 88

V XL M+S

3.2 / 46 2.7 / 39

205/40 R 18 86

W XL

185/50 R 17 86

H XL M+S

3.3 / 48 2.8 / 41

On 5-door models: COOPER

Tire size Pressure specifica-

tions in bar/PSI

Specifications in

bar/PSI with

cold tires

195/55 R 16 87

V A/S

195/55 R 16 87

H M+S

2.6 / 38 2.3 / 33

Tire size Pressure specifica-

tions in bar/PSI

175/65 R 15 84

H A/S

205/45 R 17 88

V XL A/S

205/45 R 17 88

W XL

175/65 R 15 88

H XL M+S

205/45 R 17 88

V XL M+S

2.8 / 41 2.5 / 36

205/40 R 18 86

W XL

175/60 R 16 86

H XL M+S

185/50 R 17 86

H XL M+S

3.0 / 44 2.7 / 39

Seite 251

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

251

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

On 5-door models: COOPER S

Tire size Pressure specifica-

tions in bar/PSI

Specifications in

bar/PSI with

cold tires

195/55 R 16 87

V A/S

195/55 R 16 87

H M+S

3.0 / 44 2.6 / 38

205/45 R 17 88

V XL A/S

205/45 R 17 88

W XL

205/45 R 17 88

V XL M+S

205/40 R 18 86

W XL

185/50 R 17 86

H XL M+S

3.3 / 48 2.9 / 42

Tire identification marks

Tire size

205/45 R 17 84 V

205: nominal width in mm

45: aspect ratio in %

R: radial tire code

17: rim diameter in inches

84: load rating, not for ZR tires

V: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires

Maximum tire load

Maximum tire load is the maximum permis-

sible weight for which the tire is approved.

Locate the maximum tire load on the tire

sidewall and the Gross Axle Weight Rating

– GAWR – on the certification label on the

driver’s door pillar. Divide the tire load by

1.1. It must be greater than one-half of the

vehicle’s Gross Axle Weight Rating –

GAWR. Note, front vs. rear GAWR and tire

loads, respectively.

Speed letter

Designation Maximum speed

Q up to 100 mph/160 km/h

R up to 106 mph/170 km/h

S up to 112 mph/180 km/h

T up to 118 mph/190 km/h

H up to 131 mph/210 km/h

V up to 150 mph/240 km/h

W up to 167 mph/270 km/h

Y up to 186 mph/300 km/h

Tire Identification Number

DOT-Code: DOT xxxx xxx 0121

xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand

xxx: tire size and tire design

0121: tire age

Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines

of the U.S. Department of Transportation.

Tire age

Recommendation

Regardless of the tire tread, replace tires at

least every 6 years.

Seite 252

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

252

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Manufacture date

You can find the manufacture date of the

tire on the tire's sidewall.

Designation Manufacture date

DOT … 0121 1st week 2021

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Quality grades can be found where applica-

ble on the tire sidewall between tread

shoulder and maximum section width.

E.g.: Treadwear 200; Traction AA; Tempera-

ture A

DOT Quality Grades

Treadwear

Traction AA A B C

Temperature A B C

All passenger vehicle tires must conform to

Federal Safety Requirements in addition to

these grades.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating

based on the wear rate of the tire when

tested under controlled conditions on a

specified government test course. E.g., a

tire graded 150 would wear one and one-

half, 1 g, times as well on the government

course as a tire graded 100. The relative

performance of tires depends upon the ac-

tual conditions of their use, however, and

may depart significantly from the norm due

to variations in driving habits, service prac-

tices and differences in road characteristics

and climate.

Traction

The traction grades, from highest to lowest,

are AA, A, B, and C.

Those grades represent the tire's ability to

stop on wet pavement as measured under

controlled conditions on specified govern-

ment test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.

A tire marked C may have poor traction per-

formance.

The traction grade assigned to this tire is

based on straight-ahead braking traction

tests, and does not include acceleration,

cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction

characteristics.

Temperature

The temperature grades are A, the highest,

B, and C, representing the tire's resistance

to the generation of heat and its ability to

dissipate heat when tested under controlled

conditions on a specified indoor laboratory

test wheel. Sustained high temperature can

cause the material of the tire to degenerate

and reduce tire life, and excessive tempera-

ture can lead to sudden tire failure. The

grade C corresponds to a level of perform-

ance which all passenger car tires must

meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle

Safety Standard No. 109. Grades Band A

represent higher levels of performance on

the laboratory test wheel than the minimum

required by law.

Warning

The temperature grade for this tire is es-

tablished for a tire that is properly inflated

and not overloaded. Excessive speed, un-

derinflation, or excessive loading, either

separately or in combination, can cause

heat buildup and possible tire failure.

RSC – Run-flat tires

Run-flat tires, refer to page 256, are labeled

with a circular icon containing the letters

RSC marked on the sidewall.

Seite 253

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

253

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

M+S

Winter and all-season tires with better cold

weather performance than summer tires.

Tire tread

Summer tires

Do not drive with a tire tread of less than

0.12 in/3 mm, otherwise there is an in-

creased risk of hydroplaning.

Winter tires

Do not drive with a tire tread of less than

0.16 in/4 mm, as such tires are less suitable

for winter operation.

Minimum tread depth

Wear indicators are distributed around the

tire's circumference and have the legally re-

quired minimum height of 0.063 in-

ches/1.6 mm.

The positions of the wear indicators are

marked on the tire sidewall with TWI, Tread

Wear Indicator.

Tire damage

General information

Inspect your tires regularly for damage, for-

eign objects lodged in the tread, and tread

wear.

Driving over rough or damaged road surfa-

ces, as well as debris, curbs and other obsta-

cles can cause serious damage to wheels,

tires and suspension parts. This is more

likely to occur with low-profile tires, which

provide less cushioning between the wheel

and the road. Be careful to avoid road haz-

ards and reduce your speed, especially if

your vehicle is equipped with low-profile

tires.

Indications of tire damage or other vehicle

malfunctions:

– Unusual vibrations.

– Unusual tire or running noises.

– Unusual handling such as a strong ten-

dency to pull to the left or right.

Damage can be caused by the following sit-

uations, for instance:

– Driving over curbs.

– Road damage.

– Tire inflation pressure too low.

– Vehicle overloading.

– Incorrect tire storage.

Safety information

Warning

Damaged tires can lose tire inflation pres-

sure, which can lead to loss of vehicle con-

trol. There is a risk of accident. If tire dam-

age is suspected while driving,

immediately reduce speed and stop. Have

wheels and tires checked. For this pur-

pose, drive carefully to the nearest dealer’s

service center or another qualified service

Seite 254

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

254

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

center or repair shop. Have vehicle towed

or transported as needed. Do not repair

damaged tires, but have them replaced.

Warning

Tires can become damaged by driving over

obstacles, e.g., curbs or road damage, at

high speed. Larger wheels have a smaller

tire cross-section. The smaller the tire

cross-section, the higher the risk of tire

damage. There is a danger of accidents and

property damage. If possible, avoid driving

over objects or road conditions that may

damage tires, or drive over them slowly

and carefully.

Changing wheels and tires

Mounting and wheel balancing

Have mounting and tire and wheel balanc-

ing carried out by a dealer’s service center

or another qualified service center or repair

shop.

Wheel and tire combination

General information

You can ask the dealer's service center or

another qualified service center or repair

shop about the correct wheel/tire combina-

tion and wheel rim versions for the vehicle.

Safety information

Warning

Wheels and tires which are not suitable

for your vehicle can damage parts of the

vehicle, for instance due to contact with

the body due to tolerances despite the

same official size rating. There is a risk of

an accident. The manufacturer of your ve-

hicle strongly suggests that you use

wheels and tires that have been recom-

mended by the vehicle manufacturer for

your vehicle type.

Warning

Incorrect wheel/tire combinations will

have a negative impact on the vehicle's

handling and on the function of a variety

of systems, such as the ABS Antilock Brak-

ing System or DSC Dynamic Stability Con-

trol. There is a risk of accident. To main-

tain good handling and vehicle response,

use only tires with a single tread configu-

ration from a single manufacturer. The

manufacturer of the vehicle recommends

that you use wheels and tires that have

been recommended by the vehicle manu-

facturer for your vehicle type. Following

tire damage, have the original wheel/tire

combination remounted on the vehicle as

soon as possible.

Recommended tire brands

For each tire size, the manufacturer of the

vehicle recommends certain tire brands.

The tire brands can be identified by a star

on the tire sidewall.

New tires

Tire traction is not optimal due to manufac-

turing circumstances when tires are brand-

Seite 255

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

255

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

new; they achieve their full traction poten-

tial after a break-in time.

Drive conservatively for the first

200 miles/300 km.

Retreaded tires

Warning

Retreaded tires can have different tire cas-

ing structures. With advanced age the

service life can be limited. There is a risk

of an accident. The manufacturer of your

vehicle does not recommend the use of re-

treaded tires.

The manufacturer of the vehicle does not

recommend the use of retreaded tires.

Winter tires

Winter tires are recommended for operat-

ing on winter roads.

Although so-called all-season M+S tires pro-

vide better winter traction than summer

tires, they usually do not provide the same

level of performance as winter tires.

Maximum speed of winter tires

If the maximum speed of the vehicle is

higher than the permissible speed for the

winter tires, then attach a label showing the

permissible maximum speed in the field of

view. The label is available from a dealer's

service center or another qualified service

center or repair shop.

With winter tires mounted, observe and do

not exceed the permissible maximum speed.

Changing runflat tires

When changing from run-flat tires to stand-

ard tires, it must be ensured that the vehicle

contains a compact spare tire ("donut") or

tire mobility kit. Further information is

available from a dealer's service center or

another qualified service center or repair

shop.

Rotating wheels between axles

Different wear patterns can occur on the

front and rear axles depending on individual

driving conditions. The tires can be rotated

in pairs between the axles to achieve even

wear. Further information is available from

a dealer's service center or another qualified

service center or repair shop. After rotating,

check the tire pressure and correct, if

needed.

Storing tires

Tire inflation pressure

Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation

pressure indicated on the side wall of the

tire.

Storage

Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry and

dark place.

Always protect tires against all contact with

oil, grease, and solvents.

Do not leave tires in plastic bags.

Remove dirt from wheels or tires.

Run-flat tires

Concept

Run-flat tires permit continued driving un-

der restricted conditions even in the event

of a complete loss of tire inflation pressure.

General information

The wheels are composed of tires that are

self-supporting to a limited degree.

Seite 256

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

256

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

The support of the sidewall allows the tire

to remain drivable to a restricted degree in

the event of a tire inflation pressure loss.

Follow the instructions for continued driv-

ing with a flat tire.

Safety information

Warning

The vehicle handles differently when a

run-flat tire has insufficient or no tire

pressure; for instance, reduced lane stabil-

ity when braking, braking distances are

longer and the self-steering properties will

change. There is a risk of accident. Drive

moderately and do not exceed a speed of

50 mph/80 km/h.

Label

The tires are marked on the tire sidewall

with RSC Run-flat System Component.

Repairing a flat tire

Safety measures

– Park the vehicle as far away as possible

from passing traffic and on solid ground.

– Switch on the hazard warning system.

– Secure the vehicle against rolling away

by setting the parking brake.

– Turn the steering wheel until the front

wheels are in the straight-ahead posi-

tion and engage the steering wheel lock.

– Have all vehicle occupants get out of the

vehicle and ensure that they remain out-

side the immediate area in a safe place,

such as behind a guardrail.

– If necessary, set up a warning triangle

at an appropriate distance.

Mobility System

Concept

With the Mobility System, minor tire dam-

age can be sealed temporarily to enable con-

tinued travel. To accomplish this, sealant is

pumped into the tires, which seals the dam-

age from the inside.

General information

– Follow the instructions on using the

Mobility System found on the compres-

sor and sealant container.

– Use of the Mobility System may be inef-

fective if the tire puncture measures ap-

prox. 1/8 inches/4 mm or more.

– Contact a dealer's service center or an-

other qualified service center or repair

shop if the tire cannot be made drivable.

– Do not remove foreign bodies that have

penetrated the tire. Only remove foreign

objects if they are visibly protruding

from the tire.

– Pull the speed limit sticker off the seal-

ant container and apply it to the steer-

ing wheel.

– The use of a sealant can damage the

TPM wheel electronics. In this case,

have the TPM wheel electronics re-

placed at the next opportunity.

– The compressor can be used to check

the tire inflation pressure.

Seite 257

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

257

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Overview

Storage

The Mobility System is located under the

cargo floor panel.

Sealant container

– Sealant container, arrow 1.

– Filling hose, arrow 2.

Observe use-by date on the sealant con-

tainer.

Compressor

1 Sealant container unlocking

2 Sealant container holder

3 Tire pressure gage

4 Reduce tire inflation pressure button

5 On/off switch

6 Compressor

7 Connector/cable for socket

8 Connection hose

Safety measures

– Park the vehicle as far away as possible

from passing traffic and on solid ground.

– Switch on the hazard warning system.

– Secure the vehicle against rolling away

by setting the parking brake.

– Turn the steering wheel until the front

wheels are in the straight-ahead posi-

tion and engage the steering wheel lock.

– Have all vehicle occupants get out of the

vehicle and ensure that they remain out-

side the immediate area in a safe place,

such as behind a guardrail.

– If necessary, set up a warning triangle

at an appropriate distance.

Filling the tire with sealant

Safety information

DANGER

If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila-

tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases

can enter into the vehicle. The exhaust

gases contain pollutants which are color-

less and odorless. In enclosed areas, ex-

haust gases can also accumulate outside of

the vehicle. There is danger to life. Keep

the exhaust pipe free and ensure sufficient

ventilation.

NOTICE

The compressor can overheat during ex-

tended operation. There is a risk of dam-

age to property, among other potential

damage. Do not run the compressor for

more than 10 minutes.

Seite 258

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

258

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Filling

1. Shake the sealant container.

2. Pull filling hose completely out of the

cover of the sealant container. Do not

kink the hose.

3. Slide the sealant container into the

holder on the compressor housing, en-

suring that it engages audibly.

4. Screw the filling hose of the sealant con-

tainer onto the tire valve of the non-

working wheel.

5. With the compressor switched off, in-

sert the connector into the power socket

in the vehicle interior.

6. With the ignition switched on or the en-

gine running, switch on the compressor.

Let the compressor run for max. 10 minutes

to fill the tire with sealant and achieve a

tire inflation pressure of approx. 2.5 bar.

While the tire is being filled with sealant,

the tire inflation pressure may sporadically

reach approx. 5 bar. Do not switch off the

compressor at this point.

Seite 259

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

259

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Checking and adjusting the tire

inflation pressure

Checking

1. Switch off the compressor.

2. Read the tire inflation pressure on the

tire pressure gage.

To continue the trip, a tire inflation pres-

sure of at least 2 bar must be reached.

Removing and stowing the sealant

container

1. Unscrew the filling hose of the sealant

container from the tire valve.

2. Press the red unlocking device.

3. Remove the sealant container from the

compressor.

4. Wrap and store the sealant container in

suitable material to avoid dirtying the

cargo area.

Minimum tire inflation pressure is not

reached

1. Pull the connector out of the power

socket in the vehicle interior.

2. Drive 33 ft/10 m forward and back to

distribute the sealant in the tire.

3. Screw the connection hose of the com-

pressor directly onto the tire valve stem.

4. Insert the connector into the power

socket in the vehicle interior.

5. With the ignition switched on or the en-

gine running, switch on the compressor.

If a tire inflation pressure of at least

2 bar cannot be reached, contact your

dealer's service center or another quali-

fied service center or repair shop.

If a tire inflation pressure of at least

2 bar is reached, see Minimum tire infla-

tion pressure is reached.

6. Unscrew the connection hose of the

compressor from the tire valve.

7. Pull the connector out of the power

socket in the vehicle interior.

8. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.

Minimum tire inflation pressure is

reached

1. Unscrew the connection hose of the

compressor from the tire valve.

2. Pull the connector out of the power

socket in the vehicle interior.

3. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.

4. Immediately drive approx.

5 miles/10 km to ensure that the sealant

is evenly distributed in the tire.

Do not exceed a speed of

50 mph/80 km/h.

If possible, do not drive at speeds less

than 12 mph/20 km/h.

Seite 260

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

260

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Adjustment

1. Stop at a suitable location.

2. Screw the connection hose of the com-

pressor directly onto the tire valve stem.

3. Insert the connector into the power

socket in the vehicle interior.

4. Correct the tire inflation pressure to at

least 2.0 bar.

– Increase tire inflation pressure: with

the ignition switched on or the en-

gine running, switch on the com-

pressor.

– Reduce tire inflation pressure: press

the button on the compressor.

5. Unscrew the connection hose of the

compressor from the tire valve.

6. Pull the connector out of the power

socket in the vehicle interior.

7. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.

Continuing the trip

Do not exceed the maximum permissible

speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to

page 160.

Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to

page 155.

Replace the nonworking tire and the sealant

container of the Mobility System promptly.

Tire chains

General information

The manufacturer of the vehicle has deter-

mined certain wheels and tires to be suita-

ble for operation on the vehicle.

Follow the tire chain manufacturer's in-

structions.

Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after

mounting tire chains, as doing so may result

in incorrect readings.

Do not reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM

after mounting tire chains, as doing so may

result in incorrect readings.

When driving with tire chains, briefly acti-

vate Dynamic Traction Control DTC, if

needed.

Safety information

Warning

With the mounting of tire chains on un-

suitable tires, the tire chains can come

into contact with vehicle parts. There may

be a risk of accident or risk of damage to

property. Only mount tire chains on tires

that are designated by their manufacturer

as suitable for the use of tire chains.

Seite 261

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

261

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Warning

Insufficiently tight tire chains may dam-

age tires and vehicle components. There

may be a risk of accident or risk of damage

to property. Make sure that the tire chains

are always sufficiently tight. Re-tighten as

needed according to the tire chain manu-

facturer's instructions.

Fine-link tire chains

The manufacturer of the vehicle recom-

mends the use of fine-link tire chains. Cer-

tain types of fine-link tire chains have been

tested by the manufacturer of the vehicle

and recommended as road-safe and suitable.

Information regarding suitable tire chains is

available from a dealer’s service center or

another qualified service center or repair

shop.

Use

Use only in pairs on the front wheels, equip-

ped with the tires of the following size:

– 175/65 R 15.

– 175/60 R 16.

– 185/50 R 17.

John Cooper Works:

185/50 R 17.

Maximum speed with tire chains

Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h

when using tire chains.

Changing wheels/tires

General information

When using run-flat tires or a flat tire kit, a

wheel does not always need to be changed

immediately when there is a loss of tire in-

flation pressure due to a flat tire.

If needed, the tools for changing wheels are

available as accessories from a dealer’s

service center or another qualified service

center or repair shop.

Safety information

DANGER

The vehicle jack is only provided for short-

term lifting of the vehicle for wheel

changes. Even if all safety measures are

observed, there is a risk of the raised vehi-

cle falling, if the vehicle jack tips over.

There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.

If the vehicle is raised, do not lie under the

vehicle and do not start the engine.

DANGER

Supports such as wooden blocks under the

vehicle jack reduce the capacity of the ve-

hicle jack to bear weight. They have the

potential to exert too much strain on the

vehicle jack, causing it to tip over and the

vehicle to fall. There is a risk of injuries or

danger to life. Do not place supports under

the vehicle jack.

Warning

The jack, issued by the vehicle manufac-

turer, is provided in order to perform a

wheel change in the event of a breakdown.

The jack is not designed for frequent use;

for example, changing from summer to

winter tires. Using the jack frequently may

cause it to become jammed or damaged.

There is a risk of injury and risk of damage

to property. Only use the jack to attach an

emergency or spare wheel in the event of

a breakdown.

Seite 262

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

262

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Warning

On soft, uneven or slippery ground, for ex-

ample snow, ice, tiles, etc., the vehicle jack

can slip away. There is a risk of injury. If

possible, change the wheel on a flat, solid,

and slip-resistant surface.

Warning

The vehicle jack is optimized for lifting

the vehicle and for the jacking points on

the vehicle only. There is a risk of injury.

Do not lift any other vehicle or cargo using

the vehicle jack.

Warning

When the vehicle jack is not inserted into

the jacking point provided for this pur-

pose, the vehicle may be damaged or the

vehicle jack may slip when it is being

cranked up. There is a risk of injury or risk

of damage to property. When cranking up

the vehicle jack, ensure that it is inserted

in the jacking point next to the wheel

housing.

Warning

A vehicle that is raised on a vehicle jack

may fall off of the jack if lateral forces are

exerted on it. There is a risk of injury and

risk of damage to property. While the ve-

hicle is raised, do not exert lateral forces

on the vehicle or pull abruptly on the vehi-

cle. Have a stuck wheel removed by a deal-

er’s service center or another qualified

service center or repair shop.

Securing the vehicle against rolling

General information

The vehicle manufacturer recommends to

additionally secure the vehicle against roll-

ing away when changing a wheel.

On a level surface

Place wheel chocks or other suitable objects

in front and behind the wheel that is diago-

nal to the wheel to be changed.

On a slight downhill gradient

If you need to change a wheel on a slight

downhill grade, place chocks and other suit-

able objects, for instance rocks, under the

wheels of both the front and rear axles

against the rolling direction.

Preparing the vehicle

– Park the vehicle on solid and non-slip

ground at a safe distance from traffic.

– Switch on the hazard warning system.

Seite 263

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

263

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

– Set the parking brake.

– Engage a gear or move the selector lever

to position P.

– As soon as permitted by the traffic flow,

have all vehicle occupants get out of the

vehicle and ensure that they remain out-

side the immediate area in a safe place,

such as behind a guardrail.

– Depending on the vehicle equipment,

get wheel change tools and, if necessary,

the emergency wheel from the vehicle.

– If necessary, set up a warning triangle

or portable hazard warning light at an

appropriate distance.

– Secure the vehicle additionally against

rolling.

– Loosen the lug bolts a half turn.

Jacking points for the vehicle jack

The jacking points for the vehicle jack are

located at the marked positions.

Jacking up the vehicle

Warning

Hands and fingers can be jammed when

using the vehicle jack. There is a risk of

injury. Comply with the described hand

position and do not change this position

while using the vehicle jack.

1. Hold the vehicle jack with one hand, ar-

row 1, and grasp the vehicle jack crank

or lever with your other hand, arrow 2.

2. Insert the vehicle jack into the rectan-

gular recess of the jacking point closest

to the wheel to be changed.

3. Extend the vehicle jack by turning the

vehicle jack crank or lever clockwise.

4. Take your hand away from the vehicle

jack as soon as the vehicle jack is under

load and continue turning the vehicle

jack crank or lever with one hand.

Seite 264

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

264

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

5. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot

stands vertically and at a right angle be-

neath the jacking point.

6. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot

stands vertically and perpendicularly be-

neath the jacking point after extending

the vehicle jack.

7. Crank the vehicle up, until the vehicle

jack is with the entire surface on the

ground and the relevant wheel is maxi-

mum 1.2 inches/3 cm above ground.

Mounting a wheel

Mount one emergency wheel only, as re-

quired.

1. Unscrew the lug bolts.

2. Remove the wheel.

3. Put the new wheel or emergency wheel

on and screw in at least two lug bolts in

a crosswise pattern until hand-tight.

If non-original light-alloy wheels of the

vehicle manufacturer are mounted, the

accompanying lug bolts may have to be

used as well.

4. Hand-tighten the remaining lug bolts

and tighten all lug bolts well in a cross-

wise pattern.

5. Turn the vehicle jack crank counter-

clockwise to retract the vehicle jack and

lower the vehicle.

6. Remove the vehicle jack and stow it se-

curely.

After the wheel change

1. Tighten the lug bolts crosswise. The

tightening torque is 101 lbs ft/140 Nm.

2. Stow the nonworking wheel in the cargo

area, if necessary.

The nonworking wheel cannot be stored

under the cargo floor panel because of

its size.

3. Check tire inflation pressure at the next

opportunity and correct as needed.

4. Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.

Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM.

5. Check to make sure the lug bolts are

tight with a calibrated torque wrench.

6. Have the damaged tire replaced at the

nearest dealer's service center or an-

other qualified service center or repair

shop.

Emergency wheel

Concept

In the event of a flat tire, the emergency

wheel can be used in place of the wheel

with the defective tire. The emergency

wheel is only intended for temporary use

until the defective tire/wheel has been re-

placed.

General information

Mount one emergency wheel only.

Seite 265

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

265

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Also check the tire inflation pressure of the

emergency wheel in the cargo area regu-

larly, and correct it as needed.

Safety information

Warning

The emergency wheel has particular di-

mensions. When driving with an emer-

gency wheel, changed driving properties

may occur, for instance reduced lane sta-

bility when braking, longer braking dis-

tance, and changed self-steering proper-

ties in the limit area. There is a risk of

accident. Drive moderately and do not ex-

ceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

Overview

The emergency wheel is housed in a well on

the underbody of the vehicle. The screw

connection of the emergency wheel is under

the cargo floor panel, on the floor of the

storage compartment for the onboard vehi-

cle tool kit.

The wheel change tools are under the cargo

floor panel.

Removing the emergency wheel

1. Loosen the nut using the wheel wrench

from the onboard vehicle tool kit.

2. Remove the retaining plate.

3. Screw wheel lug wrench onto the thread

and hold in place with one hand.

4. Unlock the locking hexagon of the emer-

gency wheel well using the hexagon at-

tached to retaining plate.

5. Lower the emergency wheel with the

wheel wrench.

6. Unscrewing the wheel wrench

7. Pull out the well with emergency wheel

under the vehicle toward the rear.

8. Remove the spacer and emergency

wheel from the well.

9. Stow the well and spacer in the vehicle.

Replacing the tires

1. Have the damaged tire replaced.

2. Replace the emergency wheel with the

new wheel.

Installing the emergency wheel

Have the emergency wheel installed back

into the vehicle by a dealer’s service center

Seite 266

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

266

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

or another qualified service center or repair

shop.

Seite 267

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

267

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Engine compartment

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with

the series. It also describes features and

functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-

tions or country versions. This also applies

to safety-related functions and systems.

When using these functions and systems,

the applicable laws and regulations must be

observed.

Overview

1 Filler neck for washer fluid

2 Vehicle identification number

3 Oil filler neck

4 Jump-starting, positive terminal

5 Jump-starting, negative terminal

6 Coolant reservoir

Seite 268

MOBILITY Engine compartment

268

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Hood

Safety information

Warning

Improperly executed work in the engine

compartment can damage vehicle compo-

nents and impair vehicle functions. There

is a risk of an accident and damage to

property. Have work in the engine com-

partment performed by a dealer’s service

center or another qualified service center

or repair shop.

Warning

The engine compartment accommodates

moving components. Certain components

in the engine compartment can also move

with the vehicle switched off, for instance

the radiator fan. There is a risk of injury.

Do not reach into the area of moving parts.

Keep articles of clothing and hair away

from moving parts.

Warning

There are protruding parts, for instance

locking hook, on the inside of the hood.

There is a risk of injury. If the hood is

open, pay attention to protruding parts

and keep clear of these areas.

Warning

An incorrectly locked hood can open while

driving and restrict visibility. There is a

risk of accident. Stop immediately and cor-

rectly close the hood.

Warning

Body parts can be jammed when opening

and closing the hood. There is a risk of in-

jury. Make sure that the area of movement

of the hood is clear during opening and

closing.

NOTICE

Folded-away wipers can be jammed when

the hood is opened. There is a risk of dam-

age to property, among other potential

damage. Make sure that the wipers with

the wiper blades mounted are folded down

onto the windshield before opening the

hood.

NOTICE

When the hood is closed, it must engage

on both sides. Pressing again can damage

the hood. There is a risk of damage to

property, among other potential damage.

Open the hood again and then close it en-

ergetically. Avoid pressing again.

Opening the hood

1. Pull lever, arrow 1.

Hood is unlocked.

2. After the lever is released, pull the lever

again, arrow 2.

Hood can be opened.

Seite 269

Engine compartment MOBILITY

269

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Indicator/warning lights

When the hood is opened, a Check Control

message is displayed.

Closing the hood

Energetically close the hood from approx.

20 in/50 cm.

The hood must engage on both sides.

Seite 270

MOBILITY Engine compartment

270

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Engine oil

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with

the series. It also describes features and

functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-

tions or country versions. This also applies

to safety-related functions and systems.

When using these functions and systems,

the applicable laws and regulations must be

observed.

General information

The engine oil consumption is dependent on

your driving style and driving conditions.

Therefore, regularly check the engine oil

level after refueling by taking a detailed

measurement.

The engine oil consumption can increase in

the following situations, for instance:

– Sporty driving style.

– Break-in of the engine.

– Idling of the engine.

– With use of engine oil types that are

classified as not suitable.

Different Check Control messages appear,

depending on the engine oil level.

Safety information

NOTICE

An engine oil level that is too low causes

engine damage. There is a risk of damage

to property, among other potential dam-

age. Immediately add engine oil.

NOTICE

Too much engine oil can damage the en-

gine or the catalytic converter. There is a

risk of damage to property, among other

potential damage. Do not add too much en-

gine oil. When too much engine oil is

added, have the engine oil level corrected

by a dealer’s service center or another

qualified service center or repair shop.

Electronic oil measurement

General information

The electronic oil measurement has two

measuring principles:

– Monitoring.

– Detailed measurement.

When making frequent short-distance trips

or using a dynamic driving style, for in-

stance when taking curves aggressively,

regularly perform a detailed measurement.

Seite 271

Engine oil MOBILITY

271

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Monitoring

Concept

The engine oil level is monitored electroni-

cally while driving and can be shown on the

Control Display.

If the engine oil level is outside its permis-

sible operating range, a Check Control mes-

sage is displayed.

A red indicator light indicates that

the engine oil pressure is too low.

Functional requirements

A current measured value is available after

approx. 30 minutes of normal driving.

Displaying the engine oil level

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Engine oil level"

The engine oil level is displayed.

System limits

When making frequent short-distance trips

or using a dynamic driving style, it may not

be possible to calculate a measured value.

In this case, the measured value for the last,

sufficiently long trip is displayed.

Detailed measurement

Concept

The engine oil level is checked when the ve-

hicle is stationary and displayed via a scale.

If the engine oil level is outside its permis-

sible operating range, a Check Control mes-

sage is displayed.

General information

During the measurement, the idle speed is

increased somewhat.

Functional requirements

– Vehicle is parked in a horizontal posi-

tion.

– Manual transmission: shift lever in neu-

tral position, clutch and accelerator ped-

als not depressed.

– Steptronic transmission: selector lever

in selector lever position N or P and ac-

celerator pedal not depressed.

– Engine is running and is at operating

temperature.

Performing a detailed measurement

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Engine oil level"

4. "Measure engine oil level"

5. "Start measurement"

The engine oil level is checked and dis-

played via a scale.

Adding engine oil

General information

Only add engine oil when the message is

displayed in the instrument cluster. The

quantity to be added is indicated in the

message displayed in the instrument clus-

ter.

Only add suitable types of engine oil, refer

to page 274.

Safely park the vehicle and switch off the

ignition before adding engine oil.

Take care not to add too much engine oil.

Seite 272

MOBILITY Engine oil

272

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Safety information

Warning

Operating materials, for instance oils,

greases, coolants, fuels, can contain harm-

ful ingredients. There is a risk of injuries

or danger to life. Follow the instructions

on the containers. Avoid the contact of ar-

ticles of clothing, skin or eyes with operat-

ing materials. Do not refill operating mate-

rials into different bottles. Store operating

materials out of reach of children.

NOTICE

An engine oil level that is too low causes

engine damage. There is a risk of damage

to property, among other potential dam-

age. Immediately add engine oil.

NOTICE

Too much engine oil can damage the en-

gine or the catalytic converter. There is a

risk of damage to property, among other

potential damage. Do not add too much en-

gine oil. When too much engine oil is

added, have the engine oil level corrected

by a dealer’s service center or another

qualified service center or repair shop.

Overview

The oil filler neck is located in the engine

compartment, refer to page 268.

Adding engine oil

1. Open the hood, refer to page 269.

2. Open the lid counterclockwise.

3. Add engine oil.

4. Close the lid.

Engine oil types to add

General information

The engine oil quality is critical for the life

of the engine.

Only add the types of engine oil which are

listed.

Safety information

NOTICE

Oil additives can damage the engine.

There is a risk of damage to property,

among other potential damage. Do not use

oil additives.

NOTICE

Incorrect engine oil can cause malfunc-

tions in the engine or damage it. There is a

risk of damage to property, among other

potential damage. When selecting an en-

gine oil, make sure that the engine oil has

the correct oil rating.

Seite 273

Engine oil MOBILITY

273

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Suitable engine oil types

Add engine oils that meet the following oil

rating standards:

Gasoline engine

BMW Longlife-01 FE.

BMW Longlife-14 FE+.

BMW Longlife-17 FE+.

Alternative engine oil types

If an engine oil suitable for continuous use

is not available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an

engine oil with the following oil rating can

be added:

Oil rating

API SL.

API SM.

API SN.

Viscosity grades

When selecting an engine oil, make sure

that the engine oil belongs to one of the fol-

lowing viscosity grades:

Viscosity grades

SAE 0W-20.

SAE 0W-30.

More information about suitable oil ratings

and viscosity grades of engine oils can be

requested from a dealer’s service center or

another qualified service center or repair

shop.

Engine oil change

NOTICE

Engine oil that is not changed in timely

fashion can cause increased engine wear

and thus engine damage. There is a risk of

damage to property. It is recommended

that you do not exceed the service inter-

vals indicated in the vehicle.

The vehicle manufacturer recommends that

you have a dealer's service center or an-

other qualified service center or repair shop

change the engine oil.

Seite 274

MOBILITY Engine oil

274

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Coolant

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with

the series. It also describes features and

functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-

tions or country versions. This also applies

to safety-related functions and systems.

When using these functions and systems,

the applicable laws and regulations must be

observed.

General information

Coolant consists of water and additives.

Not all commercially available additives are

suitable for the vehicle. Do not mix addi-

tives of different colors. Observe the water -

additive mixing ratio of 50:50. Information

about suitable additives is available from a

dealer’s service center or another qualified

service center or repair shop.

Safety information

Warning

With the engine hot and the cooling sys-

tem open, coolant can escape and lead to

scalding. There is a risk of injury. Only

open the cooling system with the engine

cooled down.

Warning

Additives are harmful and incorrect addi-

tives can damage the engine. There is a

risk of injury and risk of damage to prop-

erty. Do not allow additives to come into

contact with skin, eyes or articles of cloth-

ing. Use suitable additives only.

Coolant level

Checking

There are yellow Min and Max marks in the

coolant reservoir.

1. Let the engine cool.

2. Open the hood, refer to page 269.

3. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir

slightly counterclockwise to allow any

excess pressure to dissipate, then open

it.

4. Open the coolant reservoir lid.

Seite 275

Coolant MOBILITY

275

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

5. The coolant level is correct if it lies be-

tween the minimum and maximum

marks in the filler neck.

6. Close the lid.

Adding coolant

1. Let the engine cool.

2. Open the hood, refer to page 269.

3. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir

slightly counterclockwise to allow any

excess pressure to dissipate, then open

it.

4. Open the coolant reservoir lid.

5. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant

up to the specified level; do not overfill.

6. Close the lid.

7. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi-

nated as soon as possible.

Disposal

Comply with the relevant environ-

mental protection regulations when

disposing of coolant and coolant ad-

ditives.

Seite 276

MOBILITY Coolant

276

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Maintenance

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with

the series. It also describes features and

functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-

tions or country versions. This also applies

to safety-related functions and systems.

When using these functions and systems,

the applicable laws and regulations must be

observed.

MINI maintenance system

The maintenance system provides service

notifications and thereby provides support

in maintaining road safety and the opera-

tional reliability of the vehicle.

In some cases, scopes and intervals of the

maintenance system may vary according to

the country version. Replacement work,

spare parts, fuels and lubricants, and wear

materials are calculated separately. Further

information is available from a dealer's serv-

ice center or another qualified service cen-

ter or repair shop.

Condition Based Service CBS

Concept

Sensors and special algorithms take into ac-

count the driving conditions of the vehicle.

CBS uses these to provide maintenance rec-

ommendations.

The system makes it possible to adapt the

amount of maintenance corresponding to

your user profile.

General information

Information on service notifications, refer

to page 133, can be displayed on the Control

Display.

Service data in the vehicle key

Information on the service notifications is

continuously stored in the vehicle key. The

service center can read this data out and

suggest a maintenance scope for the vehi-

cle.

Therefore, hand the service advisor the ve-

hicle key with which the vehicle was driven

most recently.

Storage periods

Storage periods during which the vehicle

battery was disconnected are not taken into

account.

If this occurs, have a dealer's service center

or another qualified service center or repair

shop update the time-dependent mainte-

nance procedures, such as checking brake

fluid and, if necessary, changing the engine

oil and the microfilter/activated-charcoal

filter.

Maintenance Manual and

Service and Warranty Infor-

mation Booklet for US models

and Warranty and Service

Guide Booklet for Canadian

models

Please consult your Maintenance Manual

and Service and Warranty Information

Booklet for US models and Warranty and

Seite 277

Maintenance MOBILITY

277

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models

for additional information on the perform-

ance of service and maintenance work.

The manufacturer of your vehicle recom-

mends that maintenance and repair be per-

formed by a service center or another quali-

fied service center or repair shop. Records

of regular maintenance and repair work

should be retained.

Socket for OBD Onboard Diag-

nosis

General information

Devices connected to the OBD socket trig-

ger the alarm system when the vehicle is

locked. Remove any devices connected at

the OBD socket before locking the vehicle.

Safety information

NOTICE

The socket for Onboard Diagnosis is an in-

tricate component intended to be used in

conjunction with specialized equipment to

check the vehicle’s primary emissions sys-

tem. Improper use of the socket for On-

board Diagnosis, or contact with the

socket for Onboard Diagnosis for other

than its intended purpose, can cause vehi-

cle malfunctions and creates risks of per-

sonal and property damage. Given the fore-

going, the manufacture of your vehicle

strongly recommends that access to the

socket for Onboard Diagnosis be limited to

a dealer's service center or another quali-

fied service center or repair shop or other

persons that have the specialized training

and equipment for purposes of properly

utilizing the socket for Onboard Diagnosis.

Position

There is an OBD socket on the driver's side

for checking the primary components in the

vehicle's emissions.

Emissions

– The warning light lights up:

Emissions are deteriorating.

Have the vehicle checked as soon

as possible.

– The warning light flashes under certain

circumstances:

This indicates that there is excessive

misfiring in the engine.

Reduce the vehicle speed and have the

system checked immediately; otherwise,

serious engine misfiring within a brief

period can seriously damage emission

control components, in particular the

catalytic converter.

Seite 278

MOBILITY Maintenance

278

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Replacing components

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with

the series. It also describes features and

functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-

tions or country versions. This also applies

to safety-related functions and systems.

When using these functions and systems,

the applicable laws and regulations must be

observed.

Vehicle tool kit

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the

onboard vehicle tool kit is located on the

right side under the cargo floor panel or in a

bag on the right side of the cargo area.

After use, secure the bag with the onboard

vehicle tool kit on a lashing eye again.

Wiper blades

Safety information

NOTICE

The window may sustain damage if the

wiper falls onto it without the wiper blade

installed. There is a risk of damage to

property, among other potential damage.

Hold the wiper firmly when changing the

wiper blade. Do not fold or switch on the

wiper without a wiper blade installed.

NOTICE

Folded-away wipers can be jammed when

the hood is opened. There is a risk of dam-

age to property, among other potential

damage. Make sure that the wipers with

the wiper blades mounted are folded down

onto the windshield before opening the

hood.

Replacing the front wiper blades

1. To change the wiper blades, fold up the

wiper arms.

2. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly.

3. Open the wiper blade lock, arrow.

Seite 279

Replacing components MOBILITY

279

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

4. Pull the wiper blade down out of the

holder on the wiper arm, arrow 1.

5. Pull the wiper blade free from the holder

of the wiper arm, arrow 2.

6. Insert and latch a new wiper blade in re-

verse order.

7. Fold down the wiper arm.

Replacing the rear wiper blade

1. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly.

2. Turn the wiper blade all the way back.

3. Push the wiper blade out of the fasten-

ing by continuing to turn it all the way.

4. Insert the new wiper blade by following

the steps in reverse order. The wiper

blade must engage audibly.

5. Fold down the wiper arm.

Light and bulb replacement

General information

Lights and bulbs

Lights and bulbs make an essential contri-

bution to vehicle safety.

Except for the reversing light, all headlights

and lights are designed in LED technology.

The manufacturer of the vehicle recom-

mends that you have appropriate work per-

formed by a dealer’s service center or an-

other qualified service center or repair shop

if you are unfamiliar with it or if it has not

been described here.

A spare light box is available from a dealer's

service center or another qualified service

center or repair shop.

Follow the safety information, refer to

page 280.

Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)

Some items of equipment use light-emitting

diodes installed behind a cover as a light

source. These light-emitting diodes are re-

lated to conventional lasers and are offi-

cially designated as Class 1 light-emitting

diodes.

Follow the safety information, refer to

page 280.

Safety information

Lights and bulbs

Warning

Bulbs can get hot during operation. Con-

tact with the bulbs can cause burns. There

is a risk of injury. Only change bulbs after

they have cooled off.

Seite 280

MOBILITY Replacing components

280

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Warning

Work on switched-on lighting systems can

cause short circuits. There is a risk of in-

jury or risk of damage to property. When

working on the lighting system, switch off

the lights in question. If necessary, heed

the bulb manufacturer's instructions.

NOTICE

Dirty bulbs have a reduced service life.

There is a risk of damage to property,

among other potential damage. Do not

hold new bulbs with your bare hands. Use

a clean cloth or something similar, or hold

the bulb by its base.

Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)

Warning

Intensive brightness can irritate or dam-

age the retina of the eye. There is a risk of

injury. Do not look directly into the head-

lights or other light sources. Do not re-

move the LED covers.

Headlight glass

Condensation can form on the inside of the

headlight glass in cool or humid weather.

When driving with the lights switched on,

the condensation evaporates after a short

time. The headlight glass does not need to

be changed.

If despite driving with the headlights

switched on, increasing humidity forms, for

instance water droplets in the light, have

the headlights checked.

Tail lights, bulb replacement

Overview

All rear lights

1 Side tail lights

2 Rear fog light

3 License plate light

4 Center brake light

Side tail lights

1 Tail lights

2 Turn signals/brake lights

3 Turn signals/brake lights

4 Reversing lights

Side tail lights

Follow the general instructions on lights

and bulbs, refer to page 280.

Bulb, reversing lights: P21W.

Seite 281

Replacing components MOBILITY

281

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

1. Open the tailgate.

2. Remove left or right cover.

3. Turn the bulb holder for the reversing

light, arrow, counterclockwise and re-

move it.

4. Remove the bulb holder from the open-

ing.

5. Press the nonworking bulb gently into

the socket, turn counterclockwise and

remove.

6. Proceed in the reverse order to insert

the new bulb and attach the bulb holder.

Make sure that the bulb holder engages

in all fasteners.

Central brake light and license plate

lights

Follow the general instructions on lights

and bulbs, refer to page 280.

The lights feature LED technology. In the

case of a malfunction, contact a dealer's

service center or another qualified service

center or repair shop.

Vehicle battery

General information

The battery is maintenance-free.

More information about the battery can be

requested from a dealer's service center or

another qualified service center or repair

shop.

Safety information

DANGER

Contact with live components can lead to

an electric shock. There is a risk of inju-

ries or danger to life. Do not touch any

components that are under voltage.

Warning

Vehicle batteries that are not compatible

can damage vehicle systems and impair

vehicle functions. There is a risk of an ac-

cident and damage to property. Only vehi-

cle batteries that are compatible with your

vehicle type should be installed in your ve-

hicle. Information on compatible vehicle

batteries is available at your dealer’s serv-

ice center.

Seite 282

MOBILITY Replacing components

282

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

The manufacturer of the vehicle recom-

mends that you have a service center or an-

other qualified service center or repair shop

after the battery has been replaced. Once

the battery has been registered again, all

comfort features will be available without

restriction and any Check Control messages

displayed which relate to comfort features

will disappear.

Charging the battery

General information

Make sure that the battery is always suffi-

ciently charged to guarantee that the bat-

tery remains usable for its full service life.

A discharged battery is indicated by

a red indicator light.

Charge the battery when acceleration is in-

sufficient.

The following circumstances can have a

negative effect on the performance of the

battery:

– Frequent short-distance drives.

– The vehicle is not used for more than a

month.

Safety information

NOTICE

Battery chargers for the vehicle battery

can work with high voltages and currents,

which means that the 12 volt electrical

system can be overloaded or damaged.

There is a risk of damage to property,

among other potential damage. Only con-

nect battery chargers for the vehicle bat-

tery to the starting aid terminals in the en-

gine compartment.

Charging the battery

Charge the battery only when the engine is

off and via the starting aid terminals, refer

to page 288, in the engine compartment.

Power failure

After a power loss, some equipment needs

to be newly initialized or individual settings

updated, for example:

– Memory function: store the positions

again.

– Time: update.

– Date: update.

– Glass sunroof: initialize the system.

Disposing of old batteries

Have old batteries disposed of by a

dealer’s service center or another

qualified service center or repair

shop or take them to a collection point.

Maintain the filled battery in an upright po-

sition for transport and storage. Secure the

battery so that it does not tip over during

transport.

Fuses

Safety information

Warning

Incorrect and repaired fuses can overload

electrical lines and components. There is a

risk of fire. Never attempt to repair a

blown fuse. Do not replace a nonworking

fuse with a substitute of another color or

amperage rating.

Seite 283

Replacing components MOBILITY

283

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Accessing the fuses

The fuses are located in the glove compart-

ment.

1. Open the glove compartment.

2. Swing the cover down, arrow.

Information on the fuse types and locations,

as well as the positions of any other fuse

boxes, is available on the Internet:

www.mini.com/fusecard.

Where applicable, information on the fuse

types and locations is also found on a sepa-

rate sheet in the fuse box.

Replacing fuses

The vehicle manufacturer recommends that

you have a dealer's service center or an-

other qualified service center or repair shop

replace the fuses.

Seite 284

MOBILITY Replacing components

284

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Breakdown assistance

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with

the series. It also describes features and

functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-

tions or country versions. This also applies

to safety-related functions and systems.

When using these functions and systems,

the applicable laws and regulations must be

observed.

Hazard warning flashers

The button is located above the Control Dis-

play.

The red light in the button flashes when the

hazard warning flashers are activated.

Warning triangle

The warning triangle is located in the tail-

gate. To remove, loosen the brackets.

First-aid kit

General information

Some of the articles have a limited service

life.

Check the expiration dates of the contents

regularly and replace any expired items

promptly.

Storage

Storage for the first-aid kit is provided in

the cargo area.

MINI Roadside Assistance

Concept

MINI Roadside Assistance can be contacted

if assistance is needed in the event of a

breakdown.

Seite 285

Breakdown assistance MOBILITY

285

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

General information

In the event of a breakdown, data on the ve-

hicle's condition is sent to the vehicle man-

ufacturer.

There are various ways of making contact.

– Via a Check Control message, refer to

page 126.

– Calling with a mobile phone.

Requirements

– Active MINI Connected contract or

equipment version with intelligent

emergency call.

– Cellular network reception.

– The ignition is switched on.

Starting

If the vehicle is equipped with Teleservices,

support is offered through Teleservice Diag-

nosis.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "MINI Connected"

2. "MINI Assist"

3. "MINI Roadside Assistance"

The contact to the Roadside Assistance

of the manufacture is established.

A telephone number is displayed, if

needed. Select to dial the telephone

number on a connected mobile phone.

Teleservice Diagnosis

Teleservice Diagnosis enables the wireless

transmission of detailed vehicle data that is

important for vehicle diagnosis. This data is

transmitted automatically.

Teleservice Help

Depending on the country, the Teleservice

Help enables a more in-depth diagnosis of

the vehicle via wireless transmission.

You can launch Teleservice Help by re-

questing it through the Service Specialist.

1. Park the vehicle in a safe place.

2. Set the parking brake.

3. Control Display is switched on.

4. Confirm Teleservice Help.

The driving ability of the vehicle can be re-

stored for specific functions.

If this is not possible, further measures will

be initiated, for instance Roadside Assis-

tance will be informed.

Emergency Call

Intelligent emergency call

Concept

In case of an emergency, an emergency call

can be triggered automatically by the sys-

tem or manually.

General information

Only press the SOS button in an emergency.

The Intelligent Assist system establishes a

connection with the MINI Response Center.

For technical reasons, the Emergency Call

cannot be guaranteed under unfavorable

conditions.

Seite 286

MOBILITY Breakdown assistance

286

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Overview

SOS button in the roofliner

Functional requirements

– The ignition is switched on.

– The Assist system is functional.

– If the vehicle is equipped with intelli-

gent emergency call: the SIM card

integrated in the vehicle has been acti-

vated.

Automatic triggering

Under certain conditions, for instance if the

airbags trigger, an emergency call is auto-

matically initiated immediately after an ac-

cident of corresponding severity. Automatic

Collision Notification is not affected by

pressing the SOS button.

Manual triggering

1. Press the cover briefly to open it.

2. Press the SOS button until the LED at

the button lights up green.

– The LED is illuminated green when an

emergency call has been initiated.

If the situation allows, wait in your vehi-

cle until the voice connection has been

established.

– The LED flashes green when a connec-

tion to the MINI Response Center has

been established.

The MINI Response Center then makes

contact with you and takes further steps

to help you.

Even if you are unable to respond, the

MINI Response Center can take further

steps to help you under certain circum-

stances.

For this purpose, data that serves to de-

termine the necessary rescue measures,

for instance the current position of the

vehicle when it can be determined, is

transmitted to the MINI Response Cen-

ter.

If you can no longer hear the MINI Re-

sponse Center through the loudspeakers,

the hands-free system, for instance, may

be broken. However, the MINI Response

Center may still be able to hear you.

The MINI Response Center ends the emer-

gency call.

Jump-starting

General information

If the battery is discharged, the engine can

be started using the battery of another vehi-

cle and two jumper cables. Only use jumper

cables with fully insulated clamp handles.

Safety Instructions

DANGER

Contact with live components can lead to

an electric shock. There is a risk of inju-

ries or danger to life. Do not touch any

components that are under voltage.

Seite 287

Breakdown assistance MOBILITY

287

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Warning

If the jumper cables are connected in the

incorrect order, sparking may occur. There

is a risk of injury. Pay attention to the cor-

rect order during connection.

NOTICE

In the case of body contact between the

two vehicles, a short circuit can occur dur-

ing jump-starting. There is a risk of dam-

age to property, among other potential

damage. Make sure that no body contact

occurs.

Preparation

1. Check whether the battery of the other

vehicle has a voltage of 12 volts. The

voltage information can be found on the

battery.

2. Switch off the engine of the assisting

vehicle.

3. Switch off any electrical components in

both vehicles.

Starting aid terminals

The starting aid terminal in the engine com-

partment, refer to page 268, acts as the pos-

itive battery terminal.

Open the cover of the starting aid terminal.

The body ground or a special connection on

the body in the engine compartment, refer

to page 268, acts as the negative battery

terminal.

Connecting the cables

To prevent personal injury or damage to

both vehicles, adhere strictly to the follow-

ing procedure.

1. Pull off the lid of the starting aid termi-

nal.

2. Attach one terminal clamp of the posi-

tive jumper cable to the positive battery

terminal, or to the corresponding start-

ing aid terminal of the vehicle providing

assistance.

3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other

end of the cable to the positive battery

terminal, or to the corresponding start-

ing aid terminal of the vehicle to be

started.

4. Attach one terminal clamp of the nega-

tive jumper cable to the negative bat-

tery terminal, or to the corresponding

engine or body ground of assisting vehi-

cle.

5. Attach the second terminal clamp to the

negative battery terminal, or to the cor-

responding engine or body ground of

the vehicle to be started.

Starting the engine

Never use spray fluids to start the engine.

1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle

and let it run for several minutes at an

increased idle speed.

2. Start the engine of the vehicle that is to

be started in the usual way.

If the first starting attempt is not suc-

cessful, wait a few minutes before mak-

ing another attempt in order to allow the

discharged battery to recharge.

3. Let both engines run for several mi-

nutes.

4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the re-

verse order.

Check the battery and recharge, if needed.

Seite 288

MOBILITY Breakdown assistance

288

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Tow-starting and towing

Safety information

Warning

Due to system limits, individual functions

can malfunction during tow-starting/

towing with the Intelligent Safety systems

activated. There is a risk of accident.

Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off

prior to tow-starting/towing.

Steptronic transmission with

driven front axle: transporting the

vehicle

General information

The vehicle must not be towed if the front

wheels are touching the ground.

Safety information

NOTICE

The vehicle can be damaged when towing

the vehicle with a lifted rear axle. There is

a risk of damage to property, among other

potential damage. Have vehicle trans-

ported only with lifted front axle or on a

loading platform.

NOTICE

The vehicle can become damaged when

lifting and securing it.

There is a risk of damage to property,

among other potential damage.

– Lift the vehicle using suitable means.

– Do not lift or secure the vehicle by its

tow fitting, body parts, or suspension

parts.

Pushing the vehicle

To remove a broken-down vehicle from the

danger area, it can be pushed for a short

distance.

For rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to

page 118.

Tow truck

Your vehicle should be transported with a

tow truck with a so-called lift bar or on a

flat bed.

Manual transmission

Towing or pushing the vehicle

A broken-down vehicle can be towed or

pushed.

For rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to

page 116.

NOTICE

If manual unlocking of the parking brake

is not possible, the vehicle cannot be

moved or towed. There is a risk of damage

to property, among other potential dam-

age. The vehicle should only be trans-

ported on a loading platform.

Follow the following instructions:

– Make sure that the ignition is switched

on; otherwise, the low beams, tail lights,

turn signals, and wipers may be unavail-

able.

Seite 289

Breakdown assistance MOBILITY

289

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

– Do not tow the vehicle with the rear

axle tilted, as the front wheels could

turn.

– When the engine is stopped, there is no

power assist. Consequently, more force

needs to be applied when braking and

steering.

– Larger steering wheel movements are

required.

– The towing vehicle must not be lighter

than the vehicle being towed; otherwise,

it will not be possible to control the ve-

hicle's response.

– Do not exceed a towing speed of

30 mph/50 km/h.

– Do not exceed a towing distance of

30 miles/50 km.

Tow truck

With driven front axle

Your vehicle should be transported with a

tow truck with a so-called lift bar or on a

flat bed.

Towing other vehicles

General information

Switch on the hazard warning system, de-

pending on local regulations.

If the electrical system has failed, clearly

identify the vehicle being towed by placing

a sign or a warning triangle in the rear win-

dow.

Safety information

Warning

If the approved gross vehicle weight of the

towing vehicle is lighter than the vehicle

to be towed, the tow fitting can tear off or

it will not be possible to control the vehi-

cle's response. There is a risk of accident.

Make sure that the gross vehicle weight of

the towing vehicle is heavier than the ve-

hicle to be towed.

NOTICE

If the tow bar or tow rope is attached in-

correctly, damage to other vehicle parts

can occur. There is a risk of damage to

property, among other potential damage.

Correctly attach the tow bar or tow rope to

the tow fitting.

Tow bar

The tow fittings used should be on the same

side on both vehicles.

Should it prove impossible to avoid mount-

ing the tow bar at an offset angle, please fol-

low the following:

– Maneuvering capability is limited going

around corners.

– The tow bar will generate lateral forces

if it is secured with an offset.

Tow rope

Observe the following notes when using the

tow rope:

– Use nylon ropes or straps, which will en-

able the vehicle to be towed without

jerking.

Seite 290

MOBILITY Breakdown assistance

290

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

– Make sure the tow rope is not twisted

when fastening.

– Check the fastening of the tow fitting

and tow rope in regular intervals.

– Do not exceed a towing speed of

30 mph/50 km/h.

– Do not exceed a towing distance of

3 miles/5 km.

– When starting to tow the vehicle, make

sure that the tow rope is taut.

Tow fitting

General information

The screw-in tow fitting should always be

carried in the vehicle.

The tow fitting can be screwed in at the

front or rear of the vehicle.

The tow fitting and the onboard vehicle tool

kit, refer to page 279, are together in the

cargo area.

Use of the tow fitting:

– Use only the tow fitting provided with

the vehicle and screw it all the way in.

– Use the tow fitting for towing on paved

roads only.

– Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting,

for instance do not lift the vehicle by the

tow fitting.

– Check the fastening of the tow fitting in

regular intervals.

Safety information

NOTICE

If the tow fitting is not used as intended,

there may be damage to the vehicle or to

the tow fitting. There is a risk of damage

to property, among other potential dam-

age. Follow the notes on using the tow fit-

ting.

Screw thread for tow fitting

Threaded holes for the tow fitting are lo-

cated in the front and rear of the vehicle on

the right side with respect to the direction

of travel.

Press on the mark on the edge of the cover

to push it out.

Tow-starting

Steptronic transmission

Do not tow-start the vehicle.

Tow-starting the engine is not possible due

to the Steptronic transmission.

Have the reasons for the starting difficulties

corrected by a dealer’s service center or an-

other qualified service center or repair

shop.

Manual transmission

If possible, do not tow-start the vehicle but

start the engine by jump-starting, refer to

page 287. If the vehicle is equipped with a

Seite 291

Breakdown assistance MOBILITY

291

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

catalytic converter, only tow-start while the

engine is cold.

1. Switch on the hazard warning system

and comply with local regulations.

2. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 98.

3. Engage third gear.

4. Have the vehicle tow-started with the

clutch pedal pressed and slowly release

the pedal. After the engine starts, imme-

diately press on the clutch pedal again.

5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the

tow bar or tow cable, and switch off the

hazard warning system.

6. Have the vehicle checked by a dealer's

service center or another qualified serv-

ice center or repair shop.

Seite 292

MOBILITY Breakdown assistance

292

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Care

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with

the series. It also describes features and

functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-

tions or country versions. This also applies

to safety-related functions and systems.

When using these functions and systems,

the applicable laws and regulations must be

observed.

Washing the vehicle

General information

Regularly remove foreign objects such as

leaves in the area below the windshield

when the hood is raised.

Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly

in winter. Intense soiling and road salt can

damage the vehicle.

Steam jets or high-pressure

washers

Safety information

NOTICE

When cleaning with high-pressure wash-

ers, components can be damaged due to

the pressure or temperatures being too

high. There is a risk of damage to property,

among other potential damage. Maintain

sufficient distance and do not spray too

long continuously. Follow the operating

instructions for the high-pressure washer.

Distances and temperature

– Maximum temperature: 140 ℉/60 ℃.

– Minimum distance from sensors, cam-

eras, seals: 12 inches/30 cm.

– Minimum distance from glass sunroof:

31.5 in/80 cm.

Automatic washing systems or car

washes

Safety information

NOTICE

Using a car wash with high pressure wash-

ers may result in water penetration of win-

dow areas. There is a risk of damage to

property, among other potential damage.

Do not drive into high-pressure car wash

systems.

NOTICE

Improper use of automatic washing sys-

tems or car washes can cause damage to

the vehicle. There is a risk of damage to

property, among other potential damage.

Follow the following instructions:

– Give preference to cloth car washes

or those that use soft brushes in or-

der to avoid paint damage.

– Do not drive through a car wash with

guide rails higher than 4 in/10 cm to

avoid damage to the chassis.

– Observe the tire width of the guide

rail to avoid damage to tires and rims.

– Fold in exterior mirrors to avoid dam-

age to the exterior mirrors.

Seite 293

Care MOBILITY

293

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

– Unscrew the rod antenna to avoid the

rod antenna breaking off.

– Deactivate the wiper and, if neces-

sary, rain sensor to avoid damage to

the wiper system.

Driving into a car wash with a manual

transmission

In car washes, the vehicle must be able to

roll freely.

Rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to

page 116.

Driving into a car wash with a

Steptronic transmission

In car washes, the vehicle must be able to

roll freely.

Rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to

page 118.

Some car washes do not permit persons in

the vehicle. The vehicle cannot be locked

from the outside when in selector lever po-

sition N. A signal is sounded when an at-

tempt is made to lock the vehicle.

Driving out of a car wash

Ensure that the vehicle key is in the car.

Start the engine, refer to page 99.

Headlights

Do not rub wet headlights dry and do not

use abrasive or acidic cleaning agents.

Soak areas that have been dirtied, for in-

stance from insects, with shampoo and

wash off with water.

Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an

ice scraper.

After washing the vehicle

After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes

briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking ac-

tion can be reduced. The heat generated

during braking dries brake discs and brake

pads and protects them against corrosion.

Completely remove all residues on the win-

dows, to minimize loss of visibility due to

smearing and to reduce wiper noises and

wiper blade wear.

Vehicle care

Vehicle care products

General information

MINI recommends using vehicle care and

cleaning products from MINI. Suitable care

products are available from a dealer’s serv-

ice center or another qualified service cen-

ter or repair shop.

Safety information

Warning

Cleansers can contain substances that are

dangerous and harmful to your health.

There is a risk of injury. When cleaning

the interior, open the doors or windows.

Only use products intended for cleaning

vehicles. Follow the instructions on the

container.

Vehicle paint

General information

Regular care contributes to driving safety

and value retention. Environmental influen-

ces in areas with elevated air pollution or

natural contaminants, such as tree resin or

pollen can affect the vehicle's paintwork.

Tailor the frequency and extent of your ve-

hicle care to these influences.

Corrosive substances such as spilled fuel,

oil, grease or bird droppings, must be re-

Seite 294

MOBILITY Care

294

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

moved immediately to prevent the finish

from being altered or discolored.

Matte finish

Only use cleaning and care products suita-

ble for vehicles with matte finish.

Leather care

Remove dust from the leather regularly, us-

ing a cloth or vacuum cleaner.

Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime

chafe in pores and folds, and lead to in-

creased wear and premature degradation of

the leather surface.

To guard against discoloration, such as from

clothing, clean leather and provide leather

care roughly every two months.

Clean light-colored leather more frequently

because soiling on such surfaces is substan-

tially more visible.

Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt

and grease will gradually break down the

protective layer of the leather surface.

Upholstery material care

General information

Vacuum the upholstery regularly with a

vacuum cleaner.

If upholstery is very dirty, for instance with

beverage stains, use a soft sponge or micro-

fiber cloth with a suitable interior cleaner.

Clean the upholstery down to the seams us-

ing large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing

the material vigorously.

Safety information

NOTICE

Open Velcro® fasteners on articles of

clothing can damage the seat covers.

There is a risk of damage to property,

among other potential damage. Ensure

that any Velcro® fasteners are closed.

Caring for special components

Light-alloy wheels

When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral

wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to

9. Do not use abrasive cleaning agents or

steam jets above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow the

manufacturer's instructions.

Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning

agents can destroy the protective layer of

adjacent components, such as the brake

disc.

After cleaning, apply the brakes shortly to

dry them. The heat generated during brak-

ing dries brake discs and brake pads and

protects them against corrosion.

Chrome surfaces

Carefully clean components such as the ra-

diator grille or door handles with plenty of

water, if necessary, with shampoo added,

particularly when they have been exposed

to road salt.

Rubber components

Environmental influences can cause surface

soiling of rubber parts and a loss of gloss.

Use only water and suitable cleaning agents

for cleaning.

Treat especially worn rubber parts with rub-

ber care agents at regular intervals. When

cleaning rubber seals, do not use any sili-

Seite 295

Care MOBILITY

295

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

con-containing vehicle care products in or-

der to avoid damage or noises.

Fine wood parts

Clean fine wood facing and fine wood com-

ponents only with a moist rag. Then dry

with a soft cloth.

Plastic components

NOTICE

Cleaning agents that contain alcohol or

solvents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-

duty grease removers, fuel and such, can

damage plastic parts. There is a risk of

damage to property, among other potential

damage. Clean with a microfiber cloth.

Dampen the cloth lightly with water, if

needed.

Clean with a microfiber cloth.

Dampen the cloth lightly with water, if

needed.

Do not soak the roofliner.

Safety belts

Warning

Chemical cleansers can destroy the safety

belt webbing. Missing protective effect of

the safety belts. There is a risk of injuries

or danger to life. Use only a mild soapy sol-

ution for cleaning the safety belts.

Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action

and thus have a negative impact on safety.

Use only a mild soapy solution, with the

safety belts clipped into their buckles.

Safety belts should only be allowed to re-

tract if they are dry.

Carpets and floor mats

Warning

Objects in the driver's floor area can limit

the pedal distance or block a depressed

pedal. There is a risk of accident. Stow ob-

jects in the vehicle such that they are se-

cured and cannot enter into the driver's

floor area. Use floor mats that are suitable

for the vehicle and can be safely attached

to the floor. Do not use loose floor mats

and do not layer several floor mats. Make

sure that there is sufficient clearance for

the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats are

securely fastened again after they were re-

moved, for instance for cleaning.

Floor mats can be removed from the car's

interior for cleaning.

If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with

a microfiber cloth and water or a textile

cleaner. To prevent matting of the carpet,

rub back and forth in the direction of travel

only.

Sensor/camera lenses

To clean sensors and camera lenses, use a

cloth moistened with a small amount of

glass detergent.

Displays/Screens/Projection lenses

NOTICE

Chemical cleaning agents, moisture or flu-

ids of any kind can damage the surface of

displays and screens. There is a risk of

damage to property, among other potential

damage. Clean with a clean, antistatic mi-

crofiber cloth.

Seite 296

MOBILITY Care

296

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

NOTICE

The surface of displays can be damaged

with improper cleaning. There is a risk of

damage to property, among other potential

damage. Avoid pressure that is too high

and do not use any scratching materials.

Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber

cloth.

For stubborn soiling on the projection lens

of the Head-up Display, dampen the micro-

fiber cloth with alcohol. Projection lens, re-

fer to page 141.

Long-term vehicle storage

When the vehicle is shut down for longer

than three months, special measures must

be taken. Further information is available

from a dealer's service center or another

qualified service center or repair shop.

Seite 297

Care MOBILITY

297

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Technical data

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with

the series. It also describes features and

functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-

tions or country versions. This also applies

to safety-related functions and systems.

When using these functions and systems,

the applicable laws and regulations must be

observed.

General information

The technical data and specifications in the

Owner's Manual are used as guidance val-

ues. The vehicle-specific data can deviate

from this, for instance due to the selected

special equipment, country version or coun-

try-specific measurement method. Detailed

values can be found in the approval docu-

ments, on labels on the vehicle or can be ob-

tained from a dealer’s service center or an-

other qualified service center or repair

shop.

Dimensions

The dimensions can vary depending on the

model version, equipment or country-spe-

cific measurement method.

The specified heights do not take into ac-

count attached parts, for instance a roof an-

tenna, roof racks or spoiler. The heights can

deviate, for instance due to the selected

special equipment, tires, load and chassis

version.

MINI 3-door

Width with mirrors in/mm 75.9/1,928

Width without mirrors in/mm 68/1,727

Height in/mm 55.7/1,414

Length in/mm 152.8/3,880

Wheelbase in/mm 98.2/2,495

Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 35.4/10.8

Seite 298

REFERENCE Technical data

298

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

MINI 5-door

Width with mirrors in/mm 75.9/1,928

Width without mirrors in/mm 68/1,727

Height in/mm 56.1/1,425

Length in/mm 159.1/4,040

Wheelbase in/mm 101.1/2,567

Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 36.4/11.1

Weights

MINI Cooper, 3-door

Approved gross vehicle weight

Manual transmission lbs/kg 3,505/1,590

Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 3,549/1,610

Load

Manual transmission lbs/kg 697/316

Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 694/315

Approved front axle load

Manual transmission lbs/kg 1,973/895

Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 2,028/920

Approved rear axle load

Manual transmission lbs/kg 1,664/755

Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 1,664/755

MINI Cooper, 5-door

Approved gross vehicle weight

Manual transmission lbs/kg 3,781/1,715

Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 3,836/1,740

Load

Manual transmission lbs/kg 838/380

Seite 299

Technical data REFERENCE

299

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

MINI Cooper, 5-door

Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 847/384

Approved front axle load

Manual transmission lbs/kg 2,061/935

Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 2,116/960

Approved rear axle load

Manual transmission lbs/kg 1,863/845

Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 1,863/845

MINI Cooper S, 3-door

Approved gross vehicle weight

Manual transmission lbs/kg 3,616/1,640

Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 3,627/1,645

Load

Manual transmission lbs/kg 710/322

Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 692/314

Approved front axle load

Manual transmission lbs/kg 2,061/935

Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 2,094/950

Approved rear axle load

Manual transmission lbs/kg 1,687/765

Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 1,687/765

MINI Cooper S, 5-door

Approved gross vehicle weight

Manual transmission lbs/kg 3,869/1,755

Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 3,913/1,775

Load

Manual transmission lbs/kg 840/381

Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 858/389

Seite 300

REFERENCE Technical data

300

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

MINI Cooper S, 5-door

Approved front axle load

Manual transmission lbs/kg 2,150/975

Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 2,183/990

Approved rear axle load

Manual transmission lbs/kg 1,896/860

Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 1,896/860

MINI John Cooper Works, 3-door

Approved gross vehicle weight

Manual transmission lbs/kg 3,715/1,685

Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 3,770/1,710

Load

Manual transmission lbs/kg 787/357

Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 772/350

Approved front axle load

Manual transmission lbs/kg 2,072/940

Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 2,150/975

Approved rear axle load

Manual transmission lbs/kg 1,764/800

Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 1,764/800

Capacities

MINI

Fuel tank, approx. US gal/liters 11.6/44.0

Observe further information on fuel quality,

refer to page 244.

Seite 301

Technical data REFERENCE

301

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Appendix

Any updates to the Owner's Manual of the

vehicle are listed here.

Updates made after the edito-

rial deadline

The following chapters were updated in the

printed version of the Owner's Manual after

the editorial deadline for the Integrated

Owner's Manual in the vehicle had closed:

– Operation: opening and closing: vehicle

key: safety Instructions.

– Operation: opening and closing: vehicle

key: change battery: note.

– Operation: seats, mirrors and steering

wheel: seats and head restraints: safety

belts: general.

In contrast to the description in the

Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle,

the MINI FindMate equipment is not availa-

ble.

Seite 302

REFERENCE Appendix

302

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Seite 303

Appendix REFERENCE

303

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Everything from A to Z

Index

ABS Antilock Braking System 175

Acceleration Assistant, see Launch Con-

trol 121

Accessories and parts 8

ACC, see Camera-based cruise control 179

Activated charcoal filter 206

Activation times, parked-car ventila-

tion 207

Active Cruise Control, see Camera-based

cruise control 179

Active Guard, see Intelligent Safety 162

Adaptive chassis 177

Additives, engine oil types 273

Adjusting menu contents, Central Informa-

tion Display (CID) 40

Adjustments, steering wheel 91

Airbags 151

Airbags, indicator and warning light 153

Air circulation, see Recirculated-air

mode 202, 205

Air conditioner 201

air conditioning, climate 204

Air distribution, manual 202, 206

Air drying, see air conditioning 204

Air flow, air conditioner 202

Air flow, automatic climate control 205

Air outlets, see Ventilation 206

Air pressure, tires 246

Alarm system 75

Alarm triggering 75

Alarm, unintentional 77

All-season tires, see Winter tires 256

Amazon Alexa Car Integration 46

Antifreeze, see Washer fluid 114

Antilock Braking System ABS 175

Anti-slip control, see DSC 175

Apps, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga-

tion, Entertainment, Communication 6

Arrival time 138

Ash tray 214

Assistance when driving off, see Drive-off

assistant 178

Assistance with breakdown 285

Audio, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,

Entertainment and Communication 6

Automatic car wash 293

Automatic climate control 203

Automatic Curb Monitor, exterior mir-

ror 90

Automatic deactivation, front-seat passen-

ger airbags 153

Automatic headlight control 146

Automatic locking 74

Automatic transmission, see Steptronic

transmission 116

Automatic unlocking 75

AUTO program, automatic climate con-

trol 205

AUTO program, intensity 205

Auto Start/Stop function 101

Average consumption 137

Average speed 137

Axle loads, approved 299

Backrest curvature, see Lumbar support 83

Backrest, seats 82

Bad weather light 148

Battery, disposing of 283

Battery, vehicle 282

Being towed, see Tow-starting and tow-

ing 289

Belts, see Safety belts 85

Beverage holder, see Cup holders 222

Blocking, power window, see Safety

switch 79

Bluetooth connection 53

Seite 304

REFERENCE Everything from A to Z

304

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Bonus range, GREEN Mode 238

Bottle holder, see Cup holders 222

Brake assistant 175

Brake discs, break-in 230

Brake pads, break-in 230

Braking, information 232

Breakdown assistance 285

Breaking in 230

Brightness, Control Display 49

Bulb replacement 280

Bulb replacement, rear 281

Bulbs and lights 280

Buttons on the steering wheel 32

Button, SOS 286

Button, Start/Stop 98

Bypassing, see Jump-starting 287

California Proposition 65 Warning 8

Camera-based assistance systems, see Intel-

ligent Safety 162

Camera-based cruise control 179

Camera lenses, care 296

Camera, rearview camera 192

Can holder, see Cup holders 222

Care 293

Care, light-alloy wheels 295

Care of displays, screens 296

Care, vehicle 294

Cargo area 224

Cargo area, adapting size 228

Cargo area, enlarging 226

Cargo area lid 70

Cargo area, storage compartments 226

Cargo cover 226

Cargo position, rear seat backrest 226

Cargo, stowing and securing 224

Cargo straps 225

Carpet, care 296

Car wash 293

Car wash, automatic 293

Catalytic converter, see Hot exhaust gas

system 231

CBS Condition Based Service 277

Cell phone, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-

tion, Entertainment and Communication 6

Center armrest 221

Center console 34

Central Information Display (CID) 36

Central Information Display (CID), see Con-

trol Display 38

Central instrument cluster, LED ring 140

Central locking system, unlocking, from in-

side 68

Central screen, see Control Display 38

Changes, technical, see For Your Own

Safety 7

Changing parts 279

Changing wheels 262

Changing, wheels and tires 255

Charging smartphone, see Wireless charg-

ing tray 216

Charging tray for smartphones, see Wire-

less charging tray 216

Chassis number, see Vehicle identification

number 13

Check Control 126

Check engine oil level 271

Checking the engine oil level electroni-

cally 271

Checking the oil level electronically 271

Children, seating position 92

Children, transporting safely 92

Child restraint system 92

Child restraint system LATCH 95

Child restraint systems, mounting 93

Child safety locks 97

Child seat, mounting 93

Child seats 92

Chrome parts, care 295

Cigarette lighter 214

Cleaning displays, screens 296

Clearance, water 232

Climate control 201, 203

Clothes hooks 222

Coasting 239

Coasting with engine decoupled, see Coast-

ing 239

Coasting with idling engine 239

Combination switch, see Turn signals 106

Seite 305

Everything from A to Z REFERENCE

305

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Combination switch, see Washer/wiper sys-

tem 107, 111

Comfort Access 68

Comfort entry 63

Compartments in the doors 221

Compass 212

Compatible devices, see Suitable devi-

ces 53

Computer, see Trip computer 136

Condensation on windows 203, 206

Condensation under the vehicle 233

Condition Based Service CBS 277

Configuring driving program 178

Confirmation signal 75

Connect device 52

Connecting electrical devices, see Sock-

ets 215

Connections 52

Consumption, see Average consump-

tion 137

Consumption, see Current consump-

tion 132

Contacts, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga-

tion, Entertainment, Communication 6

Continued driving with a flat tire 158, 161

Control Display 38

Control Display, brightness 49

Controller 39

Control systems, driving stability 175

Convenient closing, vehicle key 64

Convenient opening, vehicle key 63

Cooling, maximum 204

Cornering light 147

Corrosion on brake discs 233

Cosmetic mirror 214

Coupling, see Pairing 52

Courtesy lights during unlocking 63

Courtesy lights with the vehicle locked 64

Cruise control 186

Cruise control, active 179

Cruise control with distance control, see

Camera-based cruise control 179

Cruise control without distance control, see

Cruise control 186

Cruising range 132

Cup holder 222

Current consumption 132

Customer service, see Owner's Manual for

Navigation, Entertainment, Communica-

tion 6

Damage, tires 254

Dashboard 32, 214

Data memory 10

Data protection, settings 51

Data, see Deleting personal data 51

Data, technical 298

Date 48

Date, display 132

Daytime running lights 147

DCC, see Cruise control 186

Decorative trim 214

Defrosting, see Windows, defrost-

ing 203, 206

Deleting personal data 51

Departure schedule, see Pre-ventila-

tion 207

Destination distance 138

Device list 52

Digital clock 132

Digital compass 212

Dimensions 298

Dimmable exterior mirrors 90

Dimmable interior mirror 91

Direction indicator, see Turn signals 106

Display, date 132

Display, electronic, instrument clus-

ter 125, 126

Display, engine temperature 138

Display, GREEN Mode 236

Display, iDrive 36

Display lighting, see Instrument light-

ing 149

Displays 123

Disposal, coolant 276

Disposal, vehicle battery 283

Distance control, see PDC 189

Distance to destination 138

Divided screen view, split screen 38

Drive-off assistant 178

Seite 306

REFERENCE Everything from A to Z

306

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Drive-off assistant, see DSC 175

Driver assistance, see Intelligent

Safety 162

Driver profiles 71

Driver profiles, exporting profiles 73

Driver profiles, importing profiles 73

Driving Dynamics Control, see MINI Driv-

ing Modes switch 177

Driving Excitement, SPORT 139

Driving instructions, breaking in 230

Driving mode, GREEN 236

Driving mode, GREEN Driving style analy-

sis 241

Driving modes 177

Driving notes, general 231

Driving notes, things to remember when

driving 230

Driving on racetracks 234

Driving stability control systems 175

Driving, Start/Stop button 98

Driving style analysis 241

Driving through water 232

Driving tip, GREEN tip 238

Driving tips 231

DSC Dynamic Stability Control 175

DTC Dynamic Traction Control 176

DVD, video, see Owner's Handbook for Nav-

igation, Entertainment, Communication 6

Dynamic damping, see Adaptive chas-

sis 177

Dynamic Stability Control DSC 175

Dynamic Traction Control DTC 176

Electronic displays, instrument clus-

ter 125, 126

Electronic oil measurement 271

Electronic Stability Program ESP, see

DSC 175

E-mail, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga-

tion, Entertainment, Communication 6

Emergency braking, see PostCrash -

iBrake 174

Emergency Request 286

Emergency service, see MINI Roadside As-

sistance 285

Emergency unlocking, fuel filler flap 243

Emergency unlocking, transmission

lock 120

Emergency wheel, compact wheel, see

Emergency wheel 265

Energy control 132

Engine, automatic Start/Stop function 101

Engine compartment 268

Engine coolant 275

Engine idling when driving, see Coast-

ing 239

Engine oil 271

Engine oil, adding 272

Engine oil change 274

Engine oil filler neck 272

Engine oil types to add 273

Engine start, see Jump-starting 287

Engine start, see Starting the engine 99

Engine stop 100

Engine temperature, display 138

Entering a destination, see Owner's Hand-

book for Navigation, Entertainment, Com-

munication 6

Entering an address, navigation, see Own-

er's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment

and Communication 6

Entertainment, see Owner's Manual for Nav-

igation, Entertainment and Communica-

tion 6

Equipment, interior 209

Error displays, see Check Control 126

ESP Electronic Stability Program, see

DSC 175

Exchanging, wheels and tires 255

Exhaust gas system 231

Exhaustion warner 173

Exhaust, see Exhaust gas system 231

Exterior mirror, Automatic Curb Moni-

tor 90

Exterior mirror, automatic dimming fea-

ture 90

Exterior mirrors 89

Exterior mirrors, malfunction 90

External start, see Jump-starting 287

Seite 307

Everything from A to Z REFERENCE

307

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

External temperature display 131

External temperature warning 131

Eyes for securing cargo 225

Failure message, see Check Control 126

False alarm, see Avoiding unintentional

alarms 77

Fan, see Air flow 202, 205

Fastening safety belts, see Safety belts 85

Fatigue alert 173

Filler neck for engine oil 272

Filter, see Microfilter 203

Fine wood, care 296

First-aid kit 285

Fish, MINIMALISM display 241

Flat tire, changing wheels 262

Flat tire, continued driving 158, 161

Flat tire, Flat Tire Monitor TPM 160

Flat tire message, FTM 160

Flat tire message, TPM 156

Flat Tire Monitor TPM 160

Flat tire, repairing 257

Flat tire, warning light 156, 160

Flooding, driving through 232

Floor carpet, care 296

Floor mats, care 296

Fold-away position, windshield wip-

ers 110, 113

Foot brake 232

Forward Collision Warning with collision

mitigation 163

For Your Own Safety 7

Front airbags 151

Front-seat passenger airbags, automatic de-

activation 153

Front-seat passenger airbags, indicator

light 154

Front seats 82

Fuel 244

Fuel cap 242

Fuel filler flap 242

Fuel filler flap, emergency unlocking 243

Fuel gauge 130

Fuel quality 244

Fuel recommendation 244

Fuel tank, see Filling capacity 301

Fuse 283

Garage door opener, see Integrated Univer-

sal Remote Control 209

Gasoline 244

Gear shift indicator 134

General driving notes 231

General settings 48

Glare shield 214

Glass sunroof, initialize the system 81

Glass sunroof, see Panoramic glass sun-

roof 79

Glove compartment 220

GPS geolocation, vehicle position 49

GPS, navigation, see Owner's Handbook for

Navigation, Entertainment, Communica-

tion 6

GREEN bonus range 238

GREEN Mode 236

GREEN - program, driving dynamics 177

GREEN tip, driving tip 238

Gross vehicle weight, approved 299

Ground clearance 233

Handbrake, electric, see Parking brake,

electric 104

Handbrake, manual, see Parking brake,

manual 104

Hand-held transmitter, alternating

code 210

Hands-free device, see Owner's Handbook

for Navigation, Entertainment, Communi-

cation 6

Hazard warning flashers 285

Head airbag 152

Headlight control, automatic 146

Headlight flasher 107

Headlight glass 281

Headlights, care 294

Seite 308

REFERENCE Everything from A to Z

308

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Head restraints and seats 82

Head restraints, front 87

Head restraints, rear 88

Head-up Display 141

Head-up Display, shift point indicator 144

Head-up Display, sport displays 143

Head-up Display, standard view 142

Heated steering wheel 91

Heavy cargo, stowing 224

Height, vehicle 298

High-beam Assistant 147

High beams 107

High beams/low beams, see High-beam As-

sistant 147

Hills 233

Hill start assistant, see Drive-off assis-

tant 178

Holder for beverages, see Cup holders 222

HomeLink, see Integrated Universal Remote

Control 209

Homepage, see Internet 6

Hood 269

Horn 32

Hot exhaust gas system 231

HUD Head-up Display 141

Hydroplaning 232

iBrake - PostCrash 174

Ice warning, see External temperature

warning 131

Icy roads, see External temperature warn-

ing 131

Identification marks, tires 252

Identification number, see Vehicle identifi-

cation number 13

Ignition off 98

Ignition on 98

Illuminated ring, central instrument clus-

ter 140

Indicator and warning lights, see Check

Control 126

Indicator light, front-seat passenger air-

bags 154

Indicator light, see Check Control 126

Individual air distribution 202, 206

Individual settings, see Driver profiles 71

Inductive charging, smartphone, see Wire-

less charging tray 216

Inflation pressure, tires 246

Inflation pressure warning TPM, tires 160

Info Display 125

Information 6

Initialization, Flat Tire Monitor FTM 160

Input, iDrive 36

Instrument cluster 123

Instrument cluster, electronic dis-

plays 125, 126

Instrument lighting 149

Integrated key 67

Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehi-

cle 60

Integrated Universal Remote Control 209

Intelligent emergency call 286

Intelligent Safety 162

Intended use 8

Intensity, AUTO program 205

Interior equipment 209

Interior lights 149

Interior lights during unlocking 63

Interior lights with the vehicle locked 64

Interior mirror 89

Interior mirror, automatic dimming fea-

ture 91

Interior mirror, compass 212

Interior mirror, manually dimmable 90

Interior motion sensor 76

Interval display, service notifications 133

Interval mode 108, 111

In the vicinity of the center console 34

In the vicinity of the roofliner 35

Jacking points for the vehicle jack 264

Jam protection system, glass sunroof 81

Jam protection system, windows 78

Jump-starting 287

Seite 309

Everything from A to Z REFERENCE

309

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Keyless Go, see Comfort Access 68

Key, see Integrated key 67

Key, see Vehicle key 62

Kickdown, Steptronic transmission 118

Knee airbag 152

Label on recommended tires 255

Lane departure warning 169

Lane threshold, warning 169

Language, set 48

Lashing eyes 225

LATCH child restraint fixing system 95

Launch Control 121

Leather care 295

LED ring, central instrument cluster 140

LEDs, light-emitting diodes 280

Length, vehicle 298

Letters and numbers, entering 37

Light-alloy wheels, care 295

Light-emitting diodes, LEDs 280

Lighter 214

Lighting 145

Light replacement 280

Light replacement, rear 281

Lights 145

Lights and bulbs 280

Light switch 145

LIM button, see Manual Speed Limiter 171

List, instrument cluster, see Selection

lists 136

List of all messages 50

Load 225

Loading 224

Loading position 226

Loading the cargo area, see Stowing

cargo 224

Location, vehicle position 49

Locking, automatic 74

Locking, from inside 68

Locking, settings 74

Low beams, automatic, see High-beam As-

sistant 147

Low beams, operation 145

Lower back support, see Lumbar sup-

port 83

Luggage rack, see Roof-mounted luggage

rack 233

Lumbar support 83

Maintenance 277

Maintenance recommendations, see Condi-

tion Based Service CBS 277

Maintenance, service notifications 133

Maintenance system, MINI 277

Make-up mirror 214

Malfunction displays, see Check Con-

trol 126

Manual air flow 202

Manual brake, electric, see Parking brake,

electric 104

Manual brake, manual, see Parking brake,

manual 104

Manual control, air distribution 202, 206

Manual control, air flow 205

Manual mode, transmission 119

Manual operation, PDC Park Distance Con-

trol 190

Manual operation, rearview camera 193

Manual Speed Limiter 171

Manual transmission 115

Manufacturer of the MINI 7

Map update, see Owner's Handbook for Nav-

igation, Entertainment, Communication 6

Matt paint, care 295

Maximum cooling 204

Maximum speed display, see Speed Limit

Info 134

Maximum speed, winter tires 256

Measuring units 49

Mechanical key 67

Media of the Owner's Manual 60

Medical supplies, see First-aid kit 285

Menu, instrument cluster, see Selection

lists 136

Seite 310

REFERENCE Everything from A to Z

310

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Menus, Central Information Display

(CID) 40

Messages 50

Messages, see Check Control 126

Microfilter 203, 206

MID - program, driving dynamics 177

MINI Connected, see Owner's Handbook for

Navigation, Entertainment, Communica-

tion 6

MINI driving modes 177

MINI logo projection during unlocking 63

MINI maintenance system 277

MINIMALISM analyzer 241

MINIMALISM information 239

Minimum tread, tires 254

MINI Roadside Assistance 285

Mirrors 89

Mobile communication devices in the vehi-

cle 231

Mobile phone, connecting 52

Mobile phone, see Owner's Manual for Navi-

gation, Entertainment and Communica-

tion 6

Mobile Service, see MINI Roadside Assis-

tance 285

Mobility System 257

Modifications, technical, see For Your Own

Safety 7

Moisture in headlight 281

Monitor, see Control Display 38

Mounting of child restraint systems 93

MP3 player, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-

tion, Entertainment, Communication 6

Multifunction steering wheel, buttons 32

Multimedia, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-

tion, Entertainment and Communication 6

Navigation, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-

tion, Entertainment and Communication 6

Neck restraints, front, see Head restraints

front 87

Neck restraints, rear, see Head restraints

rear 88

Neutral cleaner, see Light-alloy wheels,

care 295

New wheels and tires 255

Notifications 50

OBD Onboard Diagnosis 278

OBD, see OBD Onboard Diagnosis 278

Obstacle marking, rearview camera 194

Octane rating, see Recommended fuel

grade 245

Odometer 131

Oil 271

Oil, adding 272

Oil change 274

Oil filler neck 272

Oil service interval, service notifica-

tions 133

Oil types to add, engine 273

Onboard literature, printed 60

Onboard vehicle tool kit 279

On-call service, see MINI Roadside Assis-

tance 285

Opening and closing 62

Opening, from inside 68

Operating concept Central Information Dis-

play (CID) operating concept 36

Operating menus, Central Information Dis-

play (CID) 36

Operation via the Controller 40

Operation via touchscreen 42

Operation via voice 44

Optional equipment, see Vehicle equip-

ment 7

Overwintering, see Long-term vehicle stor-

age 297

Owner's Manual, printed 60

Paint, car care 294

Pair device 52

Panic alarm, see Panic mode 76

Panic mode 76

Seite 311

Everything from A to Z REFERENCE

311

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Panoramic glass sunroof 79

Parallel parking assistant 195

Park Distance Control PDC 189

Parked vehicle, condensation 233

Parking aid, see PDC 189

Parking assistant 195

Parking brake, electric 104

Parking brake, manual 104

Parking lights 145

Parts and accessories 8

Passenger's side exterior mirror, tilt down,

see Automatic Curb Monitor 90

Pathway lighting 146

Pathway lines, rearview camera 193

Payload, technical data 299

PDC Park Distance Control 189

Pedestrian Collision Warning with City Col-

lision Mitigation 167

Performance Control 177

Personal data, deleting 51

Personal profile, see Driver profiles 71

Phone, connecting 52

Plastic, care 296

PostCrash - iBrake 174

Power failure 283

Power windows 77

Pressure, tires 246

Pre-ventilation 207

Printed onboard literature 60

Profiles, see Driver profiles 71

Programmable memory buttons, Central In-

formation Display (CID) 43

Protective function, glass sunroof, see Jam

protection system 81

Protective function, windows, see Jam pro-

tection system 78

Push-and-turn reel, see Controller 39

Racetrack operation 234

Radio-ready state 99

Radio, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,

Entertainment and Communication 6

Rain sensor 108, 111

Ratchet straps 225

Rear lights 281

Rear seat backrests, folding down 226

Rearview camera 192

Rear-view mirrors, exterior 89

Rear window defroster 203, 206

Rear window wiper, operation 109, 113

Recirculated-air filter, see Microfilter/acti-

vated-charcoal filter 206

Recirculated-air mode 202, 205

Recommended fuel grade 245

Recommended tire brands 255

Refueling 242

Remaining range 132

Remote control, universal 209

Remote services, app, see Owner's Hand-

book for Navigation, Entertainment, Com-

munication 6

Replacing parts 279

Replacing the battery, vehicle key 65

Replacing, wheels and tires 255

Reporting safety malfunctions 14

RES CNCL button, camera-based cruise con-

trol 179

RES CNCL button, cruise control 186

Reserve warning, see Range 132

Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 156

Retreaded tires 256

Roadside parking lights 146

Rolling code hand-held transmitter 210

RON recommended fuel grade 245

Roofliner 35

Roof-mounted luggage rack 233

Route, navigation, see Owner's Handbook

for Navigation, Entertainment, Communi-

cation 6

RTTI, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga-

tion, Entertainment, Communication 6

Rubber components, care 295

Run-flat tire 256

Safe braking 232

Safety belt reminder for driver's seat and

front passenger seat 86

Safety belt reminder for the rear seats 86

Seite 312

REFERENCE Everything from A to Z

312

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Safety belts 85

Safety belts, care 296

Safety locks, doors, and windows 97

Safety switch, windows 79

Safety systems, see Airbags 151

Saving fuel 235

Screen, see Control Display 38

Screwdriver 279

Sealant, see Mobility System 257

Seat heating, front 85

Seating position for children 92

Seats and head restraints 82

Seats, front 82

Securing, cargo 224

Selection list in the instrument cluster 136

Sensors, care 296

Service and warranty 9

Service Center, see MINI Roadside Assis-

tance 285

Service notifications, display 133

Service notifications, see Condition Based

Service CBS 277

Servotronic 178

SET button, camera-based cruise con-

trol 179

SET button, cruise control 186

Setting, Control Display 49

Settings, general 48

Settings, locking/unlocking 74

Settings, mirrors 89

Settings, seats and head restraints 82

Shift paddles on the steering wheel 120

Shift point indicator, Head-up Display 144

Side airbag 151

Signaling, horn 32

Signals when unlocking 75

Sitting safely 82

Slide/tilt glass roof 79

Smallest turning circle, vehicle 298

Smartphone, connecting 52

Smartphone, see Owner's Manual for Navi-

gation, Entertainment and Communica-

tion 6

Socket, OBD Onboard Diagnosis 278

Sockets, electrical devices 215

Software update 58

Software, updating 58

SOS button 286

Sound output, see Owner's Handbook for

Navigation, Entertainment, Communica-

tion 6

Spare tire, see Emergency wheel 265

Speech recognition 44

Speed Limit Device, see Speed Limiter 171

Speed limit display, see Speed Limit

Info 134

Speed Limiter 171

Speed Limit Info 134

Speed Limit Info, trip computer 138

Speed limit, see Speed Limiter 171

Speed, see Average speed 137

Speed warning 140

Split screen 38

Sport displays 139

Sport displays, Head-up Display 143

SPORT program, driving dynamics 178

Sport program, transmission 118

Stability control systems 175

Standard equipment, see Vehicle equip-

ment 7

Standard view, Head-up Display 142

Stars, MINIMALISM display 241

Start/stop, automatic function 101

Start/Stop button 98

Starting the engine 99

Stations, AM/FM, see Owner's Handbook

for Navigation, Entertainment, Communi-

cation 6

Status control display, tires 155

Status information, Central Information Dis-

play (CID) 37

Status of Owner's Manual 7

Status, vehicle 144

Steering assistance 178

Steering column adjustment 91

Steering wheel, adjusting 91

Steering wheel, buttons 32

Steptronic Sport transmission, see Step-

tronic transmission 116

Steptronic Sport transmission with double

clutch, see Steptronic transmission 116

Steptronic transmission 116

Seite 313

Everything from A to Z REFERENCE

313

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Steptronic transmission with double clutch,

see Steptronic transmission 116

Stopping the engine 100

Storage compartments 220

Storage, tires 256

Storing the vehicle 297

Stowing, cargo 224

Suitable devices 53

Suitable mobile phones 53

Summer tires, tread 254

Sun visor 214

Supplementary Owner's Manuals 60

Supplementary text message 130

Switches, see Dashboard 32

Switch for driving dynamics 177

Symbols 6

Tachometer 131

Tailgate 70

Tailgate via vehicle key 64

Tail lights 281

Tank capacity 301

Technical changes, see For Your Own

Safety 7

Technical data 298

Telephone, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-

tion, Entertainment and Communication 6

Teleservices, see Owner's Handbook for

Navigation, Entertainment, Communica-

tion 6

Temperature, air conditioner 201

Temperature, automatic climate con-

trol 204

Temperature display for external tempera-

ture 131

Temperature, engine 138

Terminal, starting aid 288

Text message, Check Control 130

Theft alarm system, see Alarm system 75

Thigh support 84

Third-party provider, voice assistant 46

Tilt alarm sensor 76

Tilt down, passenger's side exterior mirror,

see Automatic Curb Monitor 90

Time 48

Time of arrival 138

Tire brands, recommended 255

Tire chains 261

Tire damage 254

Tire identification marks 252

Tire inflation pressure 246

Tire inflation pressure monitoring, see

TPM 160

Tire inflation pressure monitor TPM 160

Tire pressure 246

Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 155

Tire repair kit, see Mobility System 257

Tires 246

Tires, changing 255

Tire sealant, see Mobility System 257

Tires, run-flat 256

Tire tread 254

Tone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,

Entertainment and Communication 6

Tools 279

Touchscreen 42

Towing 289

Tow-starting 289

TPM Flat Tire Monitor 160

TPM Tire Pressure Monitor 155

Traction control 176

TRACTION, see Dynamic Traction Control,

DTC 176

Traffic bulletins, see Owner's Handbook for

Navigation, Entertainment, Communica-

tion 6

Transmission lock, electronic unlock-

ing 120

Transmission, manual transmission 115

Transmission, see Steptronic transmis-

sion 116

Transporting children safely 92

Travel computer 138

Tread, tires 254

Trip computer 136

Triple turn signal activation 106

Trip odometer 131

Trip recorder, see Trip odometer 131

Trunk, see Cargo area 224

Turning circle, vehicle 298

Seite 314

REFERENCE Everything from A to Z

314

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Turning radius lines, rearview camera 193

Turn signal, indicator light 129

Turn signals, operation 106

Turn signals, rear, bulb replacement 281

Unintentional alarm, avoiding 77

Units, see Measuring units 49

Universal remote control 209

Unlocking, automatic 75

Unlocking, settings 74

Updates made after the editorial deadline 7

Updating, software 58

Upholstery care 295

Upper retaining strap, top tether 96

USB connection 55

USB port, position in vehicle 216

Used battery, disposing of 283

Use, intended 8

Using a smartphone via voice control 46

Vanity mirror 214

Vehicle battery 282

Vehicle breakdown, see Breakdown assis-

tance 285

Vehicle, breaking in 230

Vehicle care 294

Vehicle care products 294

Vehicle equipment 7

Vehicle identification number 13

Vehicle jack 264

Vehicle key, additional 65

Vehicle key, loss 65

Vehicle key, malfunction 66

Vehicle key, opening/closing 62

Vehicle key, replacing the battery 65

Vehicle key, see Vehicle key 62

Vehicle paint, care 294

Vehicle position, vehicle location 49

Vehicle status 144

Vehicle storage 297

Vehicle washing 293

Ventilation 206

Ventilation, see Pre-ventilation 207

Venting, see Ventilation 206

Vent, see Ventilation 206

VIN, see Vehicle identification number 13

Voice assistant, third-party provider 46

Voice command response 44

Voice control 44

Voice control system 44

Warning and indicator lights, see Check

Control 126

Warning displays, see Check Control 126

Warning messages, see Check Control 126

Warning triangle 285

Warranty 8

Washer fluid 114

Washer nozzles, windshield 109, 113

Washer system 107, 111

Washing the vehicle 293

Washing, vehicle 293

Water on roads 232

Website 6

Weights 299

Welcome lights 146

Welcome lights during unlocking 63

Wheel base, vehicle 298

Wheels 246

Wheels, changing 255

Width, vehicle 298

Windows, powered 77

Windshield defroster 203, 206

Windshield washer fluid, see Washer

fluid 114

Windshield washer nozzles 109, 113

Windshield wiper, see Wiper sys-

tem 107, 111

Windshield wipers, fold-away posi-

tion 110, 113

Winter storage, see Long-term vehicle stor-

age 297

Winter tires, suitable tires 256

Winter tires, tread 254

Wiper blades, replacing 279

Seite 315

Everything from A to Z REFERENCE

315

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

Wiper fluid, see Washer fluid 114

Wiper, see Washer/wiper system 107, 111

Wiper system 107, 111

Wireless charging, smartphone, see Wire-

less charging tray 216

Wireless charging tray for smart-

phones 216

Wood, care 296

Word match concept, navigation 37

Working in, engine compartment 269

Wrench 279

Seite 316

REFERENCE Everything from A to Z

316

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

01405A2C1C9 ue

*BL5A2C1C900V*

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

California Proposition 65

Warning

For vehicles sold in California:

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21

MINI MOTORER'S GUIDE APP.

Your customized information about the vehicle in an app.

Optimized for smartphones & tablets. Can be used offline.

01405A2C1C9 ue

*BL5A2C1C900V*

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21